Home

1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive - Mid

1. WF A A A s Input Fusing gt gt lied G3 Supplied To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect QO EDI LR AC Input Line o o f AS 1336F BPR and CPR Drives are supplied with a separately mounted pre wired DC Bus Inductor see Appendix B If the AN N cable length between the choke and drive is not sufficient longer cables same size amp type can be used Cable routing must also be considered when mounting the choke 23 G3 typical terminal DC DC 380 480V 187 448 kW 250 600 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 224 448 kW 300 600 HP Terminal Designations O fe lo o A OHS olo o Q Gron T S R 3 L3 L2 L1 Q A A 4 AA Ie Required G amp 3 Input Fusing 1 Required Branch i H y Circuit Disconnect in MS AC Input Line User supplied Q f typical terminal layout located at top of drive lt x G Brake terminals are located on the DC Bus Inductor behind the U terminal access from the right side of the chassis to DC Terminal on Brake to DC Terminal on Brake 2 24 Inst
2. TB2 Control amp Signal Wiring TB3 Control Interface Option TB4 24V DC Auxiliary Input TB6 High Voltage DC Auxiliary Input R 8 T TB9 480 or 600V Auxiliary Output F Frame Only I TE Control amp Signal Shield Terminals TB9 E TB3 TB3 sg TB4 3122 TB3 lt BE TB2 EN TE amp TB6 T mA annur E Control ie TB4 eG m TE TE IE iH LEE TB2 TB1 U VW Sem a TE Location amp Brake Control Interface TB3 TB6 nae eared TB2 eee Brake L PE EE v j TBI TB Terminals Ground 9 g QJ 9 Frames A1 M 1 Frames B C1 Frames D E1 Frame F1 Frame G1 1 Refer to page 1 1 for frame reference classifications and Figure 2 2 for TB1 details Installation Wiring 2 15 Table 2 D TB1 Specifications Drive Frame Max Min Wire Size Maximum Torque Size mm2 AWG N m Ib in A1 A4 page 2 21 5 3 0 8 10 18 1 81 16 B1 page 2 21 8 4 0 8 8 18 1 81 16 B2 page 2 21 13 3 0 5 6 20 1 70 15 C page 2 21 26 7 0 8 3 18 5 65 50 D page 2 22 3 4 120 0 2 1 4 0 14 6 00 52 67 4 2 1 00 14 2 6 00 52 E page 2 22 5 253 0 2 1 500 MCM 14 10 00 87 F page 2 23 3 303 6 2 1 600 MCM 14 23 00 200 G page 2 23 3 303 6 2 1 600 MCM 14 23 00 200
3. Table 2 E Lug Selection AC Input R S T Output U V W and PE DC DC 2 TE Drive Catalog Cable per Phase T amp B Part No 3 Cable perPhase T amp B Part No 3 Cable per Phase T amp B Part No Number Qty mm2 AWG Qty Number Qty mm AWG _ Qty Number Qty mm AWG Qty Number 1336F A040 1 53 5 1 0 8 54153 1 13 3 6 2 54135 1 13 3 6 1 54135 1336F A050 1 85 0 8 0 8 541631 1 13 3 6 2 54135 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F A060 1 107 2 4 0 8 541681 1 13 3 6 2 54135 1 21 2 4 1 541391 1336F A075 2 53 5 1 0 8 54109T 1 33 6 2 2 54109 1 21 2 4 1 541391 8 54109B 1336F A100 2 85 0 3 0 8 54111T 1 424 1 2 54148 1 33 6 2 1 541421 8 54111B 1336F A125 2 107 2 4 0 8 54112T 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 1 33 6 2 1 541421 8 54112B 1336F B060 1 42 4 1 8 54147 1 84 8 2 54131 1 13 3 6 1 54135 1336F B075 1 53 5 1 0 8 541531 1 13 3 6 2 541351 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F B100 1 85 0 3 0 8 541631 1 13 3 6 2 541351 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F B125 1 107 2 4 0 8 541681 1 267 3 2 541471 1 21 2 4 1 541391 1336F BX150 1 107 2 4 0 8 541681 1 26 7 3 2 541471 1 21 2 4 1 541391 1336F B150 2 53 5 1 0 8 54109T 1 33 6 2 2 54110 1 21 2 4 1 541391 8 54109B 1336F B2
4. lt A Z lt C Max gt Y lt D gt j lt G gt lt F i D e Allen Bradley D EE AA E l E Mounting Hole Detail A 70 028 12 7 050 pza D 12 7 0 50 Y N lt CC Three Phase Rating Frame Mounting Holes 4 Detail E E 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V Reference 0 37 0 75kW 0 374 2KW A F T f 0 5 1 HP 0 5 1 5 HP Bottom View Will Vary with HP See Bottom View Dimensions 12 15 kW 15 2 kW 5 M 1 5 2 HP 2 3 HP 2 2 3 7 kW 3 7 kW A3 fr 3 5 HP 5 HP 5 5 kW 5 5 15 kW 0 75 15 kW A4 7 5 HP 7 5 20 HP 1 20 HP q 5 5 11 kW 11 22 kW B1 B2 7 5 15 HP 15 30 HP 15 22 kW 30 45 kW 18 5 45 kW C 20 30 HP 40 60 HP 25 60 HP 30 45 kW 45 112 kW 56 93 kW D 40 60 HP 60 150 HP 75 125 HP 56 93 kW 112 187 kW 112 224 kW E 75 125 HP 150 250 HP 150 300 HP 187 336 kW 261 298 kW F MEM 250 450 HP 350 400 HP 187 448 kW 224 448 kW G All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 250 600 HP 300 600 HP All Weights in Kilograms and Pounds Use care when choosing Frame Reference Some ratings may exist in another frame size Frame G Shipping Reference A B CMax D E F Encl Open Y Z AA BB Cc Weights M 2159 290 0 1600 1852 2750 508 1054 1054 1535 75 1300 762 853 4 31kg 850 1142 6 30 729 1083 200 415 415 060
5. Fault Display Name Reset Run 02 Auxiliary Fault Yes 03 Power Loss Fault Yes 04 Undervolt Fault Yes 05 Overvolt Fault Yes 06 Motor Stall Fault Yes 07 Overload Fault Yes 08 Overtemp Fault Yes 09 Open Pot Fault No 10 Serial Fault No 11 Op Error Fault No 12 Overcurrent Fit Yes 13 Ground Fault No 14 Option Error No 15 Motor Thermistor No 16 Bipolar Dir Fit No 17 C167 Watchdog No 18 Hardware Trap No 19 Precharge Fault No 20 Load Loss Fit No 22 DSP Reset Fault Yes 23 Loop Overrn Fit Yes 24 Motor Mode FIt Yes 26 Power Mode Fault Yes 27 DSP Comm Fault No 28 DSP Timeout Fault No 29 Hertz Err Fault No 30 Hertz Sel Fault No 31 DSP Queue Fault No 32 EEprom Fault No 33 Max Retries Fault No 34 Prm Access Flt No 35 Neg Slope Fault No 36 Diag C Lim Fit No 37 DSP Checksum No 38 Phase U Fault No 39 Phase V Fault No 40 Phase W Fault No 4 UV Short Fault No 42 UW Short Fault No 43 VW Short Fault No 46 DSP Protected No 47 Xsistr Desat Flt No 48 Reprogram Fault No 49 Input Phase FIt No 50 Poles Calc Fault No 51 Bgnd 10ms Over Yes 52 Fgnd 10ms Over Yes 53 EE Init Read No 54 EE Init Value No 55 Temp Sense Open No Note Fault Numbers not listed are reserved for future use Troubleshooting 7 9 Alarms Table 7 D presents a listing and description of the drive alarms Alarm status can be viewed by selecting the Drive Alarm 1 2 parameter A
6. First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Fifth Position Sixth Position Bulletin Number Voltage Nominal HP Rating Enclosure Type Language Groupo Options Letter Voltages Code Type Code Language AQ 200 240V AC or Refer to table below for AA IP20 NEMA 1 EN English 310V DC CER AE IP 20 NEMA 1 EMC FR French BR ree voltage combinations AF IP 65 NEMA 4 G DE Geman c pups ic AJ IP 54 NEMA 12 IT Italian or 775V DC AN IP 00 Open ES Spanish A 200 240V AC JP Japanese B 380 480V AC BEBO 3 Frame AG Code Description BX Special Rating Human Interface Module Snap In IP20 NEMA Type 1 C 500 600V AC HASB Snap In Cradle Blank Plate CP CPR 500 600V AC HASP Programmer Only F Frame HCSP Programmer Only amp Upload Download Capability Q 310V DC HAS1 Programmer Controller w Analog Pot R 513 620V DC HCS1 Programmer Controller w Analog Pot amp Upload Download Capability RX Special Rating HAS2 Programmer Controller w Digital Pot w 775V DC HCS2 Programmer Controller w Digital Pot amp Upload Download Capability Human Interface Module IP 65 54 NEMA Type 4 12 HJP Programmer Only HJ2 Programmer Controller w Digital Pot Y Communication Options B Frame amp Up Adapter 6 Voltage and Nominal HP Rating Combinations GM1 Single Point Remote I O B Frame BP CPI GM2 RS 232 422 485 DF1 amp DH485 B Frame Code Rati
7. CE Conformity C 7 Required Knockout Assignments Dimensions are in Millimeters and Inches Frames A1 through A4 Frames B and C Control I O Control I O Filter Input Motor Output Filter Input Motor Output id D SCANport PES SCANport 22 2 28 6 0 88 1 13 3 Plcs 22 2 0 88 1 Plc 28 6 34 9 1 13 1 38 3 Plcs 22 2 0 88 1 Plc Frame D Frame E SCANport Motor O Filter Input ControllO side of Drive Filter Input otor Output ee Motor Output Control I O SCANport e N zi A A A 34 9 50 0 1 38 1 97 1 Plc 34 9 1 38 3 Plcs 62 7 76 2 2 47 3 00 2 Plcs rA A AO E J 7 i Z d T 3 m 4 88 9 104 8 3 50 4 13 12 7 0 50 2 Plcs 3 Plcs C 8 CE Conformity Filter Dimensions TB Cover 50 0 1 97 x 41 0 1 61 x 66 0 2 60 a B gt x E gt lt H gt 6 5 0 26 A iC a EN Braided Shield PES 5 A A D f l a Tm H 100 0 3 94 10 0 0 39 x F gt bs 10 0 0 39 Md nm 1 1 0 0 04 Y EN A All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Catalog Weight Number A B e D E F H kg Ibs 1336 RFB 7 AA 50 0 255 0 126 0 25 0 240 0 180 0 225 0 14 1 97 10 04 4 96 0 98 9 45 7 09 8
8. Drive Status 1 Parameter Number 59 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the actual oper ating condition in binary format Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO Bits 0 7 are displayed on lower half of Sa ao i line 2 on HIM display while bits 8 15 are Reference Local Hd Enabled j i Adapter unning displayed on the upper half of line 2 Commen scan A Status description bit ENUM is dis Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 0 Reverse played on line 1 except Series A HIMs p M ie 1 Forward i Teset Freq Actual Direction below version 3 0 PrsetFreq2 0 0 1 0 2 o ow 0 Reverse Preset Freq3 0 0 1 1 3 0 d 1 Y 1 Forward PresetFreqd O 1 0 0 4 i Preset Freq5 0 1 0 1 5 101 Y Accelerating PreetFreq6 0 1 1 0 6 1 10 Y Decelerating PresetFreq7 0 1 1 1 Unused 1 1 1 Y Alarm FreqSelet2 1 0 0 0 Y Faulted Adapter 1 10 0 1 At Speed Adapter 2 TOTO Adapter 3 y xw ws l Adapter 4 y 33 9 Adapter 5 y wx 3 Adapter 6 jy 3p wd 49 Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1 Drive Status 2 Parameter Number 236 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the actual operating con dition in binary format Bit 15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit 12 Bit11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit Bito Bits 0 7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM i i display while bits 8 15 are displayed on the upper At Temp At Freq hal
9. Table 2 F Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters feet 380V 480V Drives No External Devices w 1204 TFB2 Term w 1204 TFA1 Terminator Reactor at Drive2 Motor Motor Motor Motor 1600V or A B 1329 1329R L 1850V A or B 1329 JA B 1329 A B or 1329 Drive DrivekW MotorkW Any Any Any Any Cable Type gn Cable Type CableType an ary Any Frame HP HP Cable Cable Cable Cable Shid 3 Unshid Cable Shid 3 Unshld Shid3 Unshid Cable Cable Cable A1 0 37 0 5 10 37 0 5 12 2 33 5 191 4 191 4 305 161 0 1305 61 0 1914 22 9 11829 40 110 300 800 100 200 100 200 300 75 600 0 75 1 075 1 122 335 191 4 191 4 305 130 5 30 5 30 5 1914 22 9 11829 40 110 300 300 100 100 100 100 300 75 600 0 37 0 5 12 2 133 5 91 4 91 4 Use 1204 TFA1 305 161 0 30 5 61 0 1914 229 11829 40 110 300 300 100 200 100 200 300 75 600 12 15 12 15 122 335 91 4 91 4 305 130 5 610 61 0 1914 229 11829 40 110 800 800 100 100 200 200 300 75 600 0 75 1 122 335 91 4 91 4 305 130 5 610 61 0 1914 229 11829 40 110 300 800 100 100 200 200 300 75 600 0 37 0 5 12 2 133 5 1143 121 9 305 130 5 610 610 11219 229 11829 40 110 375 400 100 100 200 200 400 75 600 A2 1 5 2 15 2 76 3122 91 4 914 914 914 91 4 3
10. RIO DH or Analog Common Mode Core To Computer Position Controller for TE shield ground see Control and Signal Wiring Common Mode Core U Tt A ig V T2 W T3 d PE Gnd i f Av 1 Shield Motor Frame pg C Motor Terminator Ground per Local Codes Options that can be installed as needed Single Point Grounding Panel Layout R L1 z L S L2 To Nearest Building H Structure Steel LS T L3 mE For Programmable Controller 3 e T Ie T Te NN grounding recommendations l E refer to publication 1770 4 1 3 e TE Zero Volt Potential Bus Isolated from Panel At hd 1836 FORCE 1336 PLUS CO O Q 0008 Z EE Esa Nearest Building 5 Structure Steel Logic F pes PE TE PE Ni i e e P
11. 9 53 29 9 Eg 1 BOE Common User Supplied L ie el PEN UENIR User Supplied 24V AC DC T T Fog 2vAobC L8E Option L5 L5E amp L8E 24V AC DC Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with these options must be capable of operating with high true logic DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 8V DC Leakage current must be less than 1 5 mA into a 2 5k ohm load AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 10V AC Leakage current must be less than 2 5 mA into a 2 5k ohm load Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of 20 to 26 volts and source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input These options are compatible with the following Allen Bradley PLC modules 1771 OB 1771 OQ16 1771 OB16 1771 OBD 1771 OYL 1771 OBN 1771 OZL 1771 OQ 1771 OBB A 16 Specifications and Supplemental Information Option L6 L6E amp L9E Wiring
12. No Parameter Setting No Parameter Setting 5 Freq Select 1 Step Logic 351 SL2 Time 0 00 158 CR1 Out Select Step Logic 352 SL2 Encoder Cnts 0 242 TB3 Term 22 Sel SL Input 1 353 SL3Logic Step Step on Time 243 TB3 Term 23 Sel SL Input 2 354 SL3 Logic Jump SL2 not SL1 27 Preset Freq 1 20 SLO 355 SL3 Step Jump End Fault 28 Preset Freq 2 10 SL1 356 SL3 Step Setting 0111 29 Preset Freq 3 20 SL2 357 SL3Time 0 00 30 Preset Freq 4 30 SL3 358 SL3 Encoder Cnts 10 31 Preset Freq 5 40 SL4 359 SL4 Logic Step All SL True 32 Preset Freq 6 50 SL5 360 SL4 Logic Jump Do Not Step 33 Preset Freq 7 60 SL6 361 SL4 Step Jump Jump to 2 335 SLO Logic Step SL1 In True 362 _ SL4 Step Setting 0001 336 SLO Logic Jump SL2 In True 363 SL4 Time 0 00 337 SLO Step Jump Jump to 2 364 SL4 Encoder Cnts 0 338 SLO Step Setting 0000 365 SL5 Logic Step Time and SL1 339 SLO Time 0 00 366 SL5 Logic Jump SL2 In True 340 SLO Encoder Cnts 0 367 SL5Step Jump End Stop 2 341 SL1 Logic Step SL1 In True 368 SL5 Step Setting 1110 342 SL1 Logic Jump Time and SL2 369 SL5 Time 0 00 343 SL1 Step Jump Jump to 3 370 SL5EncoderCnts 15 344 SL1 Step Setting 0100 371 SL6 Logic Step SL1 In True 345 SL1 Time 10 00 372 SL6 Logic Jump SL2 In False 346 SL1 Encoder Cnts 0 373 SL6 Step Jump End Stop 1 347 SL2 Logic Step All SL True 374 SL6 Step Setting 0000 348 SL2 Logic Jump SL2 In
13. Rated Volts Parameter Number 147 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated input voltage of the drive Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt Volts Display Drive Rated Input Voltage Rated Amps Parameter Number 170 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp Amps x 10 drive based on the CT VT selection Display Drive Rated Output Amps Rated kW Parameter Number 171 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated kW of the drive based Display Units Drive Units kW kW x 100 on the CT VT selection Display Drive Rated Output kW Firmware Ver Parameter Number 71 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the version number of the drive Display Units Drive Units None Version x 100 firmware Display 0 00 Cntrl Board Rev Parameter Number 251 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the revision number of the drive Display Units Drive Units None Version x 100 Main Control Board Display 0 00 Rated CT Amps Parameter Number 148 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp Amps x 10 drive Display Drive Rated Output Amps Rated CT kW Parameter Number 149 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated CT kW of the drive Display Units Drive Units kW kW x 100 Display Drive Rated Output kW Rate
14. C 4 CE Conformity Grounding RFI Filter Grounding Important Using the optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Surge suppression devices are also incorporated into the filter Therefore the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Mechanical Configuration Important A positive electrical bond must be maintained between drive and filter at all 4 corners Star washers can be eliminated if a positive electrical bond is assured Three Phase Input Important Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane Star Washers with a positive electrical bond and in close proximity to one another Three Phase w Input Bolt Access Panel To Motor Cable Supplied with Filter 1 A Conduit To Motor Figure C 1 Side by Side Figure C 2 One Assembly 1336 PLUS II 1336 PLUS II Frames A1 A3 Frames A4 B amp C f Input power source to filter and output power fil
15. I External Power o EncoderPower Connections using 12V DC Internal Drive Power Source Minimum On Volts 7V DC Minimum Current 10mA o Encoder Power Connections using External DC Power Source Minimum On Volts 3V DC Minimum Current 10mA Important Control Interface Board jumpers JP3 amp JP4 must be set for the voltage level of the encoder output Pulse Input Output Option Digital Outputs Installation Wiring 2 31 Pulse Input above 12V DC signals may be degraded and component ATTENTION If input voltages are maintained at levels damage may result The pulse input signal must be an externally powered square wave pulse at a 5V TTL logic level As measured at the terminal block circuits in the high state must generate a voltage between 3 6 and 5 5V DC at 8 mA Circuits in the low state must generate a voltage between 0 0 and 0 8V DC Maximum input frequency is 250kHz Scale factor Pulse Enc Scale must be set Pulse Output Provides a TTL pulse train suitable for driving up to three 1336 PLUS II pulse inputs or a separate 125 ohm load at TTL levels 4V at 32 mA source 0 8V at 3 2 mA sink The digital outputs are at terminals 10 through 18 of TB2 Figure 2 5 Digital Outputs TB2 Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault
16. Wire sizes given are maximum minimum sizes that TB1 will accept these are not recommendations Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degree C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire 2 Applies to 30 kW 40 HP 200 240V 45 amp 56 kW 60 amp 75 HP 380 480V 56 kW 75 HP 500 600V drives only 3 These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to terminate field installed conductors Lug kits are available for use with these configurations Wire size used is determined by selecting the proper lug based on the drive catalog number Refer to Table 2 E One TE terminal is present Max Min Wire Size is the same as other terminals 5 Two TE terminals are present Max Min Wire Size is the same as the D Frame terminal block Lug Kits D E F and G Frame drives have stud type terminals and or bus bars bolts that require standard crimp type connectors for cable termina tion Connectors such as T amp B Color Keyed connectors or equiva lent are recommended The following table shows the lug selection for one possible cable choice Connectors for each installation should be chosen based on desired cable sizes the application requirements and all applicable national state and local codes See the minimum maximum values for wire size per Table 2 D 2 16 Installation Wiring
17. 16 Tuning Sensorless Vector operation To further improve drive performance in Sensorless Vector mode the actual motor nameplate data can be entered directly Refer to the motor nameplate and program the following Setup group parame ters Motor NP Amps Motor NP Volts Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM For the typical steps involved when programming refer to step 15 Speed Control Selection Control ik Slip al Comp Speed Droop Encoder Feedback Speed Control Parameter 77 ri 1 I I f I l i Regulator a Reference i see Chapter 2 Jump Process PI S 2 Frequency Command 5 12 Start Up Advanced Start Up Procedure Press these keys Remove ALL Power Disconnect Load Apply Power to Drive Oo BM B Bug while following these steps 17 Optimum tuning requires motor rotation and can be achieved by running the drive motor under a no load condition A Remove all power to the drive Disconnect the load from the system by decoupling the motor shaft Reapply drive power B While monitoring Freq Command in the Metering group adjust the speed source for the drive digital analog pot etc to 3 4 base speed C Press the Increment Decrement keys until Flux Current is displayed Start the drive and record this value D Stopthe drive E Press the Increment Decrement keys to display Freq Command Adjust the speed source
18. Allen Bradley 1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with NNNM ZZ SENSORLESS VECTOR WY 0 37 448 kW 0 5 600 HP Firmware 1 xxx 6 xxx WD ZEN SENSORLESS VECTOR WY User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office or online at www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respec
19. Option Board ATTENTION Configuring an analog input for 0 20mA operation and driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify proper configuration prior to applying input signals Output Devices Cable Termination Installation Wiring 2 37 Drive Output Disconnection output terminals U V and W must be capable of disabling the drive if opened during drive operation If opened during drive operation the drive will continue to produce output voltage between U V W An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously disable the drive ATTENTION Any disconnecting means wired to the drive Common Mode Cores Common Mode Cores will help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical equipment programmable controllers sensors analog circuits etc In addition reducing the PWM carrier frequency will reduce the effects and lower the risk of common mode noise interference Refer to the table below Table 2 1 1336 PLUS Common Mode Chokes Catalog Number Used with Description 1321 M001 Communications Cables Analog _ Open Style Signal Level Signal Cables etc 1321 M009 All 1336 PLUS ii Drives Rated Open Style with Terminal Block 9A 480V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 HP 1321 M048 All 1336 PLUS ii Drives Rated Open Style 48A 480V 5 5 22 kW 7 5 30 HP 600V 5 5 30 kW 7 5 40 HP 1321 M180 All 1336 PLUS
20. The Speed Sync bit in Application Sts is set to 1 The drive holds the last frequency reference value The frequency command is changed and or a different source is selected De energize the SYNC input er p Sync Time me Change Ref s Speed Sync Bit Time Important TI frequency if set slower The drive will linearly ramp from the held reference to the new reference in a time set by Sync Time The Speed Sync bit in Application Sts is set to 0 New Drive 2 Reference New Drive 1 Reference Drive 1 amp 2 Syne In Application Sts e accel decel s curve control is active during speed sync and will limit the rate of change of Programming 6 13 Advanced Setup Sync Time Parameter Number 307 Parameter Type Read and Write The time it takes for the drive to ramp from the held Factory Default 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 frequency reference to the current frequency reference Factory Default 0 0 Sec after the Sync input is de energized Refer to Minimum Value 0 0 Sec Synchronized Speed Change Function on page 6 12 Maximum Value 6000 0 Sec Stop Select 1 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default Coast receives a valid stop command unless Stop Select 2 is Units Display Drive selected Coast 0 Caus
21. 7 Closed loop PI control PI Config Parameter Number 213 Parameter Type Read Write This parameter sets and displays the configuration forthe Factory Default 00000000 PI regulator Note Reset Integrator Int is also available through a dig Biti REIN LBIES LBI LBIES PALE EE LBO ital input See Input Mode Selection in Chapter 2 E Inv Error Changes sign of PI Error Reset Int Holds KI at zero Spare Zero Clamp Prevents bidirectional operation Sqrt Fdbk Uses sq root of PI feedback value Set Output 0 0 0 0 1 1 gt Preload Int 0 0 1 1 4040 gt Pl Enable 9 fil pe i oO fa Diagram 1 2 3 Refer to Diagrams on next page 6 54 Programming Process PI Diagram 1 Output Freq Command PI Output ji I 3 6 9 12 15 181 21 Enable Time 0 24 27 30 Disable Enable Pl output integrates from zero drive ramps to regulated frequency Disable PI output is forced to zero drive ramps to unregulated frequency Diagram 2 Feed forward effect for more dynamic 7 Preload 1 l t 0 3 16 9 12 15 18 21 Enable Disable 24 27 30 Enable Pl output steps to preload and integrates from there drive steps to preload and ramps from there Disable PI output is forced to zero drive ramps to Diagram 3 T Preload at Start Better response for well defined T Preload at Start l l T 0 3 6 9 12 15 181 21
22. DC Brake Ramp or Ramp to Minimum Value 0 Hold If Ramp to Hold is the active stop mode DC Hold Maximum Value 150 Level will be clamped at 70 even if higher values are programmed exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used to stop the motor ATTENTION Ifa hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking 6 14 Programming Advanced Setup Ramp to Stop Brake to Stop Voltage Volts Speed DC Hold Time Volts Speed DC Hold Time yo DC Hold Level joo Hold Level amp V Stop Command Time Time Stop Command Ramp to Hold Reissuing a Start Command at this point will cause the drive to Restart Volts Speed and Ramp as shown E UT A Ca DC Hold Level 3 Eod c Stop Command Time Opening Enable Input instead of reissuing a Start Command will cause drive to Stop Hold Level Sel Parameter Number 281 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the hold level source for DC Hold Factory Default DC Hold Lvl Level The minimum signal level sets no DC hold while Units Display Drive the maximum signal sets the value programmed in DC DC Hold Lvi 0 Use DC Hold Level param 13 Hold Level Analog In 0 1 This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is A
23. DC Bus Memory 212 Meas Volts 272 Ground Warning 204 EEPROM Cksum 172 Phase Loss Mode 330 3 Phase Loss Level 331 3 Programming 6 3 EB a Not Available on Series A E u Not Available on Series A E a HIMs below Version 3 0 HIMs below Version 3 0 eem Mode Choose EE TESI Mode TT Mode ce eem i EE TESI Status TT Read Only Save Values Recall Values Control Logic Login Logout Reset Defaults Fault Queue Modify HIM gt Drive 1 Drive gt HIM to Linear List amp Metering Ea Process Encoder Motor T ES in M SU a Mg Process P lad Control gg St Logic 6 41 E 6 43 E 6 46 E 6 48 FE 6 49 E 6 50 w 6 53 Page 6 57 Page 6 61 Rated Volts 147 Direction Mask 94 Stop Owner 102 Data In A1 111 Process 1 Par 127 Speed Control 77 Speed Control 77 Control Select 9 SL0 6 Logic Step Rated Amps 170 Start Mask 95 Direction Owner 103 Data In A2 112 Process 1 Scale 128 Encoder Type 152 PI Config 213 Flux Amps Ref 192 SL0 6 Logic Jump Rated kW 171 Jog Mask 96 Start Owner 104 Data In B1 113 Process 1 Txt 1 129 Encoder PPR 46 PI Status 214 IR Drop Volts 194 SLO 6 Step Setting Firmware Ver 71 Reference Mask 97 Jog Owner 105 Data In B2 114 Process 1 Txt 2 130 Maximum Speed 151 PlRefSelect 215 Flux Up Time 200 SL0 6 Time Cntrl Board Rev 251 Accel Mask 98 Reference Owner 106 Data In C1 115 Process 1
24. 030 512 800 336 95lbs A2 2159 290 0 1805 1852 2750 714 1054 1054 1535 75 130 0 76 2 853 549kg 8 50 1142 7 10 729 1083 281 415 415 060 030 512 800 336 12 1 ibs A3 2159 2900 2070 1852 2750 988 1054 1054 1535 75 1300 762 853 671kg 850 1142 8 15 729 1083 385 415 415 060 030 512 800 336 148lbs M 2600 350 0 2120 28300 3200 900 1170 1170 1535 1535 1300 1330 860 1590kg 10 24 1378 835 9 06 1260 854 461 461 060 060 512 523 339 35 0 ibs Referto Chapter 1 for catalog numbers and Appendix for derating info kW HP are constant torque CT ratings Dimensions B 3 IP 20 NEMA Type 1 amp Open Dimensions Frames B C D lli g Z C Max gt AA LAD I 0000000 Mounting Hole Detail ttm O e Allen Bradley Frames B amp C c l 7 1 0 28 gt d f l 74A 0 28 j ze i 12 7 0 50 leat e 12 7 0 50 AA E B Mounting Hole Detail Frame D 10 4 0 41 Dia Jr BB 14 7 0 58 y O 00000 ell WE 7 BP Y 19 0 0 75 Dia H i N CC E Mounting Holes 4 See Detail Frame D 2 o o Frames B amp C O c
25. 1 00 31 8 1 25 lt 9 7 0 38 16 0 0 63 A 70 0 2 75 10 2 0 40 Dia 19 1 Typical 15 Plcs 0 75 Y B 19 B 20 Dimensions DC Bus Inductor Dimensions for F Frame Roll In Drives All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 16 0 0 4 0 63 0 016 19 1 0 3 0 75 0 01 4 A 228 6 9 0 Max 179 8 0 3 217 9 0 8 7 08 0 01 8 58 0 03 Y e UV a gt 13 2 3 3 0 52 0 13 396 2 3 3 End bes 15 6 0 13 LL 208 3 8 2 Max ij L Weight 45 36 kg 100 Ibs Typical F Frame Roll In Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure Important This information represents the method used to factory mount an open roll in type Frame F in an enclosure specifically designed by Allen Bradley Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration calculated loads and enclosure specifications Minimum thickness of all parts 4 6 0 18 Typical Rail Detail me DISTR VA m fo N X f 1074 4 23 Leng
26. 100 100 20k V Typical 7 AN Typical t 0 22ut Typical id wa 1 140 i 681 038i at Typical 178 Current uf 5SV Limit e 681 4 o sie Feedback 1 87k 2 05A 499k p Jn Ly ii fom 255 ews 1o us S 189 an 0 001 49 90 9 1Meg aws 576 n ho h ho A m I ENC ENC A 4 A A A oh A t Ai ls ENC ENC A A 12V RET B A B A 12V RET 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 832 3 34 35 86 fs sz sese so se eo M2 N GA Chee Ts eere rea rea re ZW sess o o s Al 1e MSS S SASS OS 3 1629 629 629 9 159 0629 633 53 629 1629 CO ED Ig i ommon ch f Common LU Fuse User Supplied Fuse User Supplied ii TS EI 115V AC 115V AC 18V AC 2 Fuse e eoe o mn o se TNA I L6 L6E L9E Option L6 L6E amp L9E 115V AC Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with these options must be capable of operating with high true logic In the low state circuits must generate a voltage of no more than 30V AC Leakage current must be less than 10 mA into a 6 5k ohm load In the high state circuits must generate a voltage of 60 Hz 90 115V AC 10 50 Hz 100 115V AC 10 and source a current of approximately 20 mA for each input These options are compatible with the following Allen Bradley PLC modules e 1771 OW 1771 OA e 1771 OWN 1771 OAD Read Write Parameter Record Name Freq Select 1 Freq Select 2 Accel Tim
27. 47 24 16 74 24 80 46 22 11 54 2 50 3 00 178 0 lbs IP 20 NEMA Type 1 Bottom View Dimensions Frames A through C Frames A1 through A4 Dimensions lt S lt R Fans are present on these drives ec A input Catalog KWHP lt P gt 22 2 0 88 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc Voltage Frame Number Ratin 3 see TE 22 2 08 6 0 88 1 13 m Conduit Knockout 3 Plcs 460 A4 F75 5 5 7 5 F100 7 5 10 TA F150 11 15 F200 115 20 A 575 A4 F30 2 2 3 F50 3 7 5 F75 55 75 NML F100 17 5 10 F150 11 15 F200 115 20 lt J Y YY Fans may be present see table Frame Reference L M N P il R S A1 111 8 105 4 86 3 31 0 69 1 102 1 135 4 4 40 415 3 40 1 22 2 72 4 02 5 33 A2 132 3 126 0 106 9 31 0 69 1 102 1 135 4 5 21 4 96 4 21 1 22 2 72 4 02 5 33 A3 158 8 152 4 133 4 31 0 69 1 102 1 135 4 6 25 6 00 5 25 1 22 2 72 4 02 5 33 A4 164 0 164 0 139 0 27 0 65 0 97 0 128 7 6 45 6 45 5 47 1 06 2 56 3 82 5 07 Frames B and C lt S gt R Q 28 6 34 9 1 13 1 38 Conduit Knockout 3 Plcs 22 2 0 88 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc o AC ll E All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches ML X Frame Reference L M
28. An excessive motor load exists It must be reduced such that drive out put current does not exceed the cur rent set by the Overload Amps parameter Overspeed Fault 25 Not functional at time of printing Overtemp Fault 08 Heat sink temperature exceeds a predefined value of 90 C 195 F Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Check that the ambient tempera ture has not exceeded 40 C 104 F Check fan Overvolt Fault 05 DC bus voltage exceeded maxi mum value Monitor the AC line for high line volt age or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option Phase U Fault 38 A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase Check the wiring between the drive and motor Check motor for grounded phase Phase V Fault A phase to ground fault has been Check the wiring between the drive 39 detected between the drive and and motor Check motor for grounded motor in this phase phase Phase W Fault A phase to ground fault has been Check the wiring between the drive 40 detected between the drive and and motor Check motor for grounded motor in this phase phase Poles Calc Fit Generated if the calculated value Check Motor NP RPM and Motor 50 of Motor Poles is less than 2 or NP Hertz programming greater than 32 Power Lo
29. Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 Factory Default 25 of Maximum Freq Minimum Value 0 Hz Break Frequency Maximum Value 120 Hz Base Voltage Parameter Number 18 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts voltage Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 25 of Drive Rated Voltage Maximum Value 120 of Drive Rated Voltage Programming 6 59 Motor Control Base Frequency Parameter Number 17 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 frequency Factory Default 60 Hz Minimum Value 25 Hz Maximum Value 400 Hz Maximum Voltage Parameter Number 20 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the highest voltage the drive will Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts output for Fixed Boost amp Full Custom Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 25 of Drive Rated Voltage Maximum Value 120 of Drive Rated Voltage Run Accel Volts In Fixed Boost or Full Custom modes the output voltage is reduced by the programmed amount while at frequency Parameter Number 317 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 1 4096 100 Factory Default 100 Minimum Value 50 Maximum Value 100 Motor Sync Loss Detection for Synchronous Motors This
30. Enable 24 27 30 Disable Enable PI output integrates from preload drive ramps from preload Disable PI output is held at preload drive ramps to unregulated speed min preload unregulated frequency Note Drive will step output equal to preload on PI Status Parameter Number 214 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the status of the Process PI Factory Default None regulator Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit Bito Lt tf 1 1 Lo eratis gt Spares PI Ref Select Parameter Number 215 Parameter Type Read Write The source of the PI reference is selected with this param Factory Default Preset 1 eter The value from the selected reference is the set Units Display Drive point for the Process PI regulator Use Las 0 The drive is capable of responding to a loss of the 4 20 Analog In 0 1 mA signal used as either a PI reference or PI feedback Analog In 1 2 Response to loss of 4 20 mA signal is controlled by pro Analog In 2 3 gramming and requires the following Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value 8 Speed Control must be set to Process PI MOP 5 and b Either PI Ref Select or PI Fdbk Select must be set to 4 20 mA If both of the above conditions are met the signal loss response is controlled by the setting of 4 20 mA Loss Sel If this parameter is set to Stop Fault loss of input will cause the drive to stop and issue a Hertz Err Fault
31. Encoders must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single channel 5V DC or 8 15V DC output single ended or differ ential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10mA per channel Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz Encoder inputs are available at TB3 The interface board is jumper selectable to accept a 5V TTL or 12V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3 0V DC TTL or 7 0V DC 12 volt encoder Maximum high state voltage is 18 5V DC board damage could result if voltage is exceeded Maximum low state voltage is 0 4V DC See Encoder amp Communications Cabling on page 2 11 Figure 2 4a Encoder Signal Wiring Single Ended Dual Channel Differential Dual Channel 31 32 38 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 G3 G3 G3 TB3 G3 G3 G3 TB3 to Power Supply Common Terminal 36 or External ZII D 0 TE Single Ended Encoder Output Connections Differential Encoder Output Connections 1 For Single Channel applications eliminate the B and B NOT connections Some encoders may label the A connection as Signal Single channel provides speed indication Only Not direction Important Correct direction of motor rotation as determined during start up see Chapter 5 may require that the A or B channel wiring be reversed Figure 2 4b Encoder Power Wiring Internal External 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36
32. Min Value Acceptable Maximum Value Max Value Acceptable Parameter Number Each parameter is assigned a number The number can be used for process display setup fault buffer interpretation or serial communication Q Parameter Type 2 types of parameters are available Read Only The value is changed only by the drive and is used to monitor values Read Write The value is changed through programming This type can also be used to monitor a value Factory Default This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory Display Units The units that appear on the HIM display 2 types exist ENUMS A language statement pertaining to the selection made or language description of bit function Engineering Standard units such as Hz sec volts etc Drive Units These are internal units used to communicate through the serial port and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the drive Minimum Value This is the lowest setting possible for parameters that do not use ENUMS Maximum Value This is the highest setting possible for parameters that do not use ENUMS 3 To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text in this manual the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets Display Text will appear in quotes Programming 6 5 This group of parameters consists of commonly viewed drive operating conditions such as motor spee
33. Preset 1 Display Drive Use Last 0 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value MOP 5 Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value Step Logic 20 Jog Frequency Parameter Number 24 T Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the frequency the drive will output Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Hertz Hertz x 100 when it receives a valid jog command Factory Default 10 0 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Preset Freq 1 Parameter Number s 27 29 amp 73 76 Parameter Type Read and Write Preset Freq 2 Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Hertz Hertz x 100 Preset Freq 3 Factory Default 0 0 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Preset Freq 4 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Preset Freq 5 Preset Freq 6 Preset Freq 7 These values set the frequencies that the drive will output when selected Refer to Speed Select Inputtable in Chapter 2 Programming 6 17 Frequency Set Skip Freq 1 Parameter Number s 32 34 Parameter Type Read and Write Skip Freq 2 Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz Skip Freq 3 Factory Default 400 Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz These values in conjunction with Skip Freq Band create Maximum Value 400 Hz a range of frequencies at which the drive will not continu ously operate Skip Freq Band Parameter Number 35 Parameter Type Read and Write Determines the bandwidth ar
34. SLO Time Firmware 5 001 amp later SL1 Time SL2 Time SL3 Time SL4 Time SL5 Time SL6 Time Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding Logic Step or Jump is set to Step On Time To use the encoder or pulse counts this must be set to 0 00 Parameter Number 339 345 351 357 363 369 375 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Units 0 01 Second Seconds x 100 Factory Default 0 00 Sec Minimum Value 0 00 Sec Maximum Value 600 00 Sec SLO Encoder Cnts Firmware 5 001 amp later SL1 Encoder Cnts SL2 Encoder Cnts SL3 Encoder Cnts SL4 Encoder Cnts SL5 Encoder Cnts SL6 Encoder Cnts Sets the number of encoder or pulse counts necessary to cause a step if the corresponding Logic Step or Jump is set to Step On Time Current counts are stored when a step is initiated The difference between the current and Stored counts is compared to the parameter The encoder counts are directional and stop at the Min and Max values A F69 Step Logic fault will occur when using the encoder and Encoder Counts is at an end point The pulse counts are only positive and will rollover internally To use the encoder counts set the Logic Step or Jump to Step on Time Time and SLx or Time not SLx The SLx Time must be set to 0 00 Set the SLx Step Setting Encoder Puls to 0 To use pulse counts connect an LAS cardtothe drive Setthe SLx Step Settin
35. a DER while following these steps The EEProm mode is used to restore all settings to factory default values or upload download parameters between the HIM and drive compatible HIMs only see Table 3 A 1 To restore factory defaults A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until EEProm is dis played If EEProm is not in the menu programming is password protected Refer to Password Mode later in this section C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Reset Defaults is displayed E Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings F Press ESC Reprogram Fault will display G Press the Stop key to reset the fault Important If Input Mode was previously set to a value other than 1 cycle drive power to reset The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Display Choose Mode EEProm EEProm Reset Defaults Reprogram Fault F 48 Stopped 0 00 Hz Press these keys Drive gt HIM Bd Human Interface Module 3 9 EEProm Mode continued while following these steps 2 To upload a parameter profile from the drive to the HIM you must have a compatible HIM see Table 3 A A From the EEProm menu see steps A C above press the Incre ment Decrement keys until Drive gt HIM is displayed B Press Enter A profil
36. must not be set to 0 and no other device can have claimed ownership of direction i e TB3 Run Reverse If either condition is true a fault will be issued Start Owner Parameter Number 104 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is Units Display Drive suing a valid start command 0 0 Start Input Not Present 11 Start Input Present Jog Owner Parameter Number 105 i Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is Units Display Drive suing a valid jog command 0 0 Jog Input Not Present 1 1 Jog Input Present Reference Owner Parameter Number 106 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter currently has the Units Display Drive uae ae of the selection of the command frequen 209 0 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner Accel Owner Parameter Number 107 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive con Units Display Drive trol of selecting Accel Time 1 or Accel Time 2 0 0 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner Programming Decel Owner Parameter Number 108 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive con Units Display Drive trol of selecting Decel Time 1 or Decel Time 2 ig 9 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner Fault Owner Parameter Number 109 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter is pres
37. 600 0 37 0 5 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 2 2 3 2 2 3 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 1 5 2 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 Not 600 1100 200 600 Recommended 0 75 1 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 0 37 0 5 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 3 7 5 3 7 5 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 2 2 3 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 1 5 2 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 0 75 1 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 0 37 0 5 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200 600 5 5 15 5 5 15 NR 9 1 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 30 5 91 4 182 9 7 5 20 7 5 20 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 100 300 600 C 18 5 45 18 5 45 NR 9 1 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 30 5 91 4 182 9 25 60 25 60 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 100 1 300 600 D 56 93 56 93 NR 9 1 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 61 0 91 4 182 9 75 125 75 125 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 200 300 600 E 112 224 112 224 NR 9 1 182 9 91 4 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 150 X300 150 X300 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 F 261 298 261 298 N
38. Adapter I O Analog I O Metering Analog I O Analog I O Metering Analog I O Analog I O Metering Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Diagnostics Digital 1 0 Motor Control Motor Control Linear List Faults Motor Control Advanced Setup Motor Control Motor Control Motor Control Advanced Setup Feature Select Feature Select Faults Ratings Advanced Setup Motor Control Digital I O Digital 1 0 Faults Diagnostics Setup Setup Setup Step Logic Adapter I O Adapter I O Diagnostics Metering Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Masks Owners Setup Advanced Setup Digital I O Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Masks Owners Diagnostics Diagnostics Diagnostics Ratings Feature Select Feature Select Diagnostics Metering Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Metering Enc Fdbk Encoder Feedback Freq Set Enc Fdbk Encoder Feedback Faults Name Fault Alarms 2 Fault Buffer 0 3 Fault Data Fault Frequency Fault Mask Fault Owner Fault Status 1 Fault Status 2 Firmware Ver Fit Clear Mode Fit Motor Mode Fit Power Mode Flux Amps Ref Flux Current Flux Up Time Flying Start En Freq Command Freq Ref SqRoot Freq Select 1 Freq Select 2 Freq Source FStart Forward FStart Reverse Ground Warning Heatsink Temp Hold Level Sel Input Mode Input Status IR Drop Volts Jog
39. Bottom View Will Vary with HP C C See Bottom View Dimensions All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches All Weights in Kilograms and Pounds Frame Shipping Reference A Weight B1 B2 276 4 476 3 225 0 212 6 461 0 131 6 93 5 88 9 32 00 7 6 131 1 180 8 71 9 22 7 kg 10 88 18 75 8 86 8 37 18 15 5 18 3 68 3 50 1 26 0 30 5 16 7 12 2 83 50 lbs C 301 8 701 0 225 0 238 0 685 8 131 6 93 5 88 9 32 00 7 6 181 1 374 7 71 9 38 6 kg 11 88 27 60 8 86 8 37 27 00 5 18 3 68 3 50 1 26 0 30 5 16 14 7 2 83 85 lbs D 381 5 1240 0 270 8 325 9 1216 2 81 3 189 5 184 9 27 94 11 94 131 1 688 6 83 6 108 9 kg 15 02 48 8 10 66 12 83 47 88 3 20 746 728 110 047 516 27 1 329 240lbs B 4 Dimensions IP 20 NEMA Type 1 amp Open Dimensions Frame E A Z E C Max mcc 133 4 diim B Y 5 25 fara CAD 4 7 0 00000 O Allen Bradley i 37 9 Il c 49
40. Current Limit amps has been exceeded and Shear Pin Fault is enabled Check load requirements and Cur rent Limit setting Step Logic Flt 69 1 SLx Step Jump is set to End Fault 2 Encoder Counts has reached the endpoint of 32767 1 2 Check conditions that caused SLx Step Jump to occur Zero Encoder Counts Change Enc Count Scale Troubleshooting 7 7 Name amp Fault Sync Loss Fault 67 Description Not functional at time of printing Action Temp Sense Open 55 Heat sink thermistor is open or malfunctioning Check thermistor and connections Undervolt Fault 04 DC Bus voltage fell below the minimum value 388V DC at 460V AC input Line Loss Fault and Low Bus Fault set to enabled Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption UV Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 41 detected between these two out to the drive output terminals for a put terminals shorted condition UW Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 42 detected between these two out to the drive output terminals for a put terminals shorted condition VW Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 43 detected between these two out to the drive output terminals for a put terminals shorted condition Xsistr Desat F
41. Data Out A1 Data Out A2 Data Out B1 Data Out B2 Data Out C1 Data Out C2 Data Out D1 Data Out D2 Process 1 Par Process 1 Scale Process 1 Txt 1 Process 1 Txt 2 Process 1 Txt 3 Process 1 Txt 4 Process 1 Txt 5 Process 1 Txt 6 Process 1 Txt 7 Process 1 Txt 8 4 20mA Loss Sel Maximum Speed Encoder Type Anlg Out 0 Offst Flying Start En FStart Forward FStart Reverse CR1 Out Select Dig Out Freq Dig Out Current Dig Out Torque Speed KP Speed KI Setting No Name 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 200 201 203 204 206 213 215 216 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 237 238 239 240 241 242 Boost Slope Rated Amps Rated kW EEPROM Cksum Fault Alarms 1 CR2 Out Select CR3 Out Select CR4 Out Select Motor NP RPM Motor NP Hertz Process 2 Par Process 2 Scale Process 2 Txt 1 Process 2 Txt 2 Process 2 Txt 3 Process 2 Txt 4 Process 2 Txt 5 Process 2 Txt 6 Process 2 Txt 7 Process 2 Txt 8 Motor NP Volts Motor NP Amps Flux Amps Ref KP Amps IR Drop Volts Slip Comp Gain Flux Up Time Motor OL Fault VT Scaling Ground Warning Alarm Mask 1 PI Config PI Ref Select PI Fdbk Select KI Process KP Process PI Neg Limit PI Pos Limit PI Preload Shear Pin Fault Adaptive Lim LLoss Restart Freq Ref SqRoot Save MOP Ref Hold Level Sel Current Lmt Sel Anlg Out 0 Abs Anlg O
42. amp Status Display gt Read Only E Hode pe J GROUP LEVEL Wraps to Linear List Choose T T Process Display e Mode e 8j hd Not Available on Series A HIMs below Version 3 0 em Hode em Ur Advanced Frequency Feature Digital Analog F icc Page 6 5 o utput Current 54 utput Voltage 1 Output Power 23 DC Bus Voltage 53 utput Freq 66 Freq Command 65 nlg In 0 Freq 138 Anlg In 1 Freq 139 Anlg In 2 Freq 140 ncoder Freq 63 ulse Freq 254 MOP Freq 137 Heatsink Temp 70 Power OL Count 84 Motor OL Count 202 Last Fault 4 Torque Current 162 Flux Current 163 Output Power 3 Output Curr 2 Elapsed Run Time 279 o o gt uv Page 6 8 Input Mode 241 Freq Select 1 5 Accel Time 1 7 Decel Time 1 8 Minimum Freq 16 Maximum Freq 19 Stop Select 1 10 Current Limit 36 Current Lmt Sel 232 Adaptive Lim 227 Current Lmt En 303 Overload Mode 37 Overload Amps 38 VT Scaling 203 Motor NP RPM 177 Motor NP Hertz 178 Motor NP Volts 190 Motor NP Amps 191 PARAMETER LEVEL Page 6 12 Minimum Freq 16 Maximum Freq 19 PWM Frequency 45 Accel Time 2 30 Decel Time 2 31 Sync Time 307 Stop Select 1 10 DC Hold Time 12 DC Hold Level 13 Hold Level Sel 231 Bus Limit En 11 Page 6 16 Freq Select 1 5 Freq Select 2 6 Jog Frequency 24 Pre
43. complete drive as needed Max Retries Fault 33 Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Reset Run Tries Check fault buffer for fault code requiring reset Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear by press ing the local Stop key or cycling the TB3 Stop input Motor Mode Flt 24 A fault has been detected origi nating from the Control Board Check all connections to the Control Board Replace the board or com plete drive as required Motor Stall Fault 06 Current remained over Current Limit setting parameter 36 for more than 4 seconds If the motor is drawing excessive cur rent over Current Limit setting the motor load is excessive and will not allow the drive to accelerate to set speed A longer accel time or a reduced load may be required Motor Thermistor 15 An analog option board with ther mistor input is installed and the value at the terminals is less than 60 ohms or greater than 3300 ohms 1 2 3 Verify that thermistor is connected Motor is overheated Reduce load Thermistor is not present Remove option board Mult Prog Input 61 A single source input function Such as Reverse Forward open 1st function closed 2nd function has been programmed to more than one input or more than one Run Reverse input Reprogram one or more of the inputs to a different value Neg Slope Fault 3
44. for a time period greater than Load Loss time 2 Encoder Loss Error has occurred in the encoder signals at TB3 terminals 31 36 3 Enc Cnt Set Encoder Counts has reached the endpoint of 32767 4 Enc Cnt Max The value of Encoder Counts has exceeded Max Enc Counts 5 Voltage Check Voltage at drive output terminals is equal to or greater than 1096 of drive rated volts i e 46V for 460V drive when Start command is issued and flying start is disabled Drive will not start until terminal voltage falls below 1096 of drive rating or flying start is enabled Specifications Appendix A Specifications and Supplemental Information Protection 200 240V Drive 380 480V Drive 500 600V Drive AC Input Overvoltage Trip 285V AC 570V AC 690V AC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 138V AC 280V AC 343V AC Bus Overvoltage Trip 405V DC 810V DC 1013V DC Bus Undervoltage Trip 200V DC 400V DC 498V DC Nominal Bus Voltage 324V DC 648V DC 810V DC Heat Sink Thermistor Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Current Limit 20 to 160 of VT rated current Hardware Current Limit 180 to 250 of VT rated current dependent on drive rating Instantaneous Current Limit 220 to 300 of VT rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500 volts peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full
45. lengths over 182 9 gq 600 600 75 600 075 76 12 2 143 600 1829 1829 1182 9 229 1829 25 40 875 600 600 600 75 600 0 37 0 5 17 6 122 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 Use 120 Ee 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 75 600 A4 5 5 15 55 15 7 6 1122 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 244 1829 7 5 20 1 7 5 20 25 40 375 600 600 600 80 600 B 11 22 11 22 76 122 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 244 182 9 15 30 15 30 25 40 375 600 600 600 80 600 C 30 45 30 45 76 122 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 76 2 1829 X40 X60 40 60 25 40 375 600 600 600 250 600 D 45 112 45 112 122 130 5 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 61 0 182 9 60 X150 60 150 40 100 375 600 600 600 200 600 E 112 187 112 187 12 2 153 3 1143 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 150 250 150 250 40 175 375 600 600 600 600 600 F 187 336 187 336 18 3 53 3 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 250 450 250 450 60 175 375 600 600 600 600 600 G 187 448 187 448 18 3 153 3 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 X250 600 250 600 60 175 375 600 600 600 600 600 Type A Motor Characteristics No phase paper or misplaced phase paper lower quality insulation systems corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 volts Type B Motor Characteristics Properly placed phase paper medium quality insulatio
46. 1 24 20 4 24 5 19 1 24 16 1 24 5 19 1 24 00 BRF200 18 0 23 0 28 22 27 23 28 22 27 18 28 22 27 75 B015 16 21 25 19 24 2 23 28 22 27 18 28 22 29 97 B020 21 26 32 25 31 29 35 27 34 23 35 27 37 74 B025 26 33 40 31 39 36 43 33 42 28 43 33 46 62 B030 30 38 46 36 45 A 49 38 48 32 49 38 53 28 BX040 40 50 61 47 59 50 61 47 59 40 61 47 66 60 B040 38 48 58 48 60 52 63 52 65 41 63 52 72 15 B050 48 60 73 60 75 62 75 61 TT 49 75 61 83 25 BX060 1 62 75 61 Tft 62 75 61 7 62 75 61 85 47 B060 54 68 82 68 85 77 93 76 96 61 93 76 106 56 B075 69 87 105 84 106 99 119 96 120 78 119 96 133 20 B100 90 114 137 110 138 124 149 120 150 98 149 120 166 50 B125 113 143 172 138 173 148 178 143 180 117 178 143 199 80 BX150 148 178 143 180 148 178 143 180 148 178 143 199 80 B150 130 164 197 159 199 198 238 191 240 157 238 191 266 40 B200 172 217 261 210 263 241 290 233 292 191 290 233 324 12 B250 212 268 322 259 325 268 322 259 325 212 322 259 360 75 BP BPR250 212 268 322 259 325 297 357 287 360 235 357 287 399 60 BX250 212 268 322 259 325 297 357 287 360 228 347 279 399 60 B300 235 297 357 287 360 350 421 339 425 261 397 319 471 75 BP BPR300 235 297 357 287 360 350 421 339 425 277 421 339 471 75 B350 277 350 421 339 425 392 471 378 475 294 446 359 527 25 BP BPR350 277 350 421 339 425 392 471 378 475 310 471 378 527 25 B400 310 392 471 387 475 433 521 418 525 326 496 398 582 75 BP BPR400 310 392 471 378 475 438 527 424 532 347 527 424 532 05 B450 343 433 521 418 525 486 585
47. 2 is selected Coast 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately DC Brake 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor Requires a value in both DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level Ramp 2 Drivedecelerates to 0 Hz thenif DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level are greater than zero the holding brake is applied If the values equal zero then the drive turns off Requires a value in Decel Time 1 or Decel Time 2 S Curve 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in Decel Time 1 or Decel Time 2 x 2 Ramp to Hold 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per DC Hold Level limited to 70 of drive rated amps until a a Start command is issued or b the Enable input is opened Current Limit Parameter Number 36 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the maximum drive output currentthat Display Units Drive Units 1 of Max Drive Output Current 4096 100 is allowed before current limiting occurs the drive is limited Factory Default 15096 to 160 internally 150 0 Firmware 5 001 amp later Minimum Value 2096 of Rated Amps 0 0 Firmware 5 001 amp later Maximum Value 300 of Rated Amps 300 096 Firmware 5 001 amp later Current Lmt Sel Selects the source of the Current Limit setting for the drive When an external input is selected 0 10V or 4 20 mA the minimum signal OV or 4 mA sets 20 current limit and the maximum signal 10
48. 75 1050 106 0 100 1119 0 120 0 150 250 150 450 350 250 100 100 137 0 138 0 125 149 0 150 0 200 350 200 600 450 250 125 125 172 0 173 0 150 178 0 180 0 250 400 250 600 500 250 z X150 150 178 0 180 0 150 178 0 180 0 250 400 250 600 500 250 E 150 150 197 0 199 0 200 238 0 240 0 300 500 300 700 700 400 200 200 261 0 263 0 250 290 0 292 0 400 600 400 800 800 400 250 250 322 0 325 0 250 322 0 325 0 450 600 450 800 800 400 F P250 250 322 0 325 0 300 357 0 360 0 450 A P300 300 357 0 360 0 350 421 0 425 0 500 E pee P350 350 421 0 425 0 400 4710 A991 00 Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list publication 1336 6 5 or recle information P400 400 471 0 475 0 450 527 0 532 0 600 P450 450 527 0 532 0 700 G X250 250 322 0 325 0 300 357 0 360 0 450 x 300 300 357 0 360 0 350 421 0 425 0 450 350 350 421 0 425 0 400 471 0 475 0 500 i 4 aoo ario arso aso 5210 5250 800890 a E calo 450 450 521 0 525 0 500 585 0 590 0 800 B 500 500 585 0 590 0 600 664 0 670 0 800 600 600 664 0 670 0 600 664 0 670 0 900 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping 2 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection 3 Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker 4 Motor Circuit Protector
49. A 13 Remote I O Communication Module Direct es to y E Logic Datalink Adjustable Frequency AC Drive gt Parameter Number Data In A1 111 A DatalnA2 112 Data In B1 113 WORD 5 DatalnB2 114 WORD 6 Data In C1 115 WORD 7 DatalnC2 116 Datalink C DatalnD1 117 Input Image Direct DatalnD2 118 Logic Status q 655 Analog Feedback m Drie Logic Parameter Number Konna rr ry Data OutA1 119 WORD 3 Datalink A Data Out A2 120 WORD 4 Data OutB1 121 WORD 5 Data Out B2 122 NOH S Data OutC1 123 Datalink C Data Out C2 124 Data OutD1 125 Data OutD2 126 1 Refer to the 1203 User Manual for further information Master Device Serial to SCANport Adjustable Frequency Register Objects Communications Module AC Drive Output Output Direct Ir WORD 1 WORD 1 to mM gt WORDE ODDS Drive Parameter Number WORD 3 WORD a Logic DataInAl 111 Wonp WORD a1 DaalnA2 112 Datalink A WORD 5 H M WORD b DatalnB1 113 WORD 6 WORD b 1 Datalink B DatalnB2 114 WORD 7 gt WORD c Data In C1 115 WORD 8 WORD c 1 Datalink C DatalnC2 116 WORD 9 gt WORD d DatalnD1 117 WORD 10 WORD d 1 Datalink D DatalnD2 118 Input Input Direct WORD 1 WORD 1 rom WORD 2 wonpo Drive Parameter Number WORDS tes 070 X Pe WORD 4 WORD a 1 Datalink A ata Ou WORD 5 es ORD ma on B a WORD 6 WORD b 1 Datalink B ata Out WORD 7 WORD c Raa OutC1 123
50. Amps for B Frame Disabled 0 No Fault Generated C L Activated drives amp up and approximately 250 of Rated VT Amps ior A Frame divas Enabled 1 Diag C Lim Fit Generated Shear Pin Fault Parameter Number 226 Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter allows the drive to generate a Factory Default Disabled Shear Pin Fault F63 if the output amps exceed the pro Units Display Drive grammed software current limit value in Current Limit Disabled 0 No Fault Generated When set to Not Accel the fault will not be enabled until be Enabled 1 Fault Generated All Conditions the drive is at speed Not Accel 2 No Fault Generated during Accel Motor OL Fault Parameter Number 201 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the motor overload Factory Default Enabled protection feature of the drive Units Display Drive Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Fault Generated Motor Therm Fit Parameter Number 268 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the motor thermal pro Factory Default Enabled tection feature of the drive The LAG option board must be Units Display Drive installed Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Fault Generated Line Loss Fault Parameter Number 40 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables a Power Loss Fault Fac
51. C must be adhered to Applied noise impulses may be counted in addition to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high Pulse Freq readings Specifications and Supplemental Information Electrical Input Data Voltage Tolerance Frequency Tolerance Input Phases Displacement Power Factor A1 A3 Frame Drives A4 Frame amp Up Drives Efficiency 1096 of minimum 10 of maximum 47 63 Hz Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation is possible for A amp B Frame drives at a derating of 50 0 80 standard 0 95 with optional inductor 0 95 standard 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Max Short Circuit Current Rating Installations per U S NEC UL CSA Using Specified Fuses 200 000A Using Specified HMCP Breakers Per Max Short Circuit Amps column in Table 2 A specific to each rating Using Specified HMCP Breakers with Current Limiter Option Using Specified 140 Devices Control Method A amp B Frame Drives C amp D Frame Drives E Frame Drives amp Up Output Voltage Range Output Frequency Range Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Analog Input Selectable Motor Control Accel Decel Intermittent Overload Current Limit Capability Inverse Time Overload Cap 200 000A IEC Installations per IEC947 Per Rated Service Short Circuit Capability column in Table 2 A specific to each rating Sine coded PWM with programmable ca
52. C600 IP 20 NEMA Type 1 enclosure Enclosed drive in Enclosed drive in 100 caon 40 C ambient 41 50 C ambient 90 C400 o E oe g amp 80 C450 a C350 ax 709 C500 og C400 os es C450 aei 605 C600 C500 50 40 i C600 4o l i 2 4 6 2 3 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz 6kHZ Data Not Available at Time of Printing Altitude and High Input Voltage Figure Rating Derate Figure AD inis Altitude All H3 EF om Ratings z ax SF T 1 E 1 c2 a 49 m 8 300 6 600 8 900 13200 ft Altitude i 100 Figure AE Required Only for the following drives 2 1836F x025 18 5 KW 25 HP at 8 kHz High Input 2 1336F x030 22 kW 30 HP at 6 or 8 kHz a a aa Voltage 3 ox 1836F x060 45 KW 60 HP at 6 kHz 2g 80 u D 1 1 1 D 240 480 or 600V Nominal 2 4 6 8 10 Input Voltage A 8 Specifications and Supplemental Information Parameter Cross Reference By Number No Name Group No 1 Output Voltage Metering 2 Output Curr Metering 3 Output Power Metering 4 Last Fault Metering 5 Freq Select 1 Frequency Set Setup 6 Freq Select 2 Frequency Set 7 Accel Time 1 Setup 8 Decel Time 1 Setup 9 Control Select Motor Contro 10 Stop Select 1 Advanced Setup Setup 11 Bus Limit En Advanced Setup 12
53. Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults Direction 5 4 No Command 0 0 y Forward 9 1 Reverse EO Traverse Enable y Hold Direction 1 1 0 Not Enabled Local 1 Local Lockout y 0 Not Local Sync Enable 1 Enabled 0 Not Enabled Typical Programmable Controller Communications Configurations Important If block transfers are programmed to continuously write data to the drive the EEPROM will quickly exceed its life cycle and malfunction The 1336 PLUS 1n does not use RAM to temporarily store parameter data but rather stores the data immediately to the EEPROM Since the EEPROM has a defined number of write cycles av continuous block transfers should not be ailable programmed Using Datalink A Remote I O Communication Module Programmable Controller 1 0 Image Table Output Image Block Transfer Logic Command Analog Reference Datalink A WORD gt WORD 4 a WORD 5 Datalink A WORD 6 WORD 7 Input Image Block Transfer Logic Status Analog Feedback WORD 3 WORD 4 WORD 5 WORD 6 WORD 7 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive Parameter Number DatalnA1 111 DatalnA2 112 Data Out A1 Data Out A2 119 120 Typical Serial Communications Configurations Without Block Transfer Programmable Controller 1 0 Image Table Output Image Logic Command WORD 2 WORD 3 WORD 4 Analog Reference Specifications and Supplemental Information
54. Comp 313 Alt Type 2 Cmd 315 Process 2 Txt 5 186 Encoder Freq 63 Sync Loss Time 312 1 Series B amp Up Handheld HIM Only Process 2 Txt 6 187 Max Enc Counts 328 3 PWM Comp Tne Gn 4 amanea anaU Process 2 Txt 7 188 Break Freq 334 mwa Version 3 00116 ater Process 2 Txt 8 189 PWM Break Freq 334 5 4 Firmware Version 4 001 amp later Stabiity Gain 324 4 5 Firmware Version 5 001 amp later 8 Firmware Version 6 001 amp later Note Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold Parameter Numbers are shown in parenthesis An asterisk indicates that the parameter was not functional at time of printing 6 4 Programming Chapter Conventions Parameter descriptions adhere to the following conventions 1 All parameters required for any given drive function will be con tained within a group eliminating the need to change groups to complete a function 2 All parameters are documented as either having ENUMS or Engi neering Units ENUMS Parameter Name Parameter Number 8 Parameter Type Q Read Only or Read Write Parameter description Factory Default Drive Factory Setting Units Display Drive ENUM Text Internal Drive Units Engineering Units Parameter Name Parameter Number Parameter Type Q Read Only or Read Write Parameter description Display Units Drive Units amp amp User Units Internal Drive Units Factory Default Drive Factory Setting Minimum Value
55. Configurable Input 250 187 250 e o o o e e o Analog Interface Options Slot B 300 224 300 e o e e e e Choose No More than One Configurable Inputs Outputs are 10V or 20mA 350 261 350 9 e e e e LA Single ended Non isolated Configurable including Pot Input amp 2 400 298 400 e e e oe e e Single ended Non isolated Outputs 1 Configurable 1 20mA 450 336 450 9 e e e e e LA3 Two Isolated Configurable Outputs 500 373 500 9 e e e e LA4 One Isolated Configurable Input amp Output 600 _ 448 600 e e e e LA5 Isolated Pulse Input Non isolated Pulse Output amp Single ended Language must be specified to ensure shipment of appropriate User Manual Non isolated Configurable Output G Frame Standard Drives in enclosed construction are supplied through the Configured Drives Common Mode Choke F amp G Frame must be specified for F Frame Program and will have an A suffix after the HP rating CM Internal Common Mode Choke factory installed D through G Frame drives in IP 65 NEMA Type 4 and IP 54 NEMA Type 12 configurations are NCM No Common Mode Choke supplied through the Configured Drives Program xPR has a roll in type chassis Not available with v5 001 amp later 1 4 Information and Precautions Nameplate Location Figure 1 1 1336 PLUS Nameplate Location 1 Refer to page 1 1 for frame reference classifications CJ 00808 z oo o
56. Drives Rated Open Style 180A 480V 30 112 kW 40 X150 HP 600V 37 93 kW 50 125 HP 1321 M670 All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated Open Style 670A 480V 112 448 kW 150 600 HP 600V 149 448 kW 200 600 HP Optional Cable Terminator Voltage doubling at motor terminals known as reflected wave phe nomenon standing wave or transmission line effect can occur when using drives with long motor cables Inverter duty motors with phase to phase insulation ratings of 1200 volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave on motor insulation life Applications with non inverter duty motors or any motor with excep tionally long leads may require an output filter or cable terminator A filter or terminator will help limit reflection to the motor to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating 2 38 Installation Wiring Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Table 2 F lists the maximum recommended cable length for untermi nated cables since the voltage doubling phenomenon occurs at differ ent lengths for different drive ratings If your installation requires longer motor cable lengths a reactor or cable terminator is recom mended Refer to Table 2 F for frequency cable length and voltage restrictions of 1204 TFA1 or 1204 TFB2 terminators Optional Output Reactor Bulletin 1321 Reactors listed in the 1336 PLUS 3 0 Price Sheet can be used for drive input and output These reactors are specifically cons
57. F07 0 75 2 0 1 6 0 75 2 1 1 7 3 3 3 6 15 3 C2E B25 i F10 1 2 6 2 1 1 2 8 2 3 3 45 3 8 15 3 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 F15 15 33 2 8 15 35 3 0 4 6 4 12 15 7 C2E B40 M D8E B40 A2 F20 2 46 3 8 2 48 4 0 5 6 5 12 15 7 M C2E C63 M D8E C63 F30 3 64 5 3 3 72 60 8 10 8 15 25 7 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 A3 F50 5 100 18 4 5 107 19 0 12 15 12 30 35 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 A4 F75 75 13 6 1338 10 15 7 154 20 30 20 50 50 30 C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 F100 10 164 16 1 15 224 220 130 40 30 80 80 30 C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 F150 15 245 240 20 245 240 35 60 35 100 100 50 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 F200 20 280 27 0 20 28 0 27 0 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 B 015 15 25 0 242 20 28 0 27 0 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 020 20 320 31 0 25 35 0 340 45 70 45 125 125 50 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 025 25 40 0 39 0 30 43 0 42 0 60 90 60 150 150 70 M F8E C45 CMN 6300 030 30 46 0 45 0 30 1490 480 70 90 70 150 150 70 CMN 6300 C X040 40 610 590 40 61 0 59 0 80 110 80 200 200 70 CMN 6300 040 40 580 60 0 50 630 65 0 80 125 80 250 250 100 i B CMN 6300 050 50 780 75 0 60 7750 770 100 150 100 300 300 100 i i CMN 9000 X060 60 750 77 0 60 750 770 100 150 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 D 060 60 820 85 0 75 1980 960 125 200 125 350 350 150 E 075
58. F67 Motor Sync Loss fault indication Sync Loss Gain Parameter Number 311 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets a gain that controls the sensitivity of the sync loss Display Units Drive Units Numeric Gain x 100 detection function Factory Default 40 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 6 60 Programming Motor Control Sync Loss Comp Parameter Number 313 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the extra voltage to add when trying to getthe motor Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts to re sync after a loss of sync is detected Factory Default 0 Volts Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 25 of Drive Rtd Volts Sync Loss Time Parameter Number 312 Parameter Type Read and Write For Sync Loss Sel Fault the sync loss detectionand Display Units Drive Units 1 Second Seconds x 100 recovery function is enabled If the sync loss continues Factory Default 5 Sec for longer than the time set by Sync Loss Time the drive Minimum Value 1 Sec faults with an F67 Motor Sync Loss fault indication Maximum Value 30 Sec PWM Comp Time Firmware 4 001 amp later Parameter Number 333 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter adjusts the PWM waveform dead time Display Units Drive Units None compensation This adjustment can improve the stability Factory Default 80 of lightly loaded motors at low speed Only D Frameand Minimum Value 20 larger drives will benefit from this adjustment To
59. Fault Owner MOP Owner Data In A1 D2 Data Out A1 D2 Process 1 Par Process 1 Scale Process 1 Txt 1 8 MOP Freq Anlg In 0 2 Freq Mol tor Mode Power Mode Fit Fit Motor Mode Power Mode Fault Frequency Fault Status 1 Ral Ral Ral ed Volts ed CT Amps ed CT kW 4 20mA Loss Sel Ma ximum Speed Encoder Type Mo An Flyi FS FS tor Poles g Out 0 Offst ing Start En art Forward art Reverse CR1 Out Select Dig Out Freq Dig Out Current Dig Out Torque Tor Flu que Current x Current Speed KP Speed KI Speed Error Speed Integral Speed Adder Boost Slope Rated Amps Rated kW EE PROM Cksum Fault Alarms 1 CR2 4 Out Select Mo Mo tor NP RPM tor NP Hertz Local Owner Process 2 Par Process 2 Scale Process 2 Txt 1 8 Mol Mol Flu KP tor NP Volts tor NP Amps x Amps Ref Amps IR Drop Volts Slip Comp Gain Rated VT Amps Rated VT kW Flu Mol Mol VT x Up Time tor OL Fault tor OL Count Scaling Ground Warning Lat mm DIVIDI ched Alarms 1 arm Mask 1 ault Data C Bus Memory Config Status Ref Select Fdbk Select Reference Feedback Error Output KI Process KP Process PI Neg Limit PI Pos Limit No Masks Masks Owners Owners Owners Owners Owners Owners Owners Owners Owners Adapter I O Adapter I O Process Display Process Display Process Display Metering Metering Diagnostics Diagnostics Faults Faults Fau
60. Feedback Inputs L7E Contact Closure Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection e L5 424VAC DC Interface e L5E 24VAC DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs L8E 24VAC DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection e L6 115VAC Interface e L6E 115VAC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs e LOE 115VAC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection Uses internal 5V DC supply The user inputs are connected to the option board through TB3 see Figure 2 1 for location The L4 L5 and L6 options each have nine control inputs The function of each input must be selected through programming as explained later in this section The LAE through L9E options are similar to L4 L5 and L6 with the addition of encoder feedback inputs In addition the L7E L8E and L9E options allow encoder loss detection Refer to Appendix A for further information The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2 1 and 0 30 mm 14 and 22 AWG Recommended torque for all terminals is 0 90 1 13 N m 8 10 Ib in Use Copper wire only Digital inputs are connected at TB3 Input Mode Select A number of combinations are available by first programming Input Mode to the desired control scheme i e 2 wire 3 wire or Status The remaining inputs can then be configured by program ming TB3 Term 22 Sel through TB3 Term 28 Sel Refer to the Di
61. Figure E 175 933 1108 B050 77 Figure F 193 1110 1303 BX060 77 Figure F 193 1110 1303 B060 96 No Derate 361 1708 2069 B075 120 Figure G 361 1708 2069 B100 150 Figure H 426 1944 2370 B125 180 Figure J 522 2664 3186 BX150 180 Figure J 606 2769 3375 B150 240 Figure L 606 2769 3375 B200 292 Figure M 755 3700 4455 B250 325 Figure N 902 4100 5002 BP BPR250 6 322 Figure O 491 4658 5149 BX250 360 No Derate 902 4100 5002 B3005 425 No Derate 1005 4805 5810 BP BPR300 6 357 Figure P 619 5942 5961 B3505 475 No Derate 1055 5455 6510 BP BPR350 6 421 Figure Q 783 6039 6772 B4005 525 No Derate 1295 6175 7470 BP BPR400 6 471 Figure R 793 6329 7122 B4505 590 No Derate 1335 6875 8210 BP BPR450 6 527 Figure S 931 7000 7931 1 i B5005 670 Figure T 1395 7525 8920 Base Derate Amps are based on nominal voltage B6005 670 PET SET 1465 ie 10250 240 480 or 600V If input voltage exceeds Drive Rating Drive Output must be derated Refer to 500 600V DRIVE CWF10 24 Figure U 25 29 54 Figure AE CWF20 48 Figure U 29 57 86 2 m f T CWF30 72 Figure U 32 87 119 Rating is at 4 kHz 2 kHz for 224 448 kW 300 600 CWESO 96 Figure U 35 117 152 HP 500 600V If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz CWF75 10 Figure U 38 148 186 are selected drive rating must be derated CWF100 12 Figure U 41 177 218 Fi i ih drive g e derated See CWF150 19 Figure U 52 286 338 igure A Av CWF200 24 Figure U 60 358 418 3 Drive Ambient Temperature Rating is 40 C If C025 30 No D
62. Frequency Jog Mask Jog Owner KI Process KP Amps KP Process Language Last Fault Latched Alarms 1 Latched Alarms 2 Line Loss Volts Line Loss Fault Line Loss Mode LLoss Restart Load Loss Detect Load Loss Level Load Loss Time Local Mask Local Owner Logic Mask Loss Recover Low Bus Fault Max Bus Volts Max Enc Counts Max Traverse Maximum Freq Maximum Speed Maximum Voltage Meas Volts Min Bus Volts Minimum Freq MOP Freq MOP Increment MOP Mask MOP Owner Motor Mode Motor NP Amps Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM Motor NP Volts Motor OL Count Motor OL Fault Motor OL Ret Motor Poles Motor Therm Fit Motor Type Output Current Output Freq Output Power Output Pulses Output Voltage Overload Amps Overload Mode P Jump Phase Loss Level Phase Loss Mode PI Config PI Error PI Fdbk Select No 287 86 89 207 145 100 109 146 286 71 39 143 144 192 163 200 155 229 62 156 157 204 70 231 241 55 194 24 96 105 221 193 222 47 205 270 320 40 256 228 290 291 292 93 179 92 321 91 325 328 79 19 151 20 272 323 16 137 22 101 110 141 191 178 177 190 202 201 379 153 268 4 54 66 23 67 38 37 80 331 330 213 219 216 Group Faults Faults Faults Faults Masks Owners Faults Faults Ratings Faults Faults Faults Motor Control Metering Motor Control Feature Select Metering Diagnostics Frequency Set Frequency Set Setup Frequency Set Diagno
63. Metering Enc Fdbk 64 Set Defaults Diagnostics 65 Freq Command Metering Diagnostics 66 Output Freq Metering 67 Output Pulses Diagnostics 69 Drive Direction Diagnostics 70 Heatsink Temp Metering Diagnostics 71 Firmware Ver Ratings 72 Current Angle Diagnostics 73 76 Preset Freq 4 7 Frequency Set 77 Speed Control Feature Select Process PI Encoder Feedback 78 Traverse Inc Feature Select 79 Max Traverse Feature Select 80 P Jump Feature Select 81 Blwn Fuse Fit Faults 82 Cur Lim Trip En Faults 83 Run Boost Motor Control 84 Power OL Count Metering 85 Reset Run Tries Feature Select 86 89 Fault Buffer 0 3 Faults 90 Analog Trim En Analog I O 91 Low Bus Fault Faults 92 Logic Mask Masks 93 Local Mask Masks 94 Direction Mask Masks 95 Start Mask Masks 96 Jog Mask Masks 97 Reference Mask Masks 98 Accel Mask Masks 99 Decel Mask Masks Name 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 118 119 126 127 128 129 136 137 138 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 Group Fault Mask MOP Mask Stop Owner Direction Owner Start Owner Jog Owner Reference Owner Accel Owner Decel Owner
64. RFB 180 D 1336 RFB 340 E 1336 RFB 475 G 1336 RFB 590 G 1336 RFB 670 G Filter Series A Mounting Power Three Phase Frame See Dissipation Volts Used with Reference Figure C 1 4 5 Watts 200 240V 1336F AQF05 AQF10 A1 380 480V 1336F BRF05 BRF20 A1 A2 Figure C 1 or 2 Watts 200 240V 1336F AQF05 AQF10 A1 Figure C 2 380 480V 1336F BRF05 BRF20 A1 A2 Figure C 1 9 Watts 200 240V 1336F AQF15 AQF20 A2 380 480V 1336F BRF30 BRF50 A2 A3 Figure C 1 or 9 5 Watts 200 240V 1336F AQF15 AQF20 A2 Figure C 2 380 480V 1336F BRF30 BRF50 A2 A3 Figure C 1 14 Watts 200 240V 1336F AQF30 AQF50 A3 Figure C 2 35 Watts 380 480V 1336F BRF75 BRF200 A4 Figure C 2 30 Watts 200 240V 1336F A007 B 380 480V 1336F B007 B015 B Figure C 2 56 Watts 200 240V 1336F A010 A015 B 380 480V 1336F B020 B030 B Figure C 2 71 Watts 200 240V 1336F A020 A030 C 380 480V 1336F BX040 BX060 C Figure C 3 or 90 Watts 200 240V 1336F A040 A050 D Figure C 4 380 480V 1336F B060 B100 D Figure C 3 or 125 Watts 200 240V 1336F A060 D Figure C 4 380 480V 1336F B125 BX150 D Figure C 3 or 60 Watts 200 240V 1336F A075 A125 E Figure C 4 380 480V 1336F B150 B250 E Figure C 5 61 Watts 380 480V 1336F BP BPR250 BP BPR350 F 1336F BX250 B350 G Figure C 5 94 Watts 380 480V 1336F BP BPR400 BP BPR450 F 1336F B400 B450 G Figure C 5 121 Watts 380 480V 1336F B500 B600 G CE Conformi
65. Read Only This parameter displays the output frequency present at Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward TB1 terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Factory Default None Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 4400 00 Hz Freq Command Parameter Number 65 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward commanded to output This command may come fromany Factory Default None one of the frequency sources selected by Freq Select 1 Minimum Value 400 00 Hz or Freq Select 2 Maximum Value 4400 00 Hz Anlg In 0 Freq Parameter Number 138 140 Parameter Type Read Only Anlg In 1 Freq Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Anlg In 2 Freq Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 00 Hz These parameters displays the frequency command Maximum Value 400 00 Hz present at the specified analog input terminals This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command 6 6 Programming Encoder Freq Parameter Number 63 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq at encoder input terminals of TB3 This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400
66. Recover T4 before the timer expires This allows the drive to turn its output on and resume running according to the selection programmed in Line Loss Restart Operation when Line Loss Mode is set to LoBus gt Decel Operation in this mode is similar to above except that the drive will attempt to maintain the bus voltage at the level programmed in Ride Thru Volts If a power interruption occurs T1 the drive will continue to operate from stored DC bus energy until the bus voltage drops to the level set by DC Bus Memory Line Loss Volts T2 At this point the drive will start a 500 ms timer and attempt to regulate the bus voltage at the level set by Ride Thru Volts One of the following conditions will then occur 1 The drive is unable to extract enough energy from the mechanical load and the bus voltage will fall below the level set by Min Bus Volts T5 before the timer expires This will generate a bus Undervoltage Fault if Low Bus Fault is set to enabled 2 The bus voltage will be maintained at the level programmed in Ride Thru Volts and the timer expires If Line Loss Fault is set to enabled a Line Loss Fault will be issued Important Ride Thru Volts should be set below the level set by DC Bus Memory Loss Recover below the level set by DC Bus Memory Line Loss Volts and above the level set by Min Bus Voltage If Ride Thru Volts is set above the recovery level the drive will oscillate in an
67. Sensorless Vector or V Hz 6 Sensorless Vector or V Hz operation Sensorless Vector or Volts Hertz operation is selectable via Control Select Vector operation is the default If V Hz operation is desired reprogram Control Select using the steps above as a programming guide Refer to Chapter 6 5 8 Start Up Advanced Start Up Procedure Press these keys GBGEREREE while following these steps 7 Setting Frequency Command A From the Status Display press the Enter key or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment key until Display is shown C Press Enter D Press the Decrement key until Metering is displayed E Press Enter F Press the Increment key until Freq Command is displayed The HIM Display will show Choose Mode EEProm Choose Mode Display Setup Metering Output Voltage 0 Vlts Freq Command o X B With the drive still running use the speed source to command maximum speed The drive should ramp to Maximum Freq 0 00 Hz m G If the frequency command is a value other than zero use the speed source or pa digital analog pot etc to set the command to zero H After the command has been set to zero press the ESCape key until the Stopped pa Status Display is shown 0 00 Hz 8 Verifying Minimum and Maximum Frequency Settings A Press the Start key The drive should output zero Hz which is the factory At Speed m default value
68. Speed Parameter Number 151 Parameter Type Read and Write This Parameter sets the output frequency at full frequency Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 reference for Factory Default 400 Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz 1 Encoder feedback speed regulation Meximum Value 400 Hz 2 All analog inputs to TB2 remote pot 0 10V amp 0 20 mA NOTE Maximum Freq must be raised to allow operation or modulation above Maximum Speed Motor Poles Parameter Number 153 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter contains the number of motor magnetic Display Units Drive Units 1 Poles Poles poles This value translates output frequency into actual motor RPM during closed loop operation It is calculated from Motor NP Hertz and Motor NP RPM Programming 6 51 Encoder Feedback Speed KI Parameter Number 165 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter contains the integral gain value for the ve Display Units Drive Units Numeric Gain x 100 locity loop during closed loop operation Factory Default 100 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20000 Speed KP Parameter Number 164 Parameter Type Read and Write Not functional at time of printing will set the proportional Display Units Drive Units Numeric Gain x 100 gain for the speed loop Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20000 Speed Error Parameter Number 166 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the difference between Freq Display Unit
69. Through the Back Mounting Frame D Detail F 9 9 0 39 375 21 AN a 392 1477 T 356 1 _ 1420 4 6 0 18 lt 14 02 Te nena Ree ee nN LU o i F 0 24 E us L See Detail 1118 6 26 7 i 44 04 1 05 10544 i 41 51 962 7 87 90 A 867 4 l 34 15 n 806 7 773 9 31 76 30 47 9 A 680 5 26 79 1178 11 650 8 Cutout as Viewed i gt 46 38 25 62 from INSIDE Enclosure 587 0 23 11 e PI 494 5 19 47 338 6 13 33 T B 1826 7 19 i p All Dimensions in Millimeters i and Inches i je da y v Y Y YY 1 05 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Minimum dimension allowed More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation KW Y Y Y Y YN E 16 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Threaded AM Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame E 508 01 2000 4899 142241 56 00 1095 8 43 14 19 25 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Minimum dimension allowed More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation 18 79 Cutout Dimensions B 17 26 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Self Ta
70. True 375 SL6 Time 0 00 349 SL2 Step Jump Jump to 6 376 SL6EncoderCnts 0 350 SL2 Step Setting 0001 6 62 Programming Step Logic Figure 6 1 Step Logic 60Hz 50Hz 40Hz 30Hz 20Hz 10Hz OHz 10Hz 20Hz 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz Start SL Input 1 SL Input 2 Step Logic Output 15 Encoder Counts 10 Since Start 0 of Step 5 10 15 20 Pulse Counts 15 Since Start 10 of Step 5 0 SLO Logic Step Firmware 5 001 amp later Parameter Number 335 341 347 353 359 365 371 Parameter Type Read and Write SL1 Logic Step Factory Default Step On Time SL2 Logic Step Units Display Drive SL3 Logic Step Pd Step 0 Step On Time 1 SL4 Logic Step SL4 In True 2 SL5 Logic Step SL2 In True 3 SL6 Logic Step SL1 In False 4 MM SL2 In False 5 When the logic in this parameter is true the program will Any SL True 6 move to the next step The SL1 and SL2 inputs are desig All SL True 7 nated in TB3 Term xx Sel No SL True 8 The logic which refers to time is also for encoder or pulse SL1 not SL2 9 counts Time can be replaced with counts when using the SL2 not SL1 10 encoder and pulse inputs Time and SL1 11 When using Time and SLx or Time not SLx the time or Time and SL2 12 counts need to elapse before the logic input will be Time not SL1 13 checked Time not SL2 14 Do Not Step 15 Programming 6 63 Step Logic SLO Log
71. Type Read and Write Selects the functions of inputs 1 amp 2 at TB3 when an op Display Units Drive Units Mode Number Selection tional interface card is installed Refer to Input Mode Factory Default Status Selection in Chapter 2 This parameter cannot be changed Units Display Drive while the drive is running Power to the drive must be cycled Status 1 before any changes will affect drive operation 2WR PWR 3 Wire 2 DIP provides a delay to the Start command Drive will then o Wire 3 start if Run amp Stop commands are applied at the same time OWR PWR DIP 4 Freq Select 1 Parameter Number 5 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which of the frequency sourcesis Factory Default Adapter 1 currently supplying the Freq Command tothe driveunless Units Display Drive Freq Select 2 or Preset Freq 1 7 is selected Use Last 0 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value MOP 5 Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value Firmware 5 001 amp later Step Logic 20 Accel Time 1 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the driveto ramp Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 from 0 Hz to Maximum Freq The rate determined by this Factory Default 10 0 Sec value and Maximum Freq is linear unless S Curve En Minimum Va
72. WORD 8 T WORD c 1 Datalink C ata OutC2 124 WORDS umm WORD d bI tas WORD 10 WORD d Datalink D Data OutD2 126 A 14 Specifications and Supplemental Information Encoder Interface Wiring Option L4 L4E amp L7E Wiring id vi Vd V PH gt gt H gt H w fl n a ah i Typical Z Typical Typical y i i Out Opt A 100 Ott Opt ti HGH Typical HH HH 681 173 Current 10 7k 107k Nox Rud Isolated bed E j Isolated S AAA e We lias J1J2 rra 45V 5v 5 45V Tan i M 25 apf 470 470 12V O 0 1uf 470 470 TW 3 E 0 001 Isolated e Isolated 576 Ground aj Ground e T A A A oh OA ho oh A A i m ENC ENC T A A T A A A A A A A x ls ENC ENC D A 12V RET B A B A 12V RET GND 49 2 2 2 23 24 2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 M 35 36 IGND 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 27 28 29 30 93 32 3 9 35 36 z CSCO Ie es IVS ele E E29 EET eee e x x gt F7 gt F x L4 L4E L7E Option L4 L4E Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements Contacts must be capable of operating a
73. description bit ENUM is Enc Cnt Max Load Loss displayed on line 1 except Series A Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss HIMs below version 3 0 Fit Clear Mode Parameter Number 39 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls the method for clearing faults Factory Default Enabled Units Display Drive Disabled 0 Faults cleared only by cycling power Enabled 1 Faults cleared by issuing a valid stop command only through TB3 HIM or cycling power see Bit 3 of the Logic Control Structure in Appendix A Ground Warning Parameter Number 204 Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the Ground Warning fault F57 when the drive Factory Default Disabled senses ground current in excess of 2 amperes approxi Units Display Drive mate Refer to Chapter 7 for further information Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Ground Warning Generated Phase Loss Mode Parameter Number 330 Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the function that detects a phase loss or the Factory Default Disabled current rating has been exceeded in the drive if powered Units Display Drive on single phase line A fault F49 or alarm condition will Disabled 0 No Fault Generated de sp ripple voltage exceeds Mas eMe in Alarm 1 Generates a Phase Loss Alarm i Fault 2 Generated F49 Input Phase Fault Phase Loss Level Parameter Number 331 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the DC bus ripple voltage above which a phase loss Display Uni
74. drive is Mamm Valus 24000 RPM running Motor NP Hertz Parameter Number 178 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 frequency Factory Default 60 Hz Vei Minimum Value 1Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximdm Value 400 Hz running 6 52 Programming Encoder Feedback Encoder Counts Displays the scaled encoder count value The value is in cremented in the forward direction and decremented in the reverse direction Requires a quadrature dual channel encoder and a value in Enc Count Scale Parameter Number 283 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 1 Count Counts Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 432767 A ATTENTION To guard against possible machine damage and or personal injury be aware that the maximum encoder count value in either direction is 32767 No roll over will occur and the value will be frozen at this maximum value until manually reset or decremented below maximum via opposite counts Enc Count Scale Parameter Number 282 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the scale factor for the incoming encoder pulse count Display Units Drive Units N mb ofi ing Pul Factory Default 1000 Encoder Counts Umber ot Incoming Fulses Minimum Value 1 Enc Count Scale Maximum Value 4096 Encoder Loss Sel Paramet
75. for the Minimum Freq parameter The Status Display should 0 00 Hz indicate At Speed and the actual frequency 0 00 Hz If the drive does not start check bit 12 Voltage Check of the Drive Alarm Jes 1 parameter If the bit is 1 the drive terminal voltage is preventing the gp n E drive from starting Normally this is caused by IGBT leakage current To i S bypass this alarm program Flying Start En to Track Volts then start the At Speed arive 60 00 Hz D 9 Checking Direction A Initiate a Reverse command Important With Direction Mask set to the default value the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter If the reverse command is to be issued from TB3 Direction Mask must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3 The drive will ramp to zero speed then ramp to Maximum Freq in the opposite direction The output frequency shown on the Display Panel will indicate speed with a for forward or a for reverse As the drive decelerates the Forward Direction LED will flash indicating actual direction During this time the Reverse Direction LED will illuminate contin uously indicating the commanded direction Once zero Hertz is reached and the drive begins to accelerate in the reverse direction the Forward LED will extinguish and the Reverse LED will illuminate continuously a 8 N a a N At Speed 60 00 Hz Start Up 5 9 Advance
76. for the drive to zero Hz F Press the Increment or Decrement key to display Output Voltage Start the drive and record the value G Stop the drive H Program the values recorded above into the following parameters Flux Amps Ref Flux Current at 45 Hz IR Drop Volts Output Voltage at zero Hz Important Some motors i e 6 pole special etc may be particularly sensi tive to the adjustment of IR Drop Volts If this tuning procedure does not give the desired performance adjust IR Drop Volts up down 1 or 2 volts until desired response is achieved The HIM Display will show Freq Command xx HZ Flux Current 1 Amp Flux Current Amps Freq Command 0 Hz Output Voltage 0 Vits Output Volts at 0 Hz V Adjusting Flux Up Time 18 On larger motors 37 kW 50 HP typical additional acceleration performance can be gained by adjusting Flux Up Time This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will inject current at Current Limit levels before acceleration begins This pre acceleration time builds flux in the motor to allow for optimum acceleration and may result in shorter overall acceleration If better performance is required adjust Flux Up Time Begin with 0 2 seconds default is zero and increase as necessary For the typical steps involved when programming refer to step 15 Tuning Slip Comp Gain 19 To adjust the recovery response to load changes Slip Comp Ga
77. functional at time of printing Turns off output on High Speed Input True Regulates Vbus using deceleration Active on 15 Vbus Not functional at time of printing Regulates Vbus using deceleration Active on High Speed Input True Programming 6 23 Feature Select Power Loss Ride Thru Important The drive has the ability to ride through short power interruptions However power loss ride thru requires careful system design to guard against problems associated DC Bus Memory Loss Recover with rapid return of the AC line voltage after a line voltage DC Bus Memory Line Loss Volts dip Consult the factory with your application details before Ride Thru Volts attempting to program your drive to ride through an AC line Min Bus Volts voltage dip of more than 15 below the nominal voltage DC Bus Memory 6 parameters are associated with the line loss functionality Line Loss Mode selects the method of detecting a power line loss and the response to a line loss Line Loss Volts adjusts the level at which a line loss is recognized when Line Loss Mode is set to LoBus gt Off or T1 Loss of Power LoBus Decel T2 Line Loss Recognized by Drive Loss Recover adjusts the level at which the drive T3 Power Retumed recognizes the input power has returned when Line Loss T4 Recovery from Line Loss Initiated by Drive Mode is set to LoBus gt Off or LoBus gt Decel T5 Minimum Bus Volta
78. gt A gt Mounting Hole Detail AA 10 4 0 41 Dia gt lt 17 0 0 67 EB A Lo c3 c m L M 19 0 0 75 Dia BB See Bottom View Dimensions for Details sE le 0O00 N Ore o 9 ail Y Yz MEE N lt CC Mounting Holes 4 See Detail All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches All Weights in Kilograms and Pounds Frame Shipping Reference A B C Max D E Y Z AA BB cc Weight E Enclosed 511 0 1498 6 424 4 477 5 1447 8 16 8 40 1 195 0 901 4 151 9 186 kg 20 12 59 00 16 71 18 80 57 00 0 66 1 61 7 68 35 49 6 98 410 Ibs E Open 511 0 1498 6 372 6 477 5 1447 8 16 8 40 1 138 4 680 0 126 3 163 kg 20 12 59 00 14 67 18 80 57 00 0 66 1 61 5 45 26 77 4 97 360 Ibs IP 20 NEMA Type 1 amp Open Dimensions Frame F Dimensions B 5 635 0 25 00 Removable Lifting Angle Open Chassis um 762 0 r 63 5 2 50 487 7 19 20 gt 30 00 Y 0507 p EN 9 95 A e Allen Bradley 2286 0 37 9 90 00 1 49 L A 193 0
79. instantaneous trip circuit breaker 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip 6 or 600V Delta Delta systems on The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P Maximum rating allowed by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installtion 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler Hammer Series HMCP is 100 000A at 240 volts 65 000A at 480 volts and 25 000A at 575 volts Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V 2 8 Installation Wiring Table 2 A continued 575 Volt Input Protection Devices CT Ratings Motor Drive Circuit Circuit a Catalog Dual Element Non Time Breaker Protector Number Input Output Time Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 3 49 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range 6 amp 1336F HP Amps Amps Min Max 2 Min 1 Max 2 Max 8 Max9 Available Catalog Numbers A4 F10 1 24 2 0 3 3 3 6 15 3 140M C2E B25 E F20 2 4 8 40 6 6 6 10 15 7 140M C2E C63 140M D8E C63 F30 3 7 2 6 0 10 12 10 15 15 7 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 F50 5 9 6 8 0 15 20 15 20 20 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 F75 7 5 100 10 0 15 20 15 30 35 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 1
80. like drive types ERROR 4 The value just transferred to the drive is an illegal Record the parameter number displayed value out of range too high or too low for the and then press Enter to continue the parameter download Manually reprogram all recorded parameters after the download is complete ERROR 5 The download was attempted while the drive was Stop the drive and repeat the download running attempt ERROR 6 The file in the HIM is for a different HP or voltage If the download is desired press the Enter drive than the drive to which it is connected i e key If not desired press the ESCape key to 1336 PLUS 10 HP file to 1336 PLUS 15 HP drive end the download Drive HIM ERROR 1 The HIM calculated a checksum as the file was Repeat the Upload uploaded and compared it to the HIM file checksum stored after the upload The checksums did not match indicating the upload was not successful and the HIM file is now corrupted 7 8 Troubleshooting Table 7 C Fault Code Cross Reference Fault Display Name Reset Run 56 Precharge Open No 57 Ground Warning No 58 Blwn Fuse Fit No 60 Encoder Loss No 61 Mult Prog Input No 62 Ill Prog Input No 63 Shear Pin Fault No 64 Power Overload No 65 Adptr Freq Err No 66 EEprom Checksum No 67 Sync Loss Fault No 68 ROM or RAM Fit No 69 Step Logic Fit No
81. load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Environment Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Ambient Operating Temperature IP00 Open IP20 NEMA Type 1 Enclosed IP54 NEMA Type 12 Enclosed IP65 NEMA Type 4 Enclosed Storage Temperature all constructions Atmosphere 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C 32 to 104 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C 32 to 104 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C 32 to 104 degrees F 40 to 70 degrees C 40 to 158 degrees F Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0ms Vibration 0 006 inches 0 152 mm displacement 1G peak Agency Certification ULL Listed g gee CSA Certified UL we road Marked for all applicable directives Emissions EN 50081 1 EN 50081 2 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class B EN 61800 3 Immunity EN 50082 1 EN 50082 2 IEC 801 1 2 3 4 6 8 per EN 50082 1 2 EN 61800 3 Low Voltage EN 60204 1 PREN 50178 Ce 1 Note Installation guidelines called out in Appendix
82. maintained This parameter should be set greaterthan Loss Recover i e for a lower bus voltage Otherwise the drive will cycle in and out of line loss NOTE If Line Loss Mode Input gt Decel line loss operation is similar but the inertia ride thru function regulates the bus to the value in DC Bus Memory Min Bus Volts Parameter Number 323 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage below which the drive will disable Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts firing The Line Loss flag in Drive Alarm 1 is always set Factory Default 194 388 485 Volts If Low Bus Fault Enabled the drive faults with an F04 Minimum Value 100 200 250 Volts Undervolt Fault This means that even if Line Loss Maximum Value 200 400 500 Volts Mode Input Decel dropping below minimum bus disables firing and signals a line loss To check the minimum safe value for Minimum Bus Set Low Bus Fault Disabled Set Line Loss Fault Disabled Select DC Bus Voltage on the HIM With the drive stopped disconnect power from the drive Watch the HIM display for the lowest voltage reading before the HIM loses power A ATTENTION To guard against possible drive damage this parameter MUST be set such that firing is disabled at a bus voltage higher than the bus voltage at which the power supply for the gate drive circuits is lost See the procedure at left to check the minimum value for
83. minimum tem perature rating of 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Maximum torque for both terminal blocks is 0 57 N m 5 Ib in Table 2 J Power Supply Input Requirements Terminal Average Peak Block Drive Type Input Voltage Current Current TB4 1 All 22 28V DC 2 25A 5 00A TB4 2 TB6 230V AC 200 375V DC3 0 50A 1 00A 380 480V AC 400 750V DC3 0 25A 0 50A 500 600V AC 400 925V DC3 0 25A 0 50A 1 Thepower source used to drive a power supply must be capable of providing the peak current at startup A flat current or power limit is acceptable but a foldback current limit may trip at startup never allowing the supply to start 2 Must be supplied from a Class 2 Limited Power Source 3 Must be supplied from a source that is provided with transient voltage surge suppression such that transients are suppressed to 6000V peak maximum or less 2 40 Installation Wiring Auxiliary Output TB9 Control Interface Board Installation and Removal Frames A1 A4 The 480V or 600V depending on the input voltage to the drive output terminal block TB9 is only available on F Frame Drives This terminal block provides a three phase high voltage connection from the load side of the AC input line fuses Normally this connection is used to power an external control transformer user supplied or other auxiliary circuit Refer to Figure 2 1 for location Impor
84. or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed CR1 CR2 CR3 CR3 CR4 CR4 N N Only Present j on B Frame amp Up Drives 13 14 15 16 17 18 A1 A2 vy Future Use Terminal TE True Earth Shield Termination 10 11 CR1 Programmable Contact Reserved for 11 12 CR2 Programmable Contact 13 14 Resistive Rating 115V AC 30V DC 5 0A 14 15 CR3 Programmable Contact Inductive Rating 115V AC 30V DC 2 0A 7 us CR4 Programmable Contact A1 A2 Reserved for Future Use Important On A Frame drives the power supply used for relay contact outputs requires a field installation at the supply source of transient voltage surge suppression with maximum clamping voltage of 2 5 kV 2 32 Installation Wiring Analog I O The 1336 PLUS II analog I O configuration provides a standard set of inputs and outputs with the capability to install up to 2 option boards thus replacing the standard I O with a variety of options All connec tions are performed at TB2 Installing an option board in the slot A or B location will change the function of those terminals on TB2 from standard Only one option board can be installed in each slot Figure 2 6 shows the s
85. progress 2 2 Motor connected drive off 9 3 DC boost being applied 4 4 Motor running at Dwell Frequency 5 5 Motor accelerating 6 6 Motor at command speed 7 7 Motor decelerating 8 8 Motor coasting 9 9 Motor under DC braking 10 10 Waiting for fault reset returns to 0 11 11 Start mode 12 12 Flying start search enable 13 13 Flying start w encoder in process Fit Power Mode Parameter Number 144 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the power mode active atthetime Factory Default None of the last fault These values can be helpful in trouble Units Display Drive shooting for a condition causing a fault 4 1 Power up sequence in progress 2 2 Precharge in progress 9 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory P 4 Ready for run cmnd after powerup 5 5 Power stage diagnostics running 6 6 Line loss detection occurred 7 7 Ready for run command after stop 8 8 Drive running 9 9 Motor flux decay delay 10 10 DC braking in progress 11 11 Drive fault occurred 12 12 Flying start search enabled 13 13 Deceleration in progress 14 14 SCR wake mode 15 15 SCR check mode 16 16 SCR wait mode 6 34 Programming Fault Frequency This parameter stores and displays the last Output Freq prior to a fault Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Valu
86. puan 50Hz 2 4 6 50 Carrier Frequency in kHz 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure U 100 Figure V 100 CWF10 200 98 C150 TOT a 3 Q opo ga g amp 9 E 96 N amp Ewu ac lot ac b SB 94 Recommended 5g 80 es L 75 92 90 1 l l D l 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz 70 65 j 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz wa Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in Specifications and Supplemental Information Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in 40 C Ambient amp Open Drive in 50 C Ambient Ambient between 41 C amp 50 C Figure Rating Derate Figure Rating Derate Figure W 100 Figure X 100 C200 90 C250 90 o 2 o o 2 o5 E amp 80 g 0 QX 70 AT 7 e 6 es 60 EE 60 50 50 40 i 1 40 2 4 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure Y 100 Figure Z 400 CX300 90 CP350 o 90 N S 2 80 CPR350 Ze 80 2 E 80 A X 70 os eZ Oo 9 70 ae w 60 es E 50 SU m 40 7 50 f 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure AA 100 CP400 a 90 oa CPR400 2 E sw ax 6 70 ee 60 50 f 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure AB Assumes two 2 725 CFM cooling fans for Figure AC Assumes two 2 725 CFM cooling fans for IP 20 NEMA Type 1 enclosure C300 C600 ype 1 C300
87. resolu tion analog output a single ended 5V pulse output and galvanically isolated 5V pulse input The analog output channel is configurable for 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation LA6 Isolated Bipolar Isolated Thermistor Input This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with a galvanically isolated analog input and a gal vanically isolated thermistor input Analog Input 0 is configurable for 10V or 20 mA operation with polarity determining forward or reverse operation Analog Input 1 is suitable for use with PTC sensor chains with a maximum total resistance at normal operating temperature of 1 8k ohms An indication occurs in short circuit or over temperature conditions A short circuit condition is when the total resistance of the sensor chain is less than 60 ohms with reset from the short circuit condition occurring when the resistance exceeds 70 ohms An over temperature condition is when the total resistance of the sensor chain exceeds 3 3k ohms with reset from the over temperature condition occurring when the resistance is less than 2 2k ohms LAT Isolated Bipolar Input Isolated Input This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with two galvanically isolated analog inputs Analog Input 0 is configurable for 10V or 20mA operation with polarity determining forward or reverse opera tion while Analog Input 1 is configurable for 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation 1 Refer t
88. the com Locate cause replace fuse 58 manded voltage and the mea sured voltage is greater than 1 8 of rated voltage for 0 5 seconds then a fault will be issued indicat ing that the bus fuse in 30 kW 40HP amp up drives has blown C167 Watchdog Internal microprocessor fault If there is only one occurrence reset 17 the fault and continue If the fault con tinuously or frequently reoccurs con tact your local service representative or replace the Main Control Board Diag C Lim Fit The drive output current has Check Cur Lim Trip En Check for 36 exceeded the hardware current excess load improper DC boost set limit and the Cur Lim Trip En ting DC brake volts set too high or parameter was enabled other causes of excess current Drive gt HIM Refer to Table 7 B DSP Checksum There was a breakdown in com Reset to factory defaults Replace 37 munications between the DSP Main Control Board or Gate Driver and main processors Board DSP Comm Fault Refer to the Description and Action statements for C167 Watchdog 27 F17 above DSP Protected Flash download included a new Remove power from the drive Install 46 DSP Main Block and J14 was not J14 per download kit instructions and installed when power was reapply power When transfer is com restored plete remove power and J14 DSP Queue Fault Refer to the Description and Action statements for C167 Watchdog 31 F17 above DSP Reset Fault Power up has been att
89. the high end of the Range listed in Anlg Out CHEN i ni 4300 0 Sel Example To get 150 of current to equal 10V 20mA A eee set this parameter to 150 Slot A Option Vara a nel 1 m arameter Type ead Only Slot B Option F 4 actory Default Standard Displays the catalog number ofthe analog I O option board Units Display Drive currently installed in slots A and or B Standard 0 LAT 1 LA2 2 LAS 3 LA 4 LA5 5 LA6 6 LA7 7 Undefined 8 Board not recognized 6 32 Programming This group of parameters allows configuring viewing and clearing drive faults Fault Buffer 0 Parameter Number 86 89 Parameter Type Read and Write Fault Buffer 1 Factory Default None Fault Buffer 2 Units Display Drive Fault Buffer 3 0 0 Last Fault 1 1 Fault from Buffer 0 These parameters store the last 4 faults that occur o o Fault from Buffer 1 3 3 Fault from Buffer 2 Clear Fault Parameter Number 51 Parameter Type Read and Write Selecting Clear Fault and pressing Enter will clear any Factory Default Ready faults and return the drive to ready status Units Display Drive Ready 0 Clear Fault 1 Cur Lim Trip En Parameter Number 82 Parameter Type Read and Write This setting determines the drive response when the hard Factory Default Disabled ware current limit is exceeded The current limit is Units Display Drive approximately 180 of Rated VT
90. this parameter Traverse Inc Sets the time period of increasing frequency Setting this parameter to zero disables the P Jump function Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 78 Read and Write 0 01 Second Seconds x 100 0 00 Sec 0 00 Sec 30 00 Sec Programming 6 25 Feature Select Traverse Dec Sets the time period of decreasing frequency Setting this parameter to zero disables the traverse function Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 304 Read and Write 0 01 Second Seconds x 100 0 00 Sec 0 00 Sec 30 00 Sec Traverse Function m Traverse Period P Jump s 40 P Jump icol gig Reference t Maximum Traverse 20 4 N t eo 5 Traverse P Jump 20 i i 10 20 30 40 50 60 Seconds Max Traverse Parameter Number 79 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the peak amplitude of speed modulation Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Factory Default 0 00 Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Hz Maximum Value 50 of Maximum Freq P Jump Parameter Number 80 f VIP Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the slip or inertia compensation amplitude Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq of speed modulation F
91. to avoid interference with nearby sen sitive equipment The cable to the motor carries switched voltages and should be routed well away from sensitive equipment The ground conductor of the motor cable should be connected to the drive ground PE terminal directly Connecting this ground conduc tor to a cabinet ground point or ground bus bar may cause high fre quency current to circulate in the ground system of the enclosure The motor end of this ground conductor must be solidly connected to the motor case ground Shielded or armored cable may be used to guard against radiated emissions from the motor cable The shield or armor should be con nected to the drive ground PE terminal and the motor ground as outlined above Common mode chokes at the drive output can help reduce common mode noise on installations that do not use shielded cable Common mode chokes can also be used on analog or communication cables Refer to page 2 37 for further information An RFI filter can be used and in most situations provides an effective reduction of RFI emissions that may be conducted into the main supply lines If the installation combines a drive with sensitive devices or circuits it is recommended that the lowest possible drive PWM carrier fre quency be programmed 1336 PLUS Ii drives can be installed with an RFI filter which controls radio frequency conducted emissions into the main supply lines and ground wiring If the cabling and in
92. tunethe Maximum Value 90 drive first set Break Freq then lower PWM Comp Time until stable motor operation is achieved Stability Gain can also be used to help achieve stable motor operation Break Freq Firmware 4 001 Eee ME R TUA gt arameter Type ead and Write PWM Break Freq Firmware 5 001 amp later Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward This parameter can only be changed on D Frame amp larger Factory Default 0 Hz drives This is the frequency where the dead time ACS Value ue compensation returns to the default value of 80 If the samumi Le 30 Hz motor has instability at low speeds determine the point where the instability ends and add 5 Hz A good starting point is usually 10 15 Hz Stability Gain Parameter Number 324 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter adjusts the gain of the torque component Display Units Drive Units None of current to adjust for possible current instability in certain Factory Default 0 motors caused by variations in design Increasing this val Minimum Value 0 ue to the correct setting for a particular motor will stabilize Maximum Value 16 torque pulsations in the motor Important Setting this value too high may cause addition al instability It should be set for the lowest value that eliminates the instability Step Logic Programming 6 61 The Step Logic Parameters are only available with Firmware versions 5 001 and later StepLogic o
93. you wish to re enter the Startup mode simply select Reset Sequence to start from the beginning Selecting Continue allows you to resume from the point where you left off e Completing the last action in any step will automatically take you to the next step Pressing SELect will activate line 2 of the display this must be done for all values e Press the Increment or Decrement key to adjust a value skip if value is correct Press Enter to store the value or retain the existing value Pressing Enter again will cause you to move to the next step parameter Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Startup 5 4 Start Up Assisted Start Up Keys Description The HIM Display will show 5 Using the following diagram as a guide perform the desired steps ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be discon nected from the load before proceeding Configure Configure Input Enter Motor Enter Check Rotation Configure Configure Basic Setup Voltage Frequency Data Encoder Data Verify Direction Autotune Digital I O Analog I O Enter Basic Modify Input Enter Nameplate Is an Encoder Perform Motor Autotune the Enter Digital Enter Analog Setup Volt Freq Motor Data Present Rotation Test Motor 1 0 Config V0 Config el z al al E al ol el Accel Time 1 Base Frequency Mo
94. 00 2 85 0 3 0 8 54111T 1 424 1 2 54148 1 26 7 3 1 541421 8 54111B 1336F B250 2 107 2 4 0 8 54112T 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 1 33 6 2 1 541421 8 54112B 1336F BX250 8 53 5 1 0 24 54109 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 NA NA 1336F BP BPR250 3 53 5 1 0 24 54109 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 NA NA 1336F B300 8 67 4 2 0 24 54110 1 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F BP BPR300 3 67 4 2 0 24 54110 1 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F B350 3 85 0 3 0 24 54111 1 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F BP BPR350 3 85 0 3 0 24 54111 1 42 4 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F B400 3 107 2 4 0 24 54112 1 424 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F BP BPR400 3 107 2 4 0 24 54112 1 424 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F B450 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 1 424 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F BP BPR450 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 1 424 1 2 54148 NA NA 1336F B500 8 152 0 300 MCM 24 54179 1 53 5 1 0 2 54109 NA NA 1336F B600 8 152 0 300 MCM 24 54179 1 53 5 1 0 2 54109 NA NA 1336F C075 1 33 6 2 8 541421 1 13 3 6 2 54135 1 84 8 1 541317 1336F C100 1 53 5 1 0 8 541531 1 13 3 6 2 541351 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F C 125 1 67 4 2 0 8 541581 1 26 7 3 2 541471 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F C 150 1 107 2 4 0 8 54111 1 424 1 2 54148 1 13 3 6 1 541351 1336F C200 2 67 4 2 0 8 54110T 1 424 1 2 54148 1 267 3 1 541421 8 54110B 1336F C250 2
95. 00 600 595 0 600 0 800 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P Maximum rating allowed by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installtion 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler Hammer Series HMCP is 100 000A at 240 volts 65 0004 at 480 volts and 25 0004 at 575 volts oar wWnDND on Input Devices Electrical Interference EMI RFI Installation Wiring 2 9 Starting and Stopping the Motor A ATTENTION The drive start stop control circuitry in cludes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop cir cuit may be required to remove AC line power to the drive When AC power is remo
96. 00 Hz PI Pos Limit Parameter Number 224 Parameter Type Read Write This parameter sets the upper positive limit of the PI Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward output Factory Default 8 33 of Maximum Freq Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz PI Preload Parameter Number 225 Parameter Type Read Write Sets the value used to preload the Pl integrator when Set Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Output or Preload Int bits equal 1 in PI Config Factory Default 0 00 Hz Minimum Value 8 33 of Maximum Freq Maximum Value 8 33 of Maximum Freq 6 57 Programming Motor This group of parameters defines basic motor control Control Control Select Parameter Number 9 Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the motor control method for the drive The default Factory Default Sens Vector setting provides full stator flux control that is suitable for Units Display Drive most applications Important When using synchronous motors Control Se lect must be set to V Hz operation Fixed Boost or Full Custom Additional selections are offered to optimally tune performance e Two volts Hertz modes are available one using simple voltage boost and one for complete configurability These may be required for special motors or unmatched multi motor installations e The Economize mode offers all the advantages of stator fl
97. 00 Hz Frequency _ Incoming Encoder Pulse Rate Displayed Encoder PPR Pulse Freq Parameter Number 254 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq at pulse input terminals of TB2 This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Frequency _ Incoming Pulse Rate Hz Displayed Pulse Scale MOP Freq Parameter Number 137 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command from the Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq MOP The MOP frequency command can be adjusted by Factory Default None TB3 if present and appropriate inputs are selected see Minimum Value 0 00 Hz page 2 27 Some SCANport adapters including the RIO Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Adapter can also adjust the MOP frequency command This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command Heatsink Tem p Parameter Number 70 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the heatsink temperature of the Display Units Drive Units 1 C Deg C drive Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 C Power OL Count Parameter Number 84 Parameter Type Read Only Displays the percentage of accumulated It for the drive Display Units Drive Units 1 4096 100 thermal overload protection Running continuousl
98. 05 305 914 161 0 91 4 229 11829 25 40 300 800 300 800 300 100 100 300 200 300 75 600 12 15 17 6 112 2 114 3 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 305 305 914 161 0 11829 229 11829 25 40 375 600 300 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 0 75 1 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 30 5 305 914 61 0 11829 229 1829 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 0 37 0 5 7 6 122 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 30 5 305 914 61 0 11829 229 1829 25 40 875 600 600 600 600 100 100 300 200 600 75 600 2 2 3 22 3 7 6 122 914 914 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 300 800 600 600 600 75 600 15 2 7 6 1122 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 11829 25 40 875 600 600 600 600 75 600 0 75 1 7 6 12 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 0 37 0 5 7 6 112 2 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 229 182 9 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 A3 3 7 5 3 7 5 76 112 2 1143 1829 182 9 182 9 182 9 229 1829 25 40 375 600 600 600 600 75 600 2 2 3 76 122 114 3 182 9 182 9 182 9 22 9 182 9 25 40 375 Contact factory for 600 600 600 75 600 15 76 122 114 3 advice on cable 1829 1829 1182 9 229 1829 25 40 375
99. 075 3 5 3 0 4 6 4 9 15 7 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 F10 1 54 45 6 9 6 12 15 7 140M C2E B63 140M D8E B63 B A2 F15 15 173 6 0 8 125 8 15 20 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 F20 2 9 7 8 0 10 15 10 20 25 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 A3 F30 3 143 1120 15 20 15 25 35 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 F50 5 213 118 0 25 30 25 45 60 30 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140M CMN 2500 F75 75 226 220 30 45 30 60 80 50 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140M CMN 2500 B 007 75 280 27 0 40 45 40 60 80 50 140M F8E C32 140M CMN 4000 010 10 35 0 34 0 50 60 50 80 100 50 140M CMN 4000 015 15 490 1480 70 90 70 110 150 70 140M CMN 6300 C 020 20 63 0 65 0 100 110 100 1125 200 100 140M CMN 9000 025 25 750 77 0 100 150 100 200 250 100 140M CMN 9000 030 30 79 0 800 125 175 125 225 300 150 140M CMN 9000 D 040 40 119 0 120 0 120 225 120 300 300 150 050 50 149 0 150 0 200 250 200 1350 350 250 060 60 178 0 180 0 250 300 250 450 450 250 E 075 75 238 0 240 0 300 400 300 1500 500 250 100 100 289 0 291 0 400 500 400 700 700 400 5 i 125 125 322 0 325 0 450 700 450 800 800 600 E 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping 2 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that
100. 1 to zero on power up Freq Ref SqRoot Parameter Number 229 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter activates the square root function for Factory Default Disabled 0 10V 4 20 mA inputs or signals sent through Adapters 1 Units Display Drive 6 when used as a frequency reference If the input signal Disabled 0 varies with the square of speed the parameter should be Enabled 1 set to Enabled 6 18 Programming Frequency Set Pulse In Scale Parameter Number 264 Parameter Type Read and Write Provides a scaling factor for the pulse input Display Units Drive Units Factor Pulses per Rev Scale Incoming Pulse Rate Hz posa E ci di Factor Desired Command Freq Maximum Value 4096 Example 4 Pole Motor 60 Hz Max Speed The 1336 MOD N1 option outputs 64 Hz Hz At full analog reference the pulse input to the drive will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz Hz 3840 pulses sec 3840 Hz le Factor 64 Scale Factor 60 Hz 6 Encoder PPR Parameter Number 46 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the scaling for encoder feedback Display Units Drive Units Factor Pulses per Rev speed regulation Enter the actual encoder pulses per Factory Default 1024 PPR revolution Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 4096 Feature Select Programming 6 19 This group contains the necessary parameters to activate and program advanced features of the drive Dwell Frequency Param
101. 2 2A a 106 6A E 203 CB as 043 2B ke 107 6B 3 204 CC E 044 2C 108 6C s 205 CD i 045 2D 109 6D T 206 CE 046 2E 110 6E 207 CF 047 2F 111 6F 208 DO 048 30 112 70 e 209 D1 049 31 113 71 E 210 D2 050 32 i 114 72 E 211 D3 051 33 amp 115 73 T 212 D4 052 34 p 116 74 4 213 D5 053 35 ul 117 75 214 D6 054 36 118 76 215 D7 055 37 119 77 H 216 D8 056 38 E 120 78 ib 217 D9 057 39 st 121 79 218 DA 058 3A z 122 7A 219 DB 059 3B H 123 7B E 220 DC J 060 3C i 124 7C E 221 DD 061 3D 2 125 7D F 222 DE gt 062 3E 126 7E 223 DF 063 3F B 127 7F us 224 E0 064 40 z 161 A1 225 E1 065 41 d 162 A2 226 E2 066 42 4 163 A3 227 E3 067 43 164 M H 228 E4 068 44 2 165 A5 229 E5 069 45 5 166 A6 230 E6 070 46 167 A7 oy 231 E7 071 47 4 168 A8 T 232 E8 072 48 169 A9 d 233 E9 073 49 170 AA E 234 EA 074 4A 171 AB F 235 EB 075 4B 5 172 AC 236 EC 076 4C A 173 AD 237 ED 077 4D s 174 AE 238 EE 078 4E i 175 AF 239 EF 079 4F cx 176 BO 240 FO 080 50 i 177 B1 241 F1 081 51 178 B2 242 F2 082 52 179 B3 i 243 F3 083 53 180 B4 i 244 F4 084 54 181 B5 E 245 F5 085 55 182 B6 246 F6 086 56 183 B7 247 F7 087 57 184 B8 248 F8 088 58 185 B9 249 F9 089 59 186 BA 250 FA 090 5A 187 BB Fi 251 FB 091 5B 188 BC x 252 FC 092 5C 189 BD 253 FD 093 5D 190 BE 255 FF i 094 5E 191 BF de 095 5F 3 192 C0 Specifications and Supplemental Information A 11 Communications Data Information Format Drive Status Structure Sen
102. 2 4 Remote I O 6 48 Reset Defaults 5 3 5 5 S S Curve 6 21 Search Mode 3 5 Shielded Cables Power 2 17 Skip Frequency 6 17 Software Compatibility 1 1 Specification Analog I O 2 36 Specifications Control A 2 Electrical A 2 Environment A 1 Input Output Ratings A 2 Protection A 1 Speed Select Inputs 2 28 Stability Gain 6 60 Start Up Mode 3 5 Status Display 3 5 Step Logic 6 61 T TB3 Control Interface Board 2 25 Terminal Blocks Auxiliary Output 2 40 Locations 2 14 TB1 2 15 TB2 Analog I O 2 32 TB2 Digital Outputs 2 31 TB4 TB6 2 39 Traverse Function 6 25 Troubleshooting Clearing a Fault 7 1 Fault Code Cross Ref 7 8 Fault Descriptions 7 1 Fault Display 7 1 HIM Upload Download 7 7 U Unshielded Power Cables 2 17 Upload Download Capability 3 5 User Supplied Enclosures A 4 V Volts Hz Pattern 6 57 W Wiring Control and Signal 2 24 Control Interface 2 25 Potentiometer 2 33 Power 2 14 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 184
103. 2WR PWR 3 Wire 2 DIP provides a delay to the Start command Drive will then o Wire 3 tart if Run amp Stop commands are applied at the same time n 2 2WR PWR DIP 4 TB3 Term 22 Sel Parameter Number 242 247 Parameter Type Read and Write TB3 Term 23 Sel Factory Default Rev For Input 3 terminal 22 TB3 Term 24 Sel Jog Input 4 terminal 23 Aux Fault Input 5 terminal 24 TB3 Term 26 Sel Speed Sel 3 Input 6 terminal 26 TB3 Term 27 Sel Speed Sel 2 Input 7 terminal 27 TB3 Term 28 Sel Speed Sel 1 Input 8 terminal 28 Units Display Drive This parameter selects the functionality of the input at TB3 Unused 0 terminals 22 28 Jog 1 In most cases if multiple inputs are programmed with the Speed Sel 1 3 2 4 same function they will be logically OR d 4st Accel 5 Selections that use one input for multiple functions A can 2nd Accel 6 have only one terminal select for that option If multiple A 2 Acc 1 Acc 7 2 Acc Closed 1 Acc Open terminals are selected with these options a Mult Prog Input fault F61 will occur 1st Decel 8 2nd Decel 9 A 2 Dec 1 Dec 10 2 Dec Closed 1 Dec Open Only one input can select Run Reverse and it can only Clear Fault 11 be selected if Input Mode is set to 2 Wire Multiple inputs will cause a Mult Prog Input fault F61 and selecting 3 Aux Fault 12 Wire will cause a Ill Prog I
104. 336 PLUS II drives installed in user supplied enclosures may be mounted within an enclosure or may be mounted to allow the heat sink to extend outside the enclosure Use the information below in combination with the enclosure manufacturer s guidelines for sizing Base Derate Derate Heat Dissipation Heat Sink Total Cat No Amps 1 Curve 2 3 Drive Watts 2 3 4 Watts 2 Watts 2 AQF05 23 Figure A 13 15 28 AQF07 3 0 Figure A 15 21 36 AQF10 45 Figure A 17 32 49 AQF15 6 0 Figure A 21 42 63 AQF20 8 0 Figure A 25 56 81 AQF30 12 Figure A 33 72 105 AQF50 18 Figure A 42 116 158 AQF75 22 Figure A 58 186 244 A007 27 No Derate 156 486 642 A010 34 Figure B 200 721 921 A015 48 Figure D 205 819 1024 A020 65 No Derate 210 933 1143 A025 77 No Derate 215 1110 1325 A030 80 No Derate 220 1110 1330 A040 120 Figure G 361 1708 2069 A050 150 Figure H 426 1944 2370 A060 180 Figure J 522 2664 3186 A075 240 Figure L 606 2769 3375 A100 291 Figure M 755 3700 4455 A125 325 Figure N 902 4100 5002 BRF05 12 Figure A 12 9 21 BRF07 1 7 Figure A 13 15 28 BRF10 2 3 Figure A 15 20 35 BRF15 3 0 Figure A 16 27 43 BRF20 4 0 Figure A 19 36 55 BRF30 6 0 Figure A 23 54 77 BRF50 9 0 Figure A 29 84 113 BRF75 15 4 Figure A 58 186 244 BRF100 22 0 Figure A 68 232 300 BRF150 24 0 Figure A 88 332 420 BRF200 27 0 Figure A 96 356 452 B015 27 No Derate 117 486 603 B020 34 Figure B 140 628 768 B025 42 Figure C 141 720 861 B030 48 Figure D 141 820 961 BX040 59 Figure E 175 933 1108 B040 65
105. 40M F8E C10 F100 10 120 120 20 25 20 40 40 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 F150 15 19 0 190 25 35 25 60 60 30 140M C2E C20 140M D8E C20 140M F8E C20 140 CMN 2500 F200 20 250 24 0 30 45 30 80 80 30 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140 CMN 2500 C 025 25 31 0 1300 40 60 40 100 1100 50 140M F8E C32 140 CMN 4000 030 30 360 350 50 70 50 125 125 50 B 140M F8E C45 140 CMN 4000 040 40 440 450 160 90 60 150 1150 70 B 140M F8E C45 140 CMN 6300 050 50 550 1570 80 110 180 200 200 70 140M CMN 6300 060 60 60 0 62 0 90 125 190 225 225 100 i 140M CMN 6300 D 075 75 84 0 1850 110 150 110 1300 300 100 140M CMN 9000 100 100 108 0 109 0 150 200 150 350 350 150 B 125 125 187 0 138 0 175 250 175 500 350 250 z E 150 150 167 0 168 0 225 300 225 500 400 250 200 200 251 0 252 0 350 400 350 600 500 250 250 250 282 0 2840 400 500 400 700 700 400 B X300 300 295 0 298 0 400 600 400 800 800 400 z m F P350 350 3470 3500 450 Semiconductor fuse supplied with drive P400 400 397 0 400 0 500 Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list publication 1336 6 5 for replacement information G 1300 300 297 0 300 0 400 350 350 347 0 350 0 450 400 400 397 0 400 0 500 Bussmann Type FWP SPP or 170M Series 450 450 446 0 1450 0 1600 630 Ferraz Shawmut Type A 70Q A 70QS or A070URD Series 500 500 496 0 500 0 800 6
106. 470 590 372 565 454 654 90 BP BPR450 347 438 527 424 532 438 527 424 532 347 527 424 532 00 B500 385 486 585 470 590 552 664 534 670 437 664 534 743 70 B600 437 552 664 534 670 552 664 534 670 437 664 534 743 70 e CWF10 2 1 2 5 24 21 2 0 25 24 2 1 2 0 CWF20 4 2 5 0 48 42 4 0 50 48 42 40 CWF30 6 2 7 5 7 2 6 2 6 0 75 72 6 2 6 0 CWF50 8 3 10 0 9 6 83 8 0 10 0 9 6 83 8 0 CWF75 9 0 11 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 11 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 CWF100 11 0 13 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 13 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 CWF150 17 0 20 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 20 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 CWF200 21 0 26 0 25 0 24 0 24 0 26 0 25 0 24 0 24 0 C025 27 32 31 30 30 32 31 30 30 C030 31 37 36 35 35 37 36 35 35 C040 38 45 44 45 45 45 44 45 45 C050 48 57 55 57 57 57 55 57 57 C060 52 62 60 62 62 62 60 62 62 C075 79 88 84 85 85 88 84 85 85 C100 94 112 108 109 109 112 108 109 109 C125 118 142 137 137 138 142 137 137 138 C150 144 173 167 167 168 173 167 167 168 C200 217 261 251 251 252 261 251 251 252 C250 244 293 282 283 284 293 282 283 284 CX300 256 307 295 297 298 307 295 297 298 C300 258 309 297 299 300 309 297 299 300 C350 301 361 347 349 350 361 347 349 350 CP CPR350 301 361 347 349 350 361 347 349 350 C400 343 412 397 398 400 412 397 398 400 CP CPR400 343 412 397 398 400 412 397 398 400 C450 386 464 446 448 450 464 446 448 450 C500 429 515 496 498 500 515 496 498 500 C600 515 618 595 598 600 618 595 598 600 1 480 Volts Only A 4 Specifications and Supplemental Information User Su pplied Enclosures 1
107. 5 Drive software detected a portion of the volts hertz curve with a negative slope Check drive programming 1 Base Voltage parameter must be greater than Start Boost If the DC Boost Select parameter is set to Full Custom Base Volt age must be greater than Break Voltage and Break Voltage must be greater than Start Boost Troubleshooting 7 5 Name amp Fault Open Pot Fault 09 Description An external pot is connected and the common side of the pot is open The drive generates this fault when the voltage between pot leads is greater than 3 9V DC Action Check the external potentiometer cir cuit at TB2 for an open circuit Op Error Fault 11 A SCANport device requests a Read or Write of a data type not supported This will also occur if 1 Motor Type is set to Sync PM and Stop Mode Used is set to DC Brake or 2 Motor Type is set to Sync Re luc or Sync PM and Speed Control is set to Slip Comp Check programming Option Error 14 Aslot A analog option board has been installed in slot B or A slot B board has been installed in slot A Remove or relocate to proper slot Overcurrent Flt 12 Overcurrent is detected in instan taneous overcurrent trip circuit Check for a short circuit at the drive output or excessive load conditions at the motor Overload Fault 07 Internal electronic overload trip
108. 6 Publication 1336 PLUS 5 3 September 2005 P N 184898 07 Supersedes June 2003 Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
109. 68 1 26 18 7 1336 RFB 80 C 302 0 775 0 78 5 238 0 685 8 20 4 68 8 32 0 12 0 11 89 30 50 3 09 9 37 27 00 0 80 2 70 1 26 26 5 B x Mounting Hole Detail F lt E 6G Dia 10 1 0 41 H gt Y A 14 8 0 58 S AM Side View MN j lt y Dia 18 8 0 75 Top Front View All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Catalog Weight Number A B Cc D E F G H kg Ibs 1336 RFB 150 D 270 0 1200 0 147 2 204 0 1159 4 20 3 20 3 1108 3 25 0 1336 RFB 180 D 10 63 47 20 5 80 8 03 45 65 0 80 0 80 43 63 55 1 1336 RFB 340 E 377 0 1392 0 155 0 308 0 1346 1 23 0 23 0 1265 37 0 14 84 54 80 6 10 12 13 53 00 0 91 0 91 49 80 81 6 C 10 CE Conformity Filter Dimensions continued o o Oo O 122 0 4 08 I 3 122 0 4 08 lt B m H gt F lt E gt E gt lt E gt F lt X C gt A i 9 9 KA 9 A A D Y i Oo Y yt se Fi A x 5 0 0 20 Dia Ground Stud G Catalog Weight Number A B e D E F G H kg Ibs 1336 RFB 475 G 300 0 794 0 160 0 275 0 200 0 70 0 12 5 740 0 29 0 1336 RFB 590 G 11 81 31 26 6 30 10 83 7 87 2 76 0 49 29 13 63 9 1336 RFB 670 G A AC Supply Source 2 3 Adapter Definitions 2 41 Alarms 7 9 Analog I O Options 2 34 Analog Option Board Installation Removal 2 34
110. 7 60 1 Y A A 1219 2 48 00 527 1 20 75 19 1 0 75 MEER 2748 A 1969 10 82 Bitia gt 108 0 4 25 x 158 8 6 25 Bottom View 15 7 0 62 Dia 4 Places 12 7 0 50 Dia 2 Places 681 5 26 83 Removable Plate for Cable Access 1 each side All Dimensions in Millimeters an 501 7 19 75 Fan Vertical 711 2 28 00 Fan Horiz 82 6 3 25 d Inches See page 2 1 for Mounting Information Approximate Shipping Weight drive amp pallet 415 0 kg 915 Ibs B 6 Dimensions Open Dimensions Frame F Roll In Chassis All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 635 0 25 00 o0 Li 6 e Li A 1543 3 Sal C Allen Bradley 28 e 5 q E ge DANGER TU x Z T SS lellello l ee m e LL Tle ISTIS aan o RLI
111. 85 0 3 0 8 54111T 1 67 4 2 0 2 54110 1 26 7 3 1 541421 8 54111B 1336F CX300 8 85 0 3 0 16 54111 NA NA 1336F C300 8 85 0 3 0 16 54111 NA NA 1336F C350 8 53 5 1 0 84 54109 NA NA 1336F C400 3 67 4 2 0 24 54110 Consult Factory NA NA 1336F C450 8 85 0 3 0 04 54111 NA NA 1336F C500 8 107 2 4 0 04 54112 NA NA 1336F C600 3 127 0 250 MCM 24 54174 NA NA 1 5 16 Stud All other studs are 3 8 Lugs shown for DC are based on dynamic brake sizing of 50 of motor rating X 1 25 Select proper lugs based on required braking torque Refer to 1336 5 64 or 1336 5 65 for additional information 3 T amp BCOLOR KEYED Connectors require T amp B WT117 or TBM 6 Crimper tool or equivalent Lugs should be crimped according to manufacturer s tool instructions If required Rockwell Automation can supply lug kits for lugs shown above Kits do not include crimping tools Consult factory for kit information Installation Wiring 2 17 Motor Cables A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 ft for every 10 meters 32 8 ft of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4 mm 0 015 in The cable should be 4 cond
112. 86 2 4 1336 RFB 16 AA 55 0 305 0 142 0 30 0 290 0 230 0 275 0 17 2 17 12 00 5 59 1 18 11 42 9 06 10 83 3 8 1336 RFB 30 A 60 0 335 0 160 0 35 0 320 0 280 0 305 0 1 8 2 36 13 19 6 30 1 38 12 60 11 02 12 00 4 0 gt E gt H gt 6 5 0 26 2 1 mm 14 AWG DHT TUTTI i 7 l 40 0 1 57 il 280 0 m lt F lt G 11 02 A eL O Q O A o V 6 3 025 Dia 4 Places A LIB y C 2 i TH All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Catalog Number A B Cc D E F G H l 1336 RFB 7 A amp 16 A 215 9 390 0 58 0 30 0 375 0 275 0 75 360 0 185 2 Series B 8 50 1535 228 118 14 76 1083 030 1417 729 Conduit Fitting Filter Dimensions continued CE Conformity gt C lt Catalog Weight Number A B Cc D E F G H kg Ibs 1336 RFB 30 A4 260 1 413 7 58 0 230 1 320 0 15 0 70 0 15 0 4 9 10 24 16 29 2 28 9 06 12 60 0 59 2 76 0 59 10 8 1336 RFB 27 B 276 6 540 0 58 0 212 6 461 0 10 9 68 1 32 0 7 0 10 89 21 26 2 28 8 37 18 15 0 43 2 68 1 26 15 4 1336 RFB 48 B 276 6 540 0 68 1 212 6 461 0 10 9 68 1 32 0 8 5 10 89 21 26 2 68 8 37 18 15 0 43 2
113. 89 C600 12560 A060 12818 B100 8969 CWF100 13079 C650 12561 A075 12819 B125 8970 CWF150 13099 C700 12562 A100 12826 BX150 8971 CWF200 13092 C800 12563 A125 12820 B150 13068 C025 8705 BRF05 12821 B200 13069 C030 8706 BRF07 12827 B250 13070 C040 8707 BRF10 12838 BP250 13071 C050 8708 BRF15 12839 BP300 13072 C060 8 09 BRF20 12840 BP350 13073 C075 Programming 6 43 This group of parameters contains binary masks for all control functions The masks control which adapters can issue control commands Each mask contains a bit for each adapter Individual bits can be set to Zero to lockout control by an adapter or set Mask Bii LEIG PES PEE LEIKS LEi MESH ERO to 1 to permit an adapter to have control L WE Adapter 1 A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 ex Adapter 2 cept Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Adapter 3 Adapter 4 gt Adapter 5 gt Adapter 6 gt LAX Direction Mask Parameter Number 94 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue forward Factory Default 01111110 reverse commands Units Display Drive If Freq Select 1 or Freq Select 2 is set to Analog In 0 0 0 Deny Control and an Analog Option Board with bipolar input LA6 LA7 1 Permit Control is installed that input designated Analog In 0 will have exclusive ownership of direction Bit 7 of Direction Mask must not be setto 0 and no other devi
114. Amps 6 41 Rated CT kW 6 41 Rated kW 6 41 1 4 Index Rated Volts 6 41 Rated VT Amps 6 41 Rated VT kW 6 41 Reference Mask 6 43 Reference Owner 6 46 Remote CR Output 6 29 Reset Run Time 6 20 Reset Run Tries 6 20 Ride Thru Volts 6 24 Run Boost 6 58 Run On Power Up 6 20 Run Accel Volts 6 59 S Curve Enable 6 20 S Curve Time 6 20 Save MOP Ref 6 17 Set Defaults 6 39 Shear Pin Fault 6 32 Skip Freq 6 17 Skip Freq Band 6 17 Slip Adder 6 51 Slip Comp Gain 6 20 Slip F L A 6 19 Slot A B Option 6 31 SLx Encoder Cnts 6 64 SLx Logic Jump 6 63 SLx Logic Step 6 62 SLx Step Jump 6 63 SLx Step Setting 6 63 SLx Time 6 64 Speed Adder 6 51 Speed Brake En 6 15 Speed Control 6 19 6 50 6 53 Speed Error 6 51 Speed Integral 6 51 Speed KI 6 51 Speed KP 6 51 Stability Gain 6 60 Start Boost 6 58 Start Mask 6 43 Start Owner 6 46 Stop Mode Used 6 38 Stop Owner 6 46 Stop Select 6 9 6 13 6 15 Sync Loss Comp 6 60 Sync Loss Gain 6 59 Sync Loss Sel 6 59 Sync Loss Time 6 60 Sync Mask 6 44 Sync Owner 6 47 Sync Time 6 13 TB3 Term Sel 6 27 Torque Current 6 7 Traverse Dec 6 25 Traverse Inc 6 24 Traverse Mask 6 44 Traverse Owner 6 47 VT Scaling 6 11 Password Mode 3 6 Potentiometer Wiring 2 33 Power Loss Ride Thru 6 23 Preset Frequency 6 16 Process Mode 3 5 Program Mode 3 5 Programmable Controller Config A 12 Programming Flow Chart 6 1 Pulse Input 2 31 R Reactors
115. Analog I O Setup ssslsesssesseesseeesesee 2 33 Optional Analog I O Configurations sss 2 34 BED occur cre ene dane eae eat da O OTRE 2 37 Cable Termifiation cci 2224itdcsi ees eet ideesieiadiaatiae ess 2 37 Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage 0 cece eee eee eee 2 38 Auxiliary Inputs TB4 TB6 4 eo Ya tp ERRORES 2 39 Auxiliary Output TB Oa ores ie dE pRETEPTU RED Ene 2 40 Control Interface Board Installation and Removal Ls 2 40 Adapter Definitions v sooo d oops toL LI Senes eentes 2 41 Chapter 3 HIM Description iuc EE CERES E RUE n TY nh 3 1 HIM OBS ANON cue reti rae eroria DUE Du he RIDE 3 4 Handheld HIM Operation 00 cece eee 3 13 Chapter 4 What is Flash Memory vs cs sede X mener RIPE IR ERPORRERIARSS 4 1 Firmware Download Requirements 0 0 e cece eee eee eee 4 1 toc ii Table of Contents Start Up Programming Troubleshooting Specifications and Supplemental Information Dimensions CE Conformity Chapter 5 Start Up Requirements 5 Ls xp EE IRE ets Initial Operation n ceu done iste oe hehe cies mam eee Assisted Start UD dd uar Ea Phe e dope OD VOR anes a Advanced StartUp inori Lesbos eb bee OG EUROPE EDS Chapter 6 PUNGHON Ndek i att eost edet ef echt beet Sera a od ter yt Programming Flow Chart comi daos oe aha te iov eta Chapter Conventions Les ac uersu ts ate siu Chapter 7 Fault Descriptions sto eter aaah e nets ante sae s
116. B3 Term 22 must be programmed to Run Reverse 2 Wire Control Example 3 Wire Control Example Run Forward 5 Stop Fault Reset 3 Common 6 Run Reverse A A hazard of personal injury from automatic restart exists with 2 wire control 2 wire control uses maintained Run contacts that act as both Run closed and Stop open devices Opening the Stop contact terminal 20 will stop the drive If this contact is reclosed any fault will be reset If a valid Start command is still present the drive will restart Only use 2 wire control for applications outlined in NFPA79 Under Voltage Protection If a 3 wire device i e HIM is also used pressing the HIM Stop key will also stop the drive Releasing the Stop key will clear any faults that are present but the drive will not restart without cycling the Start contact Installation Wiring 2 27 Available Functions for Inputs 3 through 8 A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are available Input Description 1st and 2nd Accel Closing these inputs will command the corresponding accel or decel rate If both inputs are open or both 1st and 2 d Decel are closed the current rate is maintained Input 1st 2nd No Command 0 0 Accel Decel 1 0 1 Accel Decel 2 1 0 stand Accel Decel Allows selection of the accel or decel time used by the drive 1 2nd 01st Auxiliary Faults the drive via external devices i e motor thermoswitch O L
117. Comp Display Drive No Control 0 Frequency regulation Slip Comp 1 Slip compensation Speed Droop 2 Negative slip compensation Phase Lock 3 Enable phase lock to pulse input Encoder Fdbk 4 Encoder feedback closed loop Droop Reg 5 Enc fdbk closed loop w active droop P Jump 6 Traverse function Process PI 7 Closed loop PI control Encoder Type This parameter selects the feedback encoder signal type The drive can accept single channel Pulse or dual chan nel Quadrature signals This selection must match the type of encoder being used If Pulse is selected and a dual channel encoder is wired see page 2 30 the feedback indication will be incorrect by a factor of 2 and no direction indication will be offered If Quadrature is selected and a single channel encoder is wired the feedback value will always be zero This cannot be changed while drive is running Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Units 152 Read and Write Quadrature Display Drive Pulse 0 Single channel encoder Quadrature 1 Dual channel encoder Encoder PPR Parameter Number 46 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter contains the scaling factor for encoder Display Units Drive Units Factor Pulses per Rev feedback speed regulation Enter the actual encoder puls Factory Default 1024 PPR es per revolution Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 4096 Maximum
118. DC Hold Time Advanced Setup 18 DC Hold Level Advanced Setup 14 Run On Power Up Feature Select 15 Reset Run Time Feature Select 16 Minimum Freq Advanced Setup Setup 17 Base Frequency Motor Control 18 Base Voltage Motor Control 19 Maximum Freq Advanced Setup Setup 20 Maximum Voltage Motor Control 22 MOP Increment Frequency Set 23 Output Power Metering 24 Jog Frequency Frequency Set 25 Anlg Out 0 Sel Analog I O 26 Stop Mode Used Diagnostics 27 29 Preset Freq 1 3 Frequency Set 30 Accel Time 2 Advanced Setup 31 Decel Time 2 Advanced Setup 32 34 Skip Freq 1 3 Frequency Set 35 Skip Freq Band Frequency Set 36 Current Limit Setup 37 Overload Mode Setup 38 Overload Amps Setup 39 Fit Clear Mode Faults 40 Line Loss Fault Faults 4 Motor Type Advanced Setup 42 Slip F L A Feature Select 43 Dwell Frequency Feature Select 44 Dwell Time Feature Select 45 PWM Frequency Advanced Setup 46 Encoder PPR Freq Set Enc Fdbk 47 Language Feature Select 48 Start Boost Motor Contro 49 Break Frequency Motor Control 50 Break Voltage Motor Control 51 Clear Fault Faults 52 Stop Select 2 Advanced Setup 53 DC Bus Voltage Metering 54 Output Current Metering 55 Input Status Digital I O Diagnostics 56 S Curve Time Feature Select 57 S Curve Enable Feature Select 58 Common Bus Advanced Setup 59 Drive Status 1 Diagnostics 60 Drive Alarm 1 Diagnostics 61 Drive Type Ratings 62 Freq Source Diagnostics 63 Encoder Freq
119. E Ground Bus w Hp r4 Grounded to Panel Important Grounding requirements will vary with the drives being used Drives with True Earth TE terminals must have a zero potential bus separate from potential earth PE ground bus Note that buses can be tied together at one point in the control cabinet or brought back separately to the building ground grid tied within 3 meters 10 feet 2 14 Installation Wiring Power Cablin Input and output power connections are performed through terminal p tput p p g block TB1 see Figure 2 1 for location Important For maintenance and setup procedures the drive may be operated without a motor connected Table 2 C TB1 Signals Terminal PE TE R L1 S L2 T L3 DC DC U T1 V T2 W T3 A Description Potential Earth Ground True Earth Ground AC Line Input Terminals DC Bus Terminals Motor Connection ATTENTION The National Codes and standards NEC VDE BSI etc and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment dam age Figure 2 1 Terminal Block Locations TB1 Power Terminal Block
120. Frequency Set Process Display Process Display Process Display Process Display Process Display Process Display Metering Freq Set Digital I O Digital O Digital 1 0 Motor Control Advanced Setup Ratings Ratings Ratings Ratings Ratings Ratings Ratings Masks Owners Digital O Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Motor Control Motor Control Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Frequency Set Diagnostics Faults Frequency Set Frequency Set Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Encoder Feedback Feature Select Feature Select Analog I O Encoder Feedback Advanced Setup Feature Select Process PI Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Motor Control Motor Control Masks Owners Diagnostics Owners Advanced Setup Setup Advanced Setup Motor Control Motor Control Motor Control Motor Control Masks Owners Advanced Setup Digital 1 0 Metering Feature Select Feature Select Masks Owners Setup A 10 Specifications and Supplemental Information HIM Character Map Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex haracter Decimal Hex 032 20 E 096 60 193 C1 033 21 097 61 3 194 C2 034 22 098 62 T 195 C3 035 23 099 63 E 196 C4 036 24 100 64 197 C5 037 25 101 65 i 198 C6 038 26 102 66 199 C7 039 27 103 67 200 C8 040 28 104 68 d 201 C9 041 29 i 105 69 ni 202 CA 04
121. Hi Drive Status 2 Anlg In 0 Lo Hi Anlg In 1 Lo Hi Input Mode TB3 Term Sel Anlg In 2 Lo Hi Anlg Signal Loss Cntrl Board Rev Slot A B Option Pulse Freq Slip Adder Line Loss Mode Pulse In Scale Dig At Temp Motor Therm Fit Drive Alarm 2 Latched Alarms 2 Alarm Mask 2 Meas Volts Anlg Out 1 Sel Anlg Out 1 Lo Anlg Out 1 Hi Anlg Out 1 Abs Anlg Out 1 Offst Elapsed Run Time Pulse Out Select Pulse Out Scale Enc Count Scale Encoder Counts Encoder Loss Sel Fault Status 2 Fault Alarms 2 Bus Regulation Load Loss Detect Load Loss Level Load Loss Time PI Max Error Current Limit En Traverse Dec Traverse Mask Traverse Owner Sync Time Sync Mask Sync Owner Sync Loss Sel Sync Loss Gain Sync Loss Time Sync Loss Comp Braking Chopper Alt Type 2 Cmd Application Sts Run Accel Volts Speed Brake En Line Loss Volts Loss Recover Ride Thru Volts Min Bus Volts ability Gain us Reg Level lax Bus Volts emote CR Output Time lax Enc Counts idir In Offset hase Loss Mode hase Loss Level recharge Fault WM Comp Time reak Freg PWM Lx Logic Step Lx Logic Jump Lx Step Jump Lx Step Setting Lx Time Lx Encoder Cnts Current Step Motor OL Ret c c z EI E 0 CD CD CD CD C0 UJ U U DI Process PI Faults Setup Feature Select Frequency Set Frequency Set Advanced Setup Setup Analog I O Analog I O Diagnostics Analog I O Analog I O Setup Digital O Digital O Analog I O Analog I O Ratings Analog 1 0 M
122. Ife oo Remote Device Se EE 2 42 Installation Wiring End of Chapter HIM Description Chapter 3 Human Interface Module Chapter 3 describes the various controls and indicators found on the optional Human Interface Modules HIMs The material presented in this chapter must be understood to perform the start up procedure in Chapter 5 When a drive mounted snap in HIM is supplied it will be connected as Adapter 1 see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2 and visible from the front of the drive This HIM should not be removed while drive power is applied A handheld HIM can be connected to the drive using a 1202 Cxx Option Cable as Adapter 2 3 4 or 5 see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2 This type of HIM can be removed while drive power is applied Refer to Control Status on page 3 6 and Handheld HIM Operation on page 3 13 for further information The HIM can be divided into two sections Display Panel and Control Panel The Display Panel provides a means of programming the drive and viewing the various operating parameters The Control Panel allows different drive functions to be controlled Refer to Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 and the sections that follow for a description of the panels ATTENTION When a drive mounted snap in HIM is not supplied on enclosed NEMA Type 1 IP 20 drives the blank cover plate option HASB must be installed to close the opening in the front cover of the enclo
123. Input 7 T Joules J 4 Phase to Ground MOV Rating Includes Phase Phase amp Phase Ground MOVs Ground Frame Reference A B D G Device Rating V AC 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 Phase Phase Total 160J 320J 280J 320J 280J 300J Phase Ground Total 220J 380J 360J 410 360J 370J 2 4 Installation Wiring Input Power Conditioning In general the 1336 PLUS II is suitable for direct connection to an AC line of the correct voltage Certain conditions can exist however that prompt consideration of a line reactor or isolation transformer ahead of the drive The basic rules to aid in determining whether a line reactor or isola tion transformer should be considered are as follows 1 If the AC source experiences frequent power outages or signifi cant voltage transients users should calculate the VAmax see for mula below If the source transformer VA exceeds the calculated VA max and the drive is installed close to the source it is an indication that there may be enough energy behind these voltage transients to cause nuisance input fuse blowing overvoltage faults or drive power structure damage In these cases a line reactor or isolation trans former should be considered Zarive Q Viine line N3 x Input Amps VAn Viine line 2 X Source Leakage 5 6 typical max Zdrive X 0 01 If the AC source does not have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground see Unbalanced Dis
124. Line Loss In Progress An alarm will be issued when the AC incoming voltage drops below 20 of input or a 150 volt drop takes place 6 Mtr Overload At the present value of output amps a motor overload trip will eventually occur 7 Motor Stalled Drive output frequency folds to 0 Hz and current limit is still active or voltage limit will not allow decel 8 Ground Warning Ground current exceeds 2 amperes 9 Auxiliary Input Input circuit is open 10 Heatsink Temp Temperature of drive heatsink has exceeded its limit 11 Sync Loss Synchronous motor not at synchronous speed 12 Phase Loss The DC bus ripple has exceeded the level in Phase Loss Level 13 4 20mA Loss 4 20mA signal lost 14 Motor OL Trip This bit will be high when the motor overload function has integrated high enough to cause a motor overload fault This bit is active regardless of the Motor Overload state enabled disabled 15 Auto Reset Drive is attempting to reset a fault using Reset Run Tries amp Reset Run Time 7 10 Troubleshooting Table 7 E continued Alarm Conditions Alarm Bit Alarm Name Description Drive 0 Motor Therm The value at the thermistor terminals has been exceeded This bit will be active only when Motor Alarm 2 Therm Fit is enabled and an analog option board with thermistor input is installed 1 Load Loss Load Loss Detect is set to Enabled and the drive output torque current was below Load Loss Level
125. Load Loss Time 6 26 Local Mask 6 44 Local Owner 6 47 Logic Mask 6 44 Loss Recover 6 24 Low Bus Fault 6 33 Max Bus Volts 6 26 Max Enc Counts 6 52 mcm TIT m Index I 3 Max Traverse 6 25 Maximum Freq 6 9 6 12 Maximum Speed 6 50 Maximum Voltage 6 59 Meas Volts 6 40 Min Bus Volts 6 24 Minimum Freq 6 9 6 12 MOP Freq 6 6 MOP Increment 6 17 MOP Mask 6 44 MOP Owner 6 47 Motor Mode 6 38 Motor NP Amps 6 11 Motor NP Hertz 6 11 6 51 Motor NP RPM 6 11 6 51 Motor NP Volts 6 11 Motor OL Count 6 6 Motor OL Fault 6 32 Motor OL Ret 6 35 Motor Poles 6 50 Motor Therm FIt 6 32 Motor Type 6 15 Output Current 6 5 Output Freq 6 5 Output Power 6 5 Output Pulses 6 39 Output Voltage 6 5 Overload Amps 6 11 Overload Mode 6 10 P Jump 6 25 Phase Loss Level 6 35 Phase Loss Mode 6 35 PI Config 6 53 PI Error 6 55 PI Fdbk Select 6 55 PI Feedback 6 55 PI Max Error 6 29 PI Neg Limit 6 56 PI Output 6 55 PI Pos Limit 6 56 PI Preload 6 56 PI Ref Select 6 54 PI Reference 6 55 PI Status 6 54 Power Mode 6 39 Power OL Count 6 6 Precharge Fault 6 35 Preset Freq 6 16 Process 1 Par 6 49 Process 1 Scale 6 49 Process 1 Txt 6 49 Process 2 Par 6 49 Process 2 Scale 6 49 Process 2 Txt 6 49 Pulse Freq 6 6 Pulse In Scale 6 18 6 29 Pulse Out Scale 6 29 Pulse Out Select 6 29 PWM Break Freq 6 60 PWM Comp Time 6 60 PWM Frequency 6 12 Rated Amps 6 41 Rated CT
126. Loss of input while any other setting of 4 20 mA Loss Sel is chosen will cause the drive to activate the alarm bit bit 6 of Drive Status and bit 13 of Drive Alarm and output programmed Minimum Freq Signal loss protection is offered for the 2 10V input Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value Programming 6 55 Process PI PI Fdbk Select Parameter Number 216 Parameter Type Read Write The source of the PI feedback is selected with this param Factory Default Analog In 1 eter It identifies the input point for the process feedback Units Display Drive device Use Last 0 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value MOP 5 Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value PI Reference Parameter Number 217 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the current value of the reference Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward selected by PI Ref Select Factory Default None Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz PI Feedback Parameter Number 218 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the current value of the reference Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward selected by PI Fdbk Select Factory Default None Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz PI Error Parameter
127. Minimum Freq Parameter Number 16 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 output Factory Default 0 Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 120 Hz Maximum Freq Parameter Number 19 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive will Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 output Factory Default 60 Hz Vai Minimum Value 10 Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Maximum Value 400 Hz PWM Frequency Parameter Number 45 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the carrier frequency for the sine cod Display Units Drive Units 2 KHz KHz 2 ed PWM output waveform Factory Default 2 KHz Minimum Value 2 KHz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Refer to the Derating Guidelines in Appendix A Maximum Value A amp B Frame Drives 8 kHz C Frame Drives amp Up 6 kHz Accel Time 2 Parameter Number 30 ACE Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 from 0 Hz to Maximum Freq The rate determined by this Factory Default 10 0 Sec value and Maximum Freq is linear unless S Curve En Minimum Value 0 0 Sec able is Enabled It applies to any increase in command Maximum Value 3600 0 Sec frequency unless Accel Tim
128. Minimum Value 0 00 Sec Maximum Value 360 00 Sec Remote CR Output Parameter Number 326 Parameter Type Read and Write Individual bits control relay outputs when selected with Factory Default Xxxx0000 CR1 4 Out Select 1 Energize Coil This parameter is reset to the default on power up Example If CR2 Out Select is setto Remote bit 1 of this parameter will control CR2 A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti BitO L gt CR1 Output CR2 Output CR3 Output CR4 Output gt Not Used 6 30 Programming Analog I O This group of parameters contains the programming options for analog drive inputs outputs Anlg In 0 Lo Parameter Number 237 239 248 Parameter Type Read and Write Anlg In 1 Lo Display Units Drive Units 0 1 920 100 Anlg In2 Lo Factory Default 0 0 Minimum Value 300 0 6 Sets the percentage of voltage or current from Input 0 1 Maximum Value 300 095 or 2 that represents Minimum Freq Anlg In 0 Hi Parameter Number 238 240 249 Parameter Type Read and Write Anlg In 1 Hi Display Units Drive Units 0 1 920 100 Anlg In 2 Hi Factory Default 100 0 Minimum Value 300 0 6 Sets the percentage of voltage or current from Input O 1 Maximum Value 300 095 or 2 that represents Maximum Freq Analog Trim En Parameter Number 90 Parameter T
129. Module 3 3 HIM Control Panel Digital Speed Control and Indicator also available with Analog Speed Pot Control Panel Key Descriptions JOG Start The Start key will initiate drive operation if no other control devices are sending a Stop command This key can be disabled by the Logic Mask or Start Mask Stop If the drive is running pressing the Stop key will cause the drive to stop using the selected stop mode Refer to the Stop Select 1 and Stop Select 2 parameters in Chapter 6 If the drive has stopped due to a fault pressing this key will clear the fault and reset the drive Refer to the Flt Clear Mode Logic Mask and Fault Mask param eters Jog When pressed jog will be initiated at the frequency set by the Jog Frequency parameter if no other control devices are sending a Stop command Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop using the selected stop mode Refer to Stop Select 1 Stop Select 2 Logic Mask and Jog Mask 3 4 Human Interface Module HIM Operation Control Panel Key Descriptions Continued on Change Direction pe Pressing this key will cause the drive to ramp down to zero Hertz and then ramp up to set speed in the opposite direction The appropriate Direction Indicator will illuminate to indicate the direction of motor rotation Refer to Logic Mask and Direction Mask Direction LEDs Indicators A uu The appropriate LED will illuminate contin
130. Motor R S T U V W L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 To Motor 1 Required m Input Fusing 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect _ See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions AC Input Line 200 240V 56 93 kW 75 125 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 112 187 kW 150 250 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 112 224 kW 150 300 HP Terminal Designations AN EM OC e Herr rj 1 1 TE DC DC PE PE R L1 S L2 T L3 U M1 V M2 W M8 a BUS a E NPUT OUTPUT A A A A E To Motor H To Motor Required 1 Required Branch Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect T T T See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions AC Input Line User supplied Installation Wiring 2 23 380 480V 187 336 kW 250 450 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 261 336 kW 350 450 HP Terminal Designations D E 2 r ho T L3 PE U M1 V M2 W M3
131. Number 219 Parameter Type Read Only The value of the error calculated by the PI loop This value Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward is the difference between PI Reference amp PI Feedback Factory Default None and determines the PI output Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz PI Output Parameter Number 220 Parameter Type Read Only The current output of the PI loop is displayed with this Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward parameter This output is used as the speed command for Factory Default None process control or the speed adder for process trim Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Kl Process Parameter Number 221 Parameter Type Read Write This parameter sets the integral gain of the process PI Display Units Drive Units NA NA loop Factory Default 128 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1024 6 56 Programming Process PI KP Process Parameter Number 222 Parameter Type Read Write This parameter sets the proportional gain of the process Display Units Drive Units NA NA PI loop Factory Default 256 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1024 PI Neg Limit Parameter Number 223 Parameter Type Read Write This parameter sets the lower negative limit ofthe Pl Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward output Factory Default 8 33 of Maximum Freq Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400
132. P ce R S B1 B2 181 6 167 1 112 8 163 6 2144 249 9 7 15 6 58 4 44 6 44 8 44 9 84 C 181 6 167 1 119 1 182 6 233 4 275 3 7 15 6 58 4 69 7 19 9 19 10 84 B 10 Dimensions IP 20 NEMA Type 1 Bottom View Dimensions Frames D G All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 144 0 5 67 52 1 2 05 gt Frame D lt 343 9 13 54 gt 261 4 10 29 gt lt 62 7 76 2 2 47 3 00 Conduit Knockout 2 Plcs 34 9 1 38 Conduit Knockout 3 Plcs Ce 204 5 805 Pe ca A g onduit Knockout 1 Plc 70 O8 198 1 780 q Q 169 4 4 6 67 2 131 6 5 18 Y Frame E 4823 1702 3053 12 00 gt 178 3 7 02 4 38 6 1 52 gt 50 8 12 7 0 50 Conduit Knockout 6 Plcs 1 i O 7 feeOO 1225 __ eae 260 4 el E Pn Ei 8 25 Y 153 7 6 05 88 9 101 6 3 50 4 00 Conduit Knockout 3 Plcs en amp Conduit Access Area Top 660 4 26 00 gt m 50 8 2 00 Frame G E 29 0 1 14 Conduit 254 0 Access Area 10 00 A 298 5 11 75 Y 15 9 0 63 Dia 2 Mtg Holes Bottom Dimensions B 11 Knockout Locations for Optional Junction Boxes Frames B amp C Only on CE Versions f
133. R 9 1 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 1829 350 400 350 400 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 G 224 448 224 448 NR 9 1 182 9 914 182 9 182 9 NR 61 0 182 9 182 9 182 9 182 9 300 600 300 600 30 600 300 600 600 200 600 600 600 600 NR Not Recommended NA Not Available at time of printing Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz and ambient temperature at the motor of 40 degrees C Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply values by 0 85 for high line conditions For input voltages of 380 400 or 415V AC multiply the table values by 1 25 1 20 or 1 15 respectively A3 reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality Reactors must have a turn turn insulation rating of 2100 volts or higher 3 Includes wire in conduit Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz Multiply values by 0 85 for high line conditions 5 When used on 600V systems 1329R L motors have a corona inception voltage rating of approximately 1850V 8 These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application Installation Wiring 2 21 Figure 2 2 Terminal Block TB1 200 240V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 HP Terminal Designatio
134. Reference 14 13 12 No Command 0 0 0 FreqSelect 1 0 0 1 Freq Select2 0 1 0 Preset Freq3 0 1 1 K 0 PresetFreg4 1 0 0 Time 1 0 i PresetFreqb 1 0 1 Time2 i yb PresetFreq6 1 1 0 Hold Time 1 1 PresetFreq7 1 1 1 y MOP Decremen 1 Decrement t 0 Not Decrement Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit BitO I 1 Y Stop 1 Stop 0 Not Stop Start 1 Start 0 Not Start Jog 1 Jog 0 Not Jog Clear Faults Y 1 Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults Direction 5 4 No Command 0 0 Forward DEI Reverse NO Y Hold Direction 1 1 Local 1 Local Lockout Y 0 Not Local MOP Increment 1 Increment 0 Not Increment A 12 Specifications and Supplemental Information To allow convenient control of the Traverse and Sync functions through SCANport adapters an alternate definition of the SCANport type 2 command can be selected See also Alt Type 2 Cmd Alternate Logic Control Structure Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit Bito l Y l pm Y Y Y Stop Reference Select Decel Time Accel Time 1 Stop l 0 Not Stop Reference _ 14 13 12 Start No Command 0 0 0 1 Start Freq Selecti O 0 1 0 Not Start FreqSelet2 0 1 0 Jog PresetFreq3 0 1 1 0 1 Jog Preset Freq4 1 0 0 Time 1 vU f Not Jo Time 2 1 0 0 Not Jog PresetFreq5 1 0 1 Ime 2 PresetFreq6 1 1 0 Hold Time o d Clear Faults PresetFreq7 1 1 1 Y 1
135. S42 T L3 PE U M1 V M2 W M3 o enenejo o 9 JONOON o 9 o T o E 717 6 28 25 Notes penn e Li wl ef ro 463 6 18 25 1 Enclosure dimensions needed to accommodate the drive are 2286 H x 889 W x 508 D mm 90 x 35 x 20 in nominal 2 A1200 CFM minimum enclosure ventilating fan must be user supplied and installed 3 Refer to pages B 20 and B 21 for drive and inductor mounting information Dimensions B 7 IP 20 NEMA Type 1 amp Open Dimensions Frame G 63 5 2 50 Removable Lifting Angle Y A Open Chassis Dimensions Depth 508 3 20 01 Weight 453 6 kg 1000 Ibs 117 3 4 62 A entai 2324 1 91 50 1524 0 60 00 LM Y A 762 0 19 3 30 00 0 76 Important Two 2 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied Conduit enclosure Access Area All Dimensions in Millimeter
136. Setup 2 34 Armored Cable 2 17 Auto Restart 6 20 B Bypass Contactors 2 9 C Cable Termination 2 37 Cables Power Armored 2 17 Shielded 2 17 Unshielded 2 17 Catalog Number Explanation 1 2 CE Conformity 2 10 C 1 Circuit Breakers Input 2 5 Common Mode Cores 2 37 Contacts Fault 7 1 Control Interface Option Board Removal Installation 2 40 L4 L4E A 14 L5 L5E A 15 L6 L6E A 16 L7E A 14 Control Status Mode 3 6 Custom Volts Hz 6 57 D DC Brake to Stop 6 13 Derate Guidelines A 5 Dimensions F Frame Roll In B 6 Filter CE C 8 Frame F Mounting Hardware B 21 Frame G Mounting Hardware B 22 Heat Sink Through the Back B 12 Inductor DC Bus Frame F B 20 IP 20 NEMA Type 1 Bottom Views B 9 Front Views B 2 IP 65 54 NEMA Type 4 12 Enclosure B 8 Optional Junction Box B 11 TB1 Frame G B 19 TB1 Frames D amp E B 18 Display Mode 3 5 Distances Between Devices 2 41 Distribution Systems Unbalanced 2 3 Ungrounded 2 3 Drive Status Structure A 11 Dwell 6 19 Index E EEProm Mode 3 5 Electrostatic Discharge ESD 1 2 Engineering Unit 6 4 ENUM 6 4 F Fan Voltage Selecting Verifying 2 38 Fault Buffer History 6 32 Faults Adptr Freq Err 7 2 Auxiliary 7 2 Bgnd 10ms Over 7 2 Bipolar Dir Fit 7 2 Blwn Fuse Fit 7 2 C167 Watchdog 7 2 Diag C Lim Fit 7 2 Drive gt HIM 7 2 DSP Checksum 7 2 DSP Comm Fault 7 2 DSP Protected 7 2 DSP Queue Fault 7 2 DSP Reset Fau
137. This time should equal the time set in the Decel Time 1 parameter default is 10 seconds If these times are not correct for your application refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on programming changes Important With Direction Mask set to the default value the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter If the reverse command is to be issued from TB3 Direction Mask must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3 Stopped D Stopthe drive Remove ALL Power Reconnect Motor 13 Reconnect the Motor A Remove and lock out the input and control power to the drive When the HIM Display is no longer illuminated remove the drive cover A B Reconnect motor leads and replace cover ATTENTION To avoid a hazard of electric shock verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged Measure the DC bus voltage at the amp terminals of TB1 The voltage must be zero 5 10 Start Up Advanced Start Up Procedure Press these keys Apply Power to Drive Verify Frequency Command 0 Verify Forward Rotation Slowly Increase Speed 03 Verify Direction of Rotation while following these steps 14 Check for Correct Motor Rotation ATTENTION In the following steps rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be discon nected from t
138. Txt 3 131 Motor Poles 153 PI Fdbk Select 216 Start Boost 48 SL0 6 Encoder Cnts Rated CT Amps 148 Decel Mask 99 Accel Owner 107 Data In C2 116 Process 1 Txt 4 132 Speed KI 165 PI Reference 217 Run Boost 83 Current Step Rated CT kW 149 Fault Mask 100 Decel Owner 108 Data In D1 117 Process 1 Txt 5 133 Speed KP 164 PI Feedback 218 Boost Slope 169 Rated VT Amps 198 MOP Mask 101 Fault Owner 109 Data In D2 118 Process 1 Txt 6 134 Speed Error 166 PI Error 219 Break Voltage 50 Rated VT kW 199 Traverse Mask 305 MOP Owner 110 Data Out A1 119 Process Txt 7 135 Speed Integral 167 PI Output 220 Break Frequency 49 Drive Type 61 Sync Mask 308 Traverse Owner 306 Data Out A2 120 Process Txt 8 136 Speed Adder 168 KI Process 221 Base Voltage 18 Logic Mask 92 Sync Owner 309 Data Out B1 121 Process 2 Par 180 Slip Adder 255 KP Process 222 Base Frequency 17 Local Mask 93 Local Owner 179 Data Out B2 122 Process 2 Scale 181 Motor NP RPM 177 PI Neg Limit 223 Maximum Voltage 20 Alarm Mask 1 206 Data Out C1 123 Process 2 Txt 1 182 Motor NP Hertz 178 PI Pos Limit 224 Run Accel Volts 317 Alarm Mask 2 271 Data Out C2 124 Process 2 Txt 2 183 Encoder Counts 283 PI Preload 225 Sync Loss Sel 310 Data Out D1 125 Process 2 Txt 3 184 Enc Count Scale 282 Sync Loss Gain 311 Data Out D2 126 Process 2 Txt 4 185 Encoder Loss Sel 284 Sync Loss
139. V or 20mA sets the value programmed in Current Limit This parameter cannot be changed while drive is running Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Units 232 Read and Write Current Lmt Display Drive Current Lmt 0 Use Current Limit param 36 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 6 10 Programming Adaptive Lim Parameter Number 227 Parameter Type Read and Write When ENABLED this parameter maintains normal current Factory Default Enabled limit control to provide normal acceleration into mediumto Units Display Drive high system inertia Disabled 0 When DISABLED this parameter applies a feed forward Enabled 1 command to acceleration allowing quicker accel times from stopped to commanded speed with low system inertia Current Limit En Parameter Number 303 Parameter Type Read and Write Enables or disables the software current limiting function Factory Default Enabled does not disable voltage limiting Units Display Drive Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Overload Mode Parameter Number 37 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the derating factor for the I T elec Factory Default No Derate tronic overload function Motors designed to operate with wider Units Display Drive speed ranges need less overload derating Max Derate 2 Min Derate 1 No Derate 0 2 1 Speed Range Derate below 50 of Base Speed 4 1 Speed Range Derate bel
140. W 15 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 15 22 kW 20 30 HP Terminal Designations elelelelelelelelele elejejejejejerjereje x um UM E IUS ONOBHOIOJInOonololnoggyouu L1 2 3 T T2 T3 Q Q Q S i Dynamic Brake A A i y PE PE DC DC R S T U V Ww To Motor 10 Motor ty B B mM a 59 1 Required Branch Required Dynamic Brake A A Circuit Disconnect Input Fusing Required T T T To Motor Input Fusing AC Input Line To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect 200 240V 15 22 kW 20 30 HP Terminal Designations I ERE 380 480V 30 45 kW 40 60 HP Terminal Designations AC Input Line 500 600V 18 5 45 kW 25 60 HP Terminal Designations Q W C CCS e ASSIS GO o e OOOO PE PE DC DC R S U V GRD GRD tt 2 3 9 2 xL Dynamic Brake A A Required Input Fusin P 9 To Motor Required Branch To Motor Circuit Disconnect AC Input Line User supplied Terminal located separately on Series A Drives 2 22 Installation Wiring 200 240V 30 45 kW 40 60 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 45 112 kW 60 150 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 56 93 kW 75 125 HP Terminal Designations D rane DC DC PES PEG TE Brake Brake Y
141. Y vv 6 28 Programming Digital I O CR1 Out Select CR2 Out Select CR3 Out Select CR4 Out Select This parameter sets the condition that changes the state of the output contacts at TB2 terminals 10 amp 11 CR1 11 amp 12 CR2 13 14 15 CR3 and 16 17 18 CR4 A change of state may mean energize or de energize the relay since some relays may energize on power up and de energize when the selected condition occurs A red LED located on the Main Control Board indicates the status of the CR3 contact The LED will illuminate when the contacts at terminals 13 amp 14 of TB2 are closed and terminals 14 amp 15 are open Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default 2 E 7 158 174 176 Read and Write At speed CR1 Running CR2 Fault CR3 Alarm CR4 Display Drive Fault 0 Any fault Alarm 1 Any unmasked alarm Running 2 Outputting frequency At Speed 3 Output command At Freq 4 Requires value in Dig Out Freq At Current 5 Requires value in Dig Out Curr At Torque 6 Requires value in Dig Out Torque Current Lmt 7 Mtr Overload 8 In overload At present levels O L will occur Line Loss 9 Line loss in progress Drive Power 10 Full input volts present bus charged Drive Ready 11 All necessary commands present Forward Run 12 Forward direction Reverse Run 13 Reverse direction Braking 14 DC brake mode stoppi
142. Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Power 3 Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Voltage 4 Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Motor OL 5 Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Drive OL 6 Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Encoder 7 See Encoder Freq Speed Error 8 See Speed Error PI Reference 9 See PI Reference PI Feedback 10 See PI Feedback PI Erro 11 See PI Error Pl Output 12 See PI Output Anlg Out 0 Offset Bae end a d arameter Type ead and Write Anlg Out 1 Offset Factory Default Disabled This parameter enables the voltage or current offsetforthe Units Display Drive analog output This internal value offsets 0 20mA to 4 Disabled 0 20mA and 0 10V to 2 10V Enabled 1 Anlg Out 0 Abs NE E S arameter Type ead and Write Anlg Out 1 Abs Factory Default Enabled This parameter selects whether a signed value or absolute Units Display Drive value is used for analog out Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Anlg Out 0 Lo Parameter Number 234 275 la Out 1L Parameter Type Read and Write Anlg Out 1 Lo Display Units Drive Units 0 1 4096 100 Sets the percentage of voltage or current output that rep TR E ee resents the low end of the Range listed in Anlg Out Sel aem iE 3000 Anlg Out 0 Hi Parameter Number 235 276 arameter Type ead and Write Anla Out 1 H P ter Ti Read and Writ Anlg Out 1 Hi Display Units Drive Units 0 1 4096 100 Sets the percentage of voltage or current output that rep m M E resents
143. access Grouping replaces a sequentially numbered parameter list with functional parameter groups that increases operator efficiency and helps to reduce programming time For most applications this means simplicity at startup with minimum drive tuning Function Index The Function Index shown below provides a directory of the parameters required for each drive function The Page Number locates within a group all parameters associated with that specific function Function Page Number Analog Input Config 6 30 At Temperature 6 28 Auto Restart 6 20 Bus Regulation 6 40 Custom Volts per Hertz 6 57 DC Brake to Stop 6 13 DC Hold Brake 6 13 Dwell 6 19 Economize 6 57 Electronic Shear Pin 6 32 Encoder Feedback 6 50 Fault Buffer History 6 32 Frequency Select 6 16 Inertia Ride Thru 6 25 l O Configuration 6 27 Last Speed 6 16 Line Loss Detect 6 22 Line Loss Recovery 6 22 Load Loss Detect 6 26 Minimum Maximum Frequency 6 9 Overload Protection 6 11 Power Loss Ride Thru 6 23 Preset Frequencies 6 16 Process Control 6 53 Process Display 6 49 Remote I O 6 48 S Curve Acceleration 6 21 Skip Frequencies 6 17 Slip Compensation 6 20 Step Logic 6 61 Stop Modes 6 9 Traverse Function 6 25 Programming Flow Chart The flow chart provided on pages 6 2 and 6 3 highlight the steps required to access each group of parameters and lists all parameters for each group 6 2 Programming OPERATOR LEVEL MODE LEVEL Storred 6 06 Hz Power Up Mode
144. actory Default 0 Counts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Process PI Programming 6 53 This group of parameters configures the Process PI Regulator pi reference PI Reference PI Feedback Select PI Reference Select PI Config sqrt fdbk P Feedback Parameter 65 Freq Command Speed Process KI S PI Config inv error Integral Term 0 Speed Adder o PI Enable Master Frequency Reference Speed Compute Accel Speed Control Command Ramp 482767 m 32767 PI Config zero_clamp speed ramp gt 0 32767 Output Frequency Speed Control Parameter Number 77 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active Factory Default Slip Comp in the drive Units Display Drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is No Control 0 Frequency regulation running Slip Comp 1 Slip compensation Important No Control and Phase Lock are the only cess Doy 2 Negative slip compensation available options for synchronous motors Phase Lock 3 Enable phase lock to pulse input if der feedback closed d lation i Encoder Fdbk 4 Encoder feedback closed loop engo s creat Gene QU speed regulation 1s Tie Droop Reg 5 Enc fdbk closed loop w active quired Encoder Fdbk must be selected droop P Jump 6 Traverse function Process PI
145. actory Default 0 00 Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Hz Maximum Value 25 of Maximum Freq Bus Regulation Parameter Number 288 Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter causes the drive to adjust output Factory Default Disabled frequency based onthe DC bus voltage Ifthe drive senses Units Display Drive rising bus voltage it will increase the output frequency to Disabled 0 reduce the regenerative energy from the motor that is Enabled 1 Bus Limit En mustalso be Enabled causing the bus voltage to rise This will reduce the risk of an overhauling load causing an Overvolt Fault Load Loss Detect Parameter Number 290 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the function that detects an Factory Default Disabled indicated loss of load on the motor A fault F20 oralarm Units Display Drive condition will occur if Torque Current falls below Load Disabled 0 Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss Alarm 1 Requiresavaluein Load Loss Time Lu Fault 2 Requires a value in Load Loss Time Generates an F20 fault 6 26 Programming Feature Select Load Loss Level Parameter Number 291 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the torque current level below which a load loss fault Display Units Drive Units 196 4096 100 warning will occur The value is expressed as a Factory Default 50 percentage of programmed Motor NP Amps Minimum Value 20 0 Firmware 6 001 amp late
146. allation Wiring Control and Signal Wiring General Wiring Information General requirements for analog signal wire include stranded copper 0 750 0 283 mm 18 22 AWG twisted pair 100 shield with drain wire 300V minimum insulation rating and a temperature rating suitable for the application not less than 60 degrees C The recom mended signal analog I O wire is Belden 8760 9460 or equiv 0 750 mm2 18AWG twisted pair shielded Belden8770 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 conductor shielded for remote pot only The recommended wire for encoder or pulse inputs outputs is Lengths less than or equal to 30 meters 98 feet Belden 9730 or equiv 0 196 mm 24 AWG individually shielded Lengths greater than 30 meters 98 feet Belden 9773 or equiv 0 750 mm2 18AWG twisted pair shielded Signal Connections If the drive control connections are to be linked to an electronic circuit or device the common or OV line should if possible be grounded at the device source end only Important Signal Common User speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2 terminal 5 This puts the negative or common side of these signals at earth ground potential Control schemes must be examined for possible conflicts with this type of grounding scheme Shield Termination TE True Earth The TE terminal block not available on A Frame drives provides a terminating point for signal wiring shiel
147. and Write information will be written Refer to the A B Single Point Display Units Drive Units Parameter Parameter Remote I O Adapter manuals or other SCANport device T manual for data link information 1336 PLUS II SCANport Device Data In A1 Data In A2 Data In B1 Data In B2 Data In C1 Data In C2 Data In D1 Data In D2 These parameters determine the parameter number Parameter Number 119 126 whose value will be read into the PLC input data table or Parameter Type Read and Write SCANport device image Refer to the A B Single Point Re Display Units Drive Units Parameter Parameter mote I O Adapter manuals or other SCANport device s manual for data link information 1336 PLUS II SCANport Device Data Out A1 Data Out A2 Data Out B1 Data Out B2 Data Out C1 Data Out C2 Data Out D1 Data Out D2 Alt Type 2 Cmd Parameter Number 315 Parameter Type Read and Write When ENABLED alternate functions are assigned to Factory Default Disabled some bits in the Logic Control Structure See AppendixA Units Display Drive for further information x Disabled Ua Enabled 1 Process Display Programming 6 49 This group of parameters contains the parameters used to scale in User Units any drive parameter for display on the HIM Two scaled parameter values can be simultaneously displayed when Process Mode is selected Process 1 Par This parameter should be set to
148. and operating algorithms resides in a form of programmable read only memory called Flash Memory Flash memory allows the user to easily upgrade the drive firmware locally using a standard computer and a Firmware Down load Module 1336F FDM The latest firmware files are available on the Internet or from your local sales office The necessary file can be downloaded from the Internet with a com puter IBM compatible recommended having the following Disk drive hard or floppy Standard communications program capable of XMODEM protocol e Standard serial COM port and connecting cable nternet access with browser software In addition the following is recommended Windows 959 Operating System A Firmware Download Module must be installed in the Adapter 1 location of the drive to allow access to drive memory Detailed instructions are included with the board 4 2 Flash Memory End of Chapter Start Up Requirements Chapter 5 Start Up This chapter describes how you start up the 1336 PLUS II Drive Included are typical adjustments and checks to assure proper opera tion The information contained in previous chapters of this manual must be read and understood before proceeding Important The 1336 PLUS rris designed so that start up is simple and efficient Two start up methods are provided A self prompting assisted procedure utilizing the 1336 PLUS II Startup mode As an aid this mode asks questions ab
149. ase with the fundamental voltage component Itis the Factory Default None current that is producing motor flux Minimum Value 200 Drive Rating Maximum Value 200 Drive Rating Output Power Parameter Number 3 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the of drive rated output power Display Units Drive Units 1 4096 100 kw Refer to the Ratings Group or drive data nameplate Factory Default None Minimum Value 200 Drive Rated Output Power Maximum Value 200 Drive Rated Output Power Output Curr This parameter displays the of drive rated output current Refer to the Ratings Group or drive data nameplate Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 2 Read Only 1 4096 100 None 0 200 Rated Drive Output Current Elapsed Run Time This parameter displays the elapsed running time of the drive The meter is resettable to any value by reprogramming Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 279 Read and Write 0 1 Hr Hours x 10 0 0 6553 5 6 8 Programming This group of parameters defines basic operation and should be programmed before initial use of the drive For advanced programming and information on specific parameters refer to the flow chart on pages 6 2 amp 6 3 Input Mode Parameter Number 241 Parameter
150. atement relating to the fault will be shown on the display Record this information remove all power and correct the fault source before proceeding Refer to Chapter 7 for fault descriptions Stopped 0 00 Hz Reset Factory Defaults t t ai ESC Important The remaining steps in this procedure are based on factory default parameter settings If the drive has been previously operated parameter settings may have been changed and may not be compatible with this start up procedure or application Drive status and fault conditions may be unpredict able when power is first applied To obtain proper results the parameters must be restored to factory default settings A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until EEPROM is displayed If EEProm is not in the menu programming is password protected Refer to Chapter 3 for Password information C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Reset Defaults is displayed E Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings F Press ESC Reprogram Fault will display indicating successful reset G Press the Stop key to reset the fault Cycle power Choose Mode Display Choose Mode EEProm EEProm Reset Defaults Choose Mode EEProm Reprogram Fault F48 Stopped 0 00 Hz 5 6 Start Up Advanced Start Up Pr
151. ation with stand capability of 200VAC from each channel to True Earth TE ground and between channels The Analog I O Option Boards are summarized below Option LA1 Board Type Dual Analog Output Slot B Description This option replaces both standard analog outputs with two single ended high resolution analog outputs Analog Output 0 is configurable to 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation while Analog Output 1 is for 0 20 mA oper ation only This option maintains access to the stan dard non isolated Analog Input 2 through TB2 6 Configuration remains with jumper J11 LA2 Dual Isolated Input This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with two galvanically isolated analog inputs Both analog input channels are configurable for 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation LA3 Dual Isolated Output Replaces Analog Input 2 and both standard analog outputs with two galvanically isolated high resolution analog outputs Both analog output channels are configurable for 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation LM Isolated Input Isolated Output This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both stan dard analog outputs with a galvanically isolated ana log input and a galvanically isolated high resolution analog output Both analog channels are config urable for 0 10V or 0 20 mA operation LA5 Analog Output Pulse Output Pulse Input This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both stan dard analog outputs with a single ended high
152. ce can have claimed ownership of direction i e TB3 Run Reverse If either condition is true a fault will be issued Start Mask Parameter Number 95 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue start Factory Default 01111111 commands Units Display Drive o 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Jog Mask Parameter Number 96 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue jog Factory Default 01111111 commands Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Reference Mask Parameter Number 97 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select an al Factory Default 01111111 ternate reference Frequency Sel 1 Frequency Sel2 or Units Display Drive preset speeds 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Accel Mask Parameter Number 98 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select Accel Factory Default 01111111 Time 1 and Accel Time 2 Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control 6 44 Programming Decel Mask Parameter Number 99 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select Decel Factory Default 01111111 Time 1 and Decel Time 2 Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Fault Mask Parameter Number 100 Parameter Type Read and Writ
153. d drive output voltage current and command frequency All parameters in this group are Read Only and can only be viewed Output Current This parameter displays the output current present at TB1 terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Parameter Number 54 Parameter Type Read Only Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp 4096 100 Drive Rated Amps Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 200 Rated Drive Output Current Output Voltage This parameter displays the output voltage present at TB1 terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Parameter Number 1 Parameter Type Read Only Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 100 Drive Rated Volts Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20096 Rated Drive Output Voltage Output Power This parameter displays the output power present at TB1 terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Parameter Number 23 Parameter Type Read Only Display Units Drive Units 1 kilowatt 4096 100 Drive Rated kW Factory Default None Minimum Value 200 Rated Drive Output Power Maximum Value 200 Rated Drive Output Power DC Bus Voltage Parameter Number 53 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the DC bus voltage level Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 100 Drive Rated Volts Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 200 DC Bus Voltage Max Output Freq Parameter Number 66 Parameter Type
154. d Start Up Procedure Press these keys while following these steps The HIM Display will show 10 If the Control Interface option is not installed stop the drive and go to step 11 The following steps will check for correct drive when the Enable input is Open Enable Signal removed Restore Enable Signal A With the drive still running open the Enable signal The drive should stop Not Enabled o and indicate Not Enabled on the display Restore the Enable signal 0 00 Hz B Reset the drive by pressing the Stop key 11 Jog Control amp Stop Mode Check Press amp Hold Jog Key A With the drive reset but not running press and hold the Jog key on the At Speed Control Panel The motor should accelerate to the frequency programmed 10 00 Hz pach by the Jog Frequency parameter and remain there until the Jog key is released When released the drive should execute a stop function using Stopped Release Jog Key the programmed stop mode Verify that the correct stop mode was initiated 0 00 Hz 12 Checking Accel and Decel Times Set to Maximum Frequency A Verify that the frequency command is at maximum frequency m B Startthe drive and observe the amount of time the drive takes to accelerate to maximum frequency This should equal 10 seconds which is the factory default value for the Accel Time 1 parameter C Press the Reverse key and observe the amount of time the drive takes to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero
155. d VT Amps Parameter Number 198 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp Amps x 10 drive Display Drive Rated Amps Rated VT kW Parameter Number 199 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated VT kW of the drive Display Units Drive Units kW kW x 100 Display Drive Rated kW 6 42 Programming Drive Type Parameter Number 61 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays a decimal number which can be Display 1336F Display 1336F Display 1336F Display 1336F translated into the drive catalog number by using the ad 8449 AQFO05 8710 BRF30 12841 BP400 19074 C100 jacent chart Refer to Chapter 1 for an explanation of the 8450 AQF07 8711 BRF50 12842 BP450 13075 C125 catalog numbers 8451 AQF10 8 12 BRF75 12828 BX250 13076 C150 8452 AQF15 8713 BRF100 12829 B300 13077 C200 8453 AQF20 8714 BRF150 12822 B350 13083 C250 8454 AQF30 8715 BRF200 12830 B400 13091 CX300 8455 AQF50 12810 B015 12832 B450 13085 C300 8456 AQF75 12811 B020 12834 B500 13078 C350 12552 A007 12812 B025 12823 B600 13095 CP350 12553 A010 12813 B030 12843 B700 13086 C400 12554 A015 12824 BX040 12836 B800 13096 CP400 12555 A020 12814 B040 8963 CWF10 13088 C450 12556 A025 12815 B050 8965 CWF20 13097 CP450 12557 A030 12816 BX060 8966 CWF30 13090 C500 12558 A040 12825 B060 8967 CWF50 13098 CP500 12559 A050 12817 B075 8968 CWF75 130
156. d and bus voltage has decayed completely When changing this parameter itis important to note that the functions of the Start and Stop inputs will change when power is reapplied to the drive 2 28 Installation Wiring The programming options of the Control Interface Option allow the user to select an input combination to meet the needs of a specific installation The firmware will verify programming to assure an appropriate combination has been selected Speed Select Frequency Reference The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources The source is determined by drive programming and the con dition of the Speed Select Inputs on TB3 or reference select bits of command word if PLC controlled see Appendix A The default source for a command reference all speed select inputs open is the selection programmed in Freq Select 1 If any of the speed select inputs are closed the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source See Table 2 H and the examples that follow Table 2 H Speed Select Input State vs Frequency Source Speed Select 3 Speed Select 2 Speed Select 1 Frequency Source Open Open Open Freq Select 1 Open Open Closed Freq Select 2 Accessed through Freq Select 2 parameter Preset Freq 1 Open Closed Open Preset Freq 2 Open Closed Closed Preset Freq 3 Closed Open Open Preset Freq 4 Closed Open Closed Preset Freq 5 Closed Closed Open Pres
157. d in Slot A the 5V pot reference will not be available at terminal 1 If a 5V source is required it must be user supplied Input to Terminal 6 is only valid for standard I O or with an LA1 option installed If an LA1 option is installed Standard Analog Input 2 is maintained at this terminal configure with J11 A pot cannot be connected to an isolated input Standard Analog I O Setup Connector J9 TB2 4 TB2 3 TB2 2 Analog Option Board Slot A J9 J10 J8 J11 J13 Frames A1 A4 1 Refer to page 1 1 for frame reference classifications TB2 1 IC Text Does Not Appear on Board for explanation purposes only Remaining Pins Not Shown j Common D Input 1 D Input 0 O Pot Ref 5V The 1336 PLUS It has a series of jumpers to connect the standard I O to TB2 when no analog options LAT LA2 etc are present Connec tors J9 and J10 see below each have four jumpers connecting pins 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 These jumpers must be in place for the inputs and outputs to be active at TB2 TB2 9 D Common TB2 8 Output TB2 7 O Output 0 TB2 6 O Input2 Text Does Not Appear on Board for explanation purposes only Remaining Pins Not Shown In addition each input can be configured for 0 10V 0 20 mA or potentiometer Placing a jumper across the top of the con nector J8 J11 J13 configure
158. d ou Hid GM au Read Only Y Process Display Read Write Y Parameter Groups See Chapter 6 Parameters See Chapter 6 1 Not available on Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Read Only Choose Mode EX Choose Mode is Choose Mode eel Choose Mode eal Choose Mode ES Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Display Process Program Start Up 1 EEPROM Search Control Status Password Save Values 3 Control Logic Login Logout Recall Values 3 Fault Queue Modify Reset Defaults HIM gt Drive 2 Drive gt HIM GROUP LEVEL PARAMETER LEVEL 2 Not available on all HIMs Refer to Table 3 A 3 Reserved for future use Human Interface Module 3 7 Program and Display Modes while following these steps Press these keys 1 The Display and Program modes allow access to the parameters for viewing or The HIM Display will show programming mem A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be Choose Mode shown Display B Press the Increment or Decrement key to show Program or Display Choose Mode Fa ha Program C Press Enter Choose Group Metering A or pa D Pressthe Increment or Decrement key until the desired group is displayed E Press Enter m F Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll to the desired parameter Output Current BM ae Bit ENUMs 16 character text strings will be displayed except Series A HIMs be
159. d out of line loss If Ride Thru Volts is set above the line loss level as soon as a line loss is detected the drive will immediately decelerate as quickly as the decel setting allows until the bus voltage increases to the ride thru level If Ride Thru Volts is set below Min Bus Voltage the bus voltage will be allowed to drop below the minimum required and the drive output will be turned off 3 The input power is restored T3 and the bus voltage rises above DC Bus Memory Loss Recover T4 before the timer expires The drive will then accelerate back to the commanded speed using the programmed acceleration rate Operation when Line Loss Mode is set to Input gt Off or Input gt Decel When operating in either of these modes the line loss condition is detected by an external source The drive is then signaled through the Pulse input that a loss of power has occurred Drive operation is the same as when Line Loss Mode is set to LoBus gt Off or LoBus gt Decel except for the following If an inertia ride thru is initiated the drive attempts to regulate the bus at the value in DC Bus Memory rather than the value in Ride Thru Volts 6 24 Programming Feature Select Line Loss Volts Parameter Number 320 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage below which the drive recognizes a Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts line loss Specifically If DC Bus Volta
160. d start up Steps are outlined below ATTENTION To guard against possible machine damage and or personal injury caused by unintended motor rotation Do Not press the Start key HIM or issue a Start command TB3 during the Start Up procedure until instructed to do so Pressing the Start key or issuing a Start command will cause the drive to start Keys Description The HIM Display will show Disconnect Load from 1 For proper operation of the Autotune function assure that the load is discon Motor nected from the motor Apply Power 2 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive The LCD Display should Stopped light and display a drive status of Stopped and an output frequency of 0 00 0 00 Hz Hz If the drive detects a fault a brief statement relating to the fault will be shown on the display Record this information remove all power and correct the fault source before proceeding Refer to Chapter 7 for fault descriptions Start Up 5 3 Assisted Start Up Keys Reset Factory Defaults E a Description 3 Important The remaining steps in this procedure are based on factory default parameter settings If the drive has been previously operated parameter settings may have been changed and may not be compatible with this start up procedure or application Drive status and fault conditions may be unpredict able when power is first applied To obtain proper results the parameters must b
161. d unless Units Display Drive Stop Select 1 is selected Coast 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately DC Brake 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor Requires a value in both DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level Ramp 2 Drivedeceleratesto 0 Hz then if DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level are greater than zero the holding brake is applied If the values equal zero then the drive turns off Requires a value in Decel Time 1 2 S Curve 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in Decel Time 1 2 x 2 Ramp to Hold 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per DC Hold Level limited to 70 of drive rated amps until a a Start command is issued or b the Enable input is opened KP Amps Parameter Number 193 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the proportional gain for the current limiting function Display Units Drive Units NA NA of the drive Default values are chosen for high inertia Factory Default 100 loads If faster accel is required raising the gain will allow Minimum Value 25 additional current to the motor Excess gain settings may Maximum Value 400 create unstable operation Speed Brake En Parameter Number 319 Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this feature allows faster deceleration by raising Factory Default Disabled the flux in the motor and increasing the losses Speed Units Display Drive change braking is used in sensorless v
162. delines stated below must be adhered to Important The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does not guarantee that the entire installation will conform Many other factors can influence the total installation and only direct measurements can verify total conformity C 2 CE Conformity Requirements for Conforming Installation Filter The following six items are required for CE conformance 1 Standard 1336 PLUS 1 Drive 0 37 A448 kW 0 5 600HP CE com patible Series D or higher Factory installed EMC enclosure AE option or field installed EMC Enclosure Kit 1336x AEx see page C 3 Filter as called out below Grounding as shown on page C4 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive amp drive to motor wiring must be braided shielded cable with a cov erage of 7596 or better metal conduit or other with equivalent or better attenuation mounted with appropriate connectors For shielded cable it is recommended to use a compact strain relief connector with double saddle clamp for filter and drive input and compact strain relief connector with EMI protection for motor output 6 Control I O and signal wiring must be in conduit or have shield ing with equivalent attenuation Filter Selection Filter Catalog Number 1336 RFB 7 AA 1336 RFB 7 A 1336 RFB 16 AA 1336 RFB 16 A 1336 RFB 30 A 1336 RFB 30 A4 1336 RFB 27 B 1336 RFB 48 B 1336 RFB 80 C 1336 RFB 150 D 1336
163. ds A Frame drives can use TB2 terminal 5 for signal wiring shield termination Refer to Figure 2 1 for location The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2 1 and 0 30 mm 14 and 22 AWG Maximum torque is 1 36 N m 12 Ib in Use Copper wire Only and always separate control and power cabling Cable Routing If unshielded cable is used signal circuits should not run parallel to motor cables or unfiltered supply cables with a spacing less than 0 3 meters 1 foot Cable tray metal dividers or separate conduit should be used Important When user installed control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V is used this wiring must be routed inside the drive enclosure and separated from any other wiring and or uninsulated live parts Digital Inputs Installation Wiring 2 25 Terminal Block TB2 TB2 is located at the bottom of the Main Control Board A Frame drives have 18 positions Remaining frame sizes have 22 positions The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB2 is 2 1 and 0 30 mm2 14 and 22 AWG Maximum torque for all terminals is 1 36 N m 12 Ib in Use Copper wire only See Figure 2 1 Terminal Block TB3 The Control Interface Option provides a means of interfacing various signals and commands to the 1336 PLUS II by using contact closures Several different versions of the option are available e L4 Contact Closure Interface L4E Contact Closure Interface with Encoder
164. e 145 Read Only 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq None 0 00 Hz 400 00 Hz 146 Read Only Parameter Number Parameter Type Fault Status 1 This parameter stores and displays the last Drive Status 1 prior to a fault Bit15 Bit 14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bito Bits Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit BitO Bits 0 7 are displayed on lower half of Ds d line 2 on HIM display while bits 8 15 are Reference Local displayed on the upper half of line 2 E AapteHD puits y Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 Command Direction A Status description bit ENUM is dis FreqSelec 1 O 0 0 0 TB3 0 0 0 1 E Revere played on line 1 except Series A HIMs PresetFreq1 O 0 0 1 1 i ies below version 3 0 PrsetFreq2 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 Actual Direction Preset Freq3 0 0 1 1 3 Q 3 4 0 Reverse PreetFreqg4 O 1 0 0 4 SONNO Y 1 Forward PresetFreq5 O 1 0 1 5 i 4 Y Accelerating PrsetFreq6 0 1 1 0 6 TO Y Decelerating PresetFreq7 O 1 1 1 Unused 1 1 1 Y Nati FreqSelet2 1 0 0 0 Y Faulted Adapter 1 ib 4 Adapter 2 y 0 v A Spesi Adapter 3 0 Y 1 Adapter 4 UT Oo Adapter 5 vod 0 4 Adapter 6 od o3 JogFrequency 1 1 1 1 Fault Status 2 Parameter Number 286 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last Drive Status 2 prior to a fault Bit 15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit 12 Bit11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit Bito Bits 0 7 are displayed on lower half of
165. e This parameter controls which adapters can reset a fault Factory Default 01111111 Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control MOP Mask Parameter Number 101 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue MOP Factory Default 01111111 commands to the drive Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Traverse Mask Parameter Number 305 Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which SCANport adapters are permitted to Factory Default 01111111 enable the traverse function Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Sync Mask Parameter Number 308 Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which SCANport adapters are permitted to Factory Default 01111111 enable the sync function Units Display Drive 0 0 Deny Control 1 1 Permit Control Logic Mask Parameter Number 92 Parameter Type Read and Write Determines which adapters can control the drive If the bit Factory Default 01111111 for an adapter is set to 0 the adapter will have no control Units Display Drive functions except for stop In addition the adapter can be p 0 D eny Control removed from the drive while power is applied without 4 4 Permit Control causing a serial fault Local Mask Parameter Number 93 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters are allowedtotake Factory Default 01111111 exclusive control
166. e 1 Decel Time 1 Control Select Stop Select 1 Bus Limit En DC Hold Time DC Hold Level Run On Power Up Reset Run Time Minimum Freq Base Frequency Base Voltage Maximum Freq Maximum Voltage MOP Increment Jog Frequency Anlg Out 0 Sel Preset Freq 1 Preset Freq 2 Preset Freq 3 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 Skip Freq 1 Skip Freq 2 Skip Freq 3 Skip Freq Band Current Limit Overload Mode Overload Amps Fit Clear Mode Line Loss Fault Motor Type Slip F L A Dwell Frequency Dwell Time PWM Frequency Encoder PPR Language Start Boost Break Frequency Break Voltage Stop Select 2 S Curve Time S Curve Enable Common Bus Preset Freq 4 Preset Freq 5 Preset Freq 6 Preset Freq 7 Speed Control Traverse Inc Max Traverse P Jump Setting No Specifications and Supplemental Information can be uploaded to the HIM for downloading to other drives Name 81 82 83 85 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 mI mi mk amk mb mi mb mk eni OMAN DA C05 n5 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 150 151 152 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 164 165 Blwn Fuse Fit Cur Lim Trip En Run Boost Reset Run Tries Analog Trim En Low Bus Fault Logic Mask Local Mask Direction Mask Start Mask Jog Mask Reference Mask Accel Mask Decel Mask Fault Mask MOP Mask Data In A1 Data In A2 Data In B1 Data In B2 Data In C1 Data In C2 Data In D1 Data In D2
167. e 1 is selected Decel Time 2 Parameter Number 31 T Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 from Maximum Freq to 0 Hz The rate determined by this Factory Default 10 0 Sec value and Maximum Freq is linear unless S Curve En Minimum Value 0 0 Sec able is Enabled It applies to any decrease in command Maximum Value 3600 0 Sec frequency unless Decel Time 1 is selected Synchronized Speed Change Function This function is typically used in an application where multiple drives drive different functions on one machine and the line speed must be changed To initiate the speed sync function The drive must be running Sync Time must be set to a non zero value Speed Freq Source must be set to Adapter 1 6 or Preset 1 7 A SYNC input must be energized The SYNC input can come from any of the programmable input terminals Example TB3 Term 22 Sel Sync Important Do not select more than one input terminal as the SYNC input The sync input can also come through SCANport from one of the communication options either as a Type 1 or Type 2 message For further information refer to the instructions supplied with the option Also see the section titled Communications Data Information Format in Appendix A The usual sequence of events Energize the SYNC input
168. e Protection Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this ATTENTION This parameter may only be used as outlined in NFPA79 Under parameter is used in an inappropriate application Reset Run Tries Parameter Number 85 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the maximum number of times the drive Display Units Drive Units 1 Try Tries attempts to reset a fault and restart before the driveissues Factory Default 0 a Max Retries Fault See Chapter 7 for a list of resettable Minimum Value 0 faults Maximum Value 9 Reset Run Time Parameter Number 15 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the time between restart attempts when Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 100 Reset Run Tries is set to a value other than zero Factory Default 1 0 Sec Minimum Value 0 5 Sec Maximum Value 30 0 Sec S Curve Enable Parameter Number 57 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the fixed shape S curve accel Factory Default Disabled decel ramp Programmed accel decel times are doubledif Units Display Drive S Curve Time is set to 0 An adjustable S curve will be Disabled 0 created if S Curve Time is greater than zero Enabled 1 S Curve Time Parameter Number 56 Parameter Type Read and Write This creates an adjustable s curve ramp If S Curve Time Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 is lt the programmed accel decel time the act
169. e as shown in Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 shows the maximum distance allowed between devices Figure 2 8 Adapter Locations 1203 SG2 __ TU IPSO M rum Internal Communication Adapter 6 Control Interface Option Expansion Options TB3 Adapter 0 Main Control Board Drive Mounted Snap In HIM Internal Communications Module or Flash Interface Board Adapter 1 Control Board Internal Communications Module or Flash Interface Board Adapter 1 Frames A1 A4 Frames B G Refer to page 1 1 for frame reference classifications Communications Port for remote HIM communication options Adapter 2 or Expansion Options Adapters 2 3 4 5 is located on the bottom of the enclosure bottom of Main Control Board Mounting Plate for frames F G Figure 2 9 Remote Device Distances a a e ALLEN BRADLEY oe L eene HIM or Other Opes Remote Device C 3 Co poong 3 e E 8 Cable Length in Cable Length in ee Meters 10 X Meters 10 X Port Expansion Option Length X Meters Adapter 2 Q 1203 SG2 or Total cable distance between each device and drive must j be 10 meters 33 feet or less Maximum Cable mmeme HIM or Other Length 10 Meters
170. e name up to 14 characters will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM This name can be changed or a new name entered Use the SEL key to move the cursor left The Increment Decrement keys will change the character C Press Enter An informational display will be shown indicating the drive type and firmware version D Press Enter to start the upload The parameter number currently being uploaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 will indicate total progress Press ESC to stop the upload E COMPLETE displayed on line 2 will indicate successful upload Press Enter If ERROR is displayed see Chapter 7 The HIM Display will show EEProm Drive HIM Drive HIM 1A Master Type Version 2 01 Drive HIM 60 HH Drive HIM 210 COMPLETE HIM gt Drive 3 To download a parameter profile from the HIM to a drive you must have a compatible HIM see Table 3 A Important The download function will only be available when there is a valid profile stored in the HIM A From the EEProm menu see steps 1A 1C press the Increment Decrement keys until HIM gt Drive is displayed B Pressthe Enter key A profile name will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM Pressing the Increment Decrement keys will scroll the dis play to a second profile if available C Oncethe desired profile name is displayed press the Enter key An informational display will be shown indicating the versi
171. e restored to factory default settings A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until EEPROM is displayed If EEProm is not in the menu programming is password protected Refer to Chapter 3 for Password information C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Reset Defaults is displayed E Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings F Press ESC Reprogram Fault will display indicating successful reset G Press the Stop key to reset the fault Cycle power The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Display Choose Mode EEProm EEProm Reset Defaults Choose Mode EEProm Reprogram Fault FA8 Stopped 0 00 Hz ESC SEL a 4 From the Status Display press the Enter key or any key Choose Mode will be displayed A Press the Increment or Decrement key until Startup is displayed B Press Enter Important All questions can be answered Yes or No Pressing Enter will select the default Y or N Pressing the Increment or Decrement key will change the selection press Enter to select Choosing Y allows you to pro ceed through the step No will advance you to the next step In addition the following should be noted e The Startup mode can be exited at any time by pressing ESCape until the Status Display is shown If
172. econd function if present is configured with S51 Using the table below set the switch es for correct operation Important Due to different switch manufacturers the individual switches will be designated A or 1 and B or 2 In addition switch positions will be indicated as Off or 0 and On or 1 S1 and S51 Configuration Settings Switches S1 and S51 a otto On 1 By DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S51 Switch Setting Switch Setting Option Function Mode A 1 B2 Function Mode A 1 B2 LA1 Output O 10V Off 0 Off 0 Copfigure Standard Analog Input 2 with J11 20mA On On Seepage 2 33 for further information LA2 InputO 10V Off O On 1 Input 110V OfO On 20mA On Off o 20mA On Off o LA3 OutputO 10V Off O Off O Outputi 10V OFf 0 Off o 20mA On On 20mA On On LA4 Input2 10V Off O On 1i Output 110V Offo Off o 20mA On 1 jOff o 20mA OOn On LAS OutputO 10V Off O Off O 20mA On 4 On LA6 InputO 10V Off O On 4 20mA On 1 jOtf o LA7 InputO 10V Off O0 On inputi 10V Off O On i 20mA On t Off o 20mA On Off o Installation Wiring 2 35 All isolated I O is designed with full galvanic greater than 10 meg ohms less than 50 pf isolation This results in an insul
173. ector mode only Disabled 0 and is effective for motors up to 20 HP Enabled 1 DC injection braking during decel Com mon Bus Parameter Number 58 Parameter Type Read and Write When enabled internal precharge is disabled allowing Factory Default Disabled common bus operation CB Precharge mustbe selected Units Display Drive in TB3 Term xx Sel ma Disabled oo Enabled 1 6 16 Programming Freq uency This group of parameters contains internally stored frequency settings Set Freq Select 1 Parameter Number 5 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which of the frequency sources Factory Default Adapter 1 is currently supplying the Freq Command to the drive Units Display Drive unless Freq Select 2 or Preset Freq 1 7 is selected Use Last 0 Refer to the Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value MOP 5 Firmware 5 001 amp later Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value Step Logic 20 Freq Select 2 This parameter controls which of the frequency sources is currently supplying the Freq Command to the drive unless Freq Select 1 or Preset Freq 1 7 is selected Refer to the Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2 Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Units Firmware 5 001 amp later 6 Read and Write
174. ed Amps 6 58 Programming Motor Control IR Drop Volts Parameter Number 194 Parameter Type Read and Write Used in Economize amp Sens Vector modes Sets the Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rated Volts value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor Factory Default Based on Drive Size amp Type stator If set to zero the drive will use an internal value Minimum Value 0 0 Volts based on motor F L A and rated voltage Some motors Maximum Value 25 of Drive Rated Volts i e 6 pole special etc may be particularly sensitive to the adjustment of this parameter Refer to the tuning pro cedure in Chapter 5 for further information Flux Up Time Parameter Number 200 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the amount of time the drive will use to try andachieve Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Sec Sec x 10 full motor stator flux When a Start commandis issued DC Factory Default 0 0 Sec current at current limit level is used to build stator flux be Minimum Value 0 0 Sec fore accelerating Maximum Value 5 0 Sec Start Boost Parameter Number 48 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the DC start boost level for accelera Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts tion when Control Select is set to Fixed Boost or Full Factory Default 0 Volts Custom Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 9 5 of Drive Rated Voltage Run Boost This pa
175. elded alu Anixter 7V 7xxxx 3G or minum armor equivalent Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall Three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller Conduit If metal conduit is preferred for cable distribution the following guidelines must be followed Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections are made at a common ground point in the cabinet Normal installa tion of conduit provides grounded connections to both the motor frame ground junction box and drive cabinet ground These ground connections help minimize interference This is a noise reduction recommendation only and does not affect the require ments for safety grounding refer to pages 2 11 and 2 12 2 18 Installation Wiring 91 4 300 91 4 300 LJ All examples represent motor cable length of 189 2 meters 600 feet e No more than three sets of motor leads can be routed through a sin gle conduit This will minimize cross talk that could reduce the effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described If more than three drive motor connections per conduit are required shielded cable as described above must be used If practical each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by A induced voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive shar ing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using
176. empted Check verify wiring and contact oper 22 with an Open Stop contact or ation Closed Start contact DSP Timeout Fault Refer to the Description and Action statements for C167 Watchdog 28 F17 above EE Init Read 1 Gate Drive Bd replacement 1 Resetto factory defaults amp cycle in 53 requires re initialization put power 2 Trouble reading EEPROM dur ing initialization 2 Check all connections to Power Driver Board Replace board or complete drive as needed Troubleshooting 7 3 Name amp Fault Description Action EE Init Value Stored parameter value out of 1 Resetto factory defaults amp cycle in 54 range on initialization put power 2 Check all connections to the Pow er Driver Bd Replace the board or complete drive as needed EEprom Checksum The checksum read from the 1 Resetto factory defaults amp cycle in 66 EEPROM does not match the put power checksum calculated from the Check all wire and cable connec EEPROM data tions to the Power Driver Board Replace Power Driver Board or complete drive as required m EEprom Fault EEPROM is being programmed Check all wire and cable connections 32 and will not write a new value to the Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board or complete drive as required Encoder Loss The drive has detected an error in Check encoder and wiring 60 the encoder signals at TB3 termi nals 31 36 The error could be due to a 1 L
177. ently reset Units Display Drive ting a fault 0 0 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner MOP Owner Parameter Number 110 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are currently is Units Display Drive id increases or decreases in MOP Command 9 0 Non Owner quency 1 1 Current Owner Traverse Owner Parameter Number 306 Parameter Type Read Only Displays which SCANport adapter is presently enabling Units Display Drive the traverse function 0 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner Sync Owner Parameter Number 309 Parameter Type Read Only Displays which SCANport adapter is presently enabling Units Display Drive the sync function 0 O Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner Local Owner Parameter Number 179 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has requested ex Units Display Drive clusive control of all drive logic functions If an adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running 0 0 Non Owner 1 1 Current Owner 6 48 Programming Adapter I O This group of parameters contains the parameters needed for an optional communications adapter to communicate with the drive These parameters determine the parameter number to Parameter Number 111 118 which PLC output data table or SCANport device image Parameter Type Read
178. equency at which the forward speed Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz search begins If this value exceeds Maximum Freq Factory Default 60 Hz speed search will begin at Maximum Freq Forward Minimum Value 0 Hz search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found Maximum Value 400 Hz FStart Reverse Parameter Number 157 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the frequency at which the reverse speed Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz search begins If this value exceeds Maximum Freq Factory Default 0 Hz speed search will begin at Maximum Freq Reverse Minimum Value 0 Hz search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found Maximum Value 400 Hz LLoss Restart Parameter Number 228 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the reconnect mode after recovery Factory Default Track Volts from a line loss condition Units Display Drive Speed Search 1 Frequency sweep Use Encoder 2 Read feedback Track Volts 3 Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 10s 4 Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 20s 5 Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 40s 6 Drive Units 4 Firmware 4 001 amp before Last Speed 7 Read motor volts Frequency sweep takes 10 seconds Frequency sweep takes 20 seconds Frequency sweep takes 40 second Start at last output Line Loss Mode This parameter sets the drive reaction to a loss of input voltage and is often referred to as Iner
179. er Number 284 Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the drive action when a missing or incorrect en Factory Default Disabled coder signal is detected Units Display Drive Important Encoder loss detection requires the use of a Disable 0 After 200ms of encoder loss a 1336 L7E L8E or L9E Interface Option Board and warning will be issued quadrature dual channel encoder wired differentially Enable 1 After 200ms of encoder loss an see page 2 30 In addition selection of Encoder in alarm and an F60 fault will be Freq Select 1 2 Pl Reference PI Feedback or En issued coder Fdbk in Speed Control must be made If a 1336 L4E L5E or L6E board is used a pulse single channel encoder is used or a dual channel encoder is wired single ended this feature will not operate Encoder Freq Parameter Number 63 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq at encoder input terminals of TB3 This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command Minimum Value 400 00 Hz i Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Frequency _ Incoming Encoder Pulse Rate Displayed Encoder PPR Max Enc Counts Parameter Number 328 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the trip point for the Enc Cnt Max alarm The alarm Display Units Drive Units 1 Count Counts is high 1 when Encoder Counts has exceeded Max Enc F
180. er displays the power mode Factory Default None Units Display Drive 1 1 Power up sequence in progress 2 2 Precharge in progress 3 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory 4 4 Ready for run command after powerup 5 5 Power stage diagnostics running 6 6 Line loss detection occurred 7 7 Ready for run command after stop 8 8 Drive running 9 9 Motor flux decay delay 10 10 DC braking in progress 11 11 Drive fault occurred 12 12 Flying start search enabled 13 13 Deceleration in progress 14 14 SCR wake mode 15 15 SCR check mode 16 16 SCR wait mode Output Pulses Parameter Number 67 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the number of output cycles for Display Units Drive Units 1 Pulse Pulses the PWM waveform The count rolls over at 65535 Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Current Angle Parameter Number 72 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the angle in degrees of displace Display Units Drive Units 1 Deg 255 360 Deg ment between output voltage and output current The Factory Default None cosine of this number is an approximation of output power factor Heatsink Temp Parameter Number 70 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the heatsink temperature of the Display Units Drive Units 1 C Deg C drive Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 C Set Defaults Parameter Number 64 Parame
181. erate 141 492 633 h A C030 35 No Derate 141 526 667 ambient exceeds 40 C the drive must be C040 45 No Derate 175 678 853 derated Refer to Figure A AC C050 57 No Derate 193 899 1092 rae an is C060 62 No Derate 193 981 1174 Drive Rating is based on altitudes of 1 000 m C075 85 Figure G 361 1533 1894 8 000 ft or less If installed at higher altitude s um Rum e ES Bd 2m H igure drive must be derated Refer to Figure AD C150 168 Figure V 606 2315 2921 5 Important Two 2 725 CFM fans are required if C200 252 Figure W 755 3065 3820 2 C250 284 Figure X 890 3625 4515 an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied CX300 300 Figure Y 940 3090 4930 enclosure C300 d 300 Figure AB amp AC 926 5015 5941 C350 850 Figure AB amp AC 1000 5935 6935 Important 1336F BPRxxx two 2 450 CFM cPICPR350 350 Figure Z 580 6125 6705 fans are required if an open type drive is mounted Cai p Figure amp AC 1 Ww 2n E i H igure in a user supplied enclosure C4505 450 Figure AB amp AC 1465 8020 9485 5005 500 Figure AB amp AC 1500 8925 10425 C6005 600 Figure AB amp AC 1610 10767 12377 Specifications and Supplemental Information A 5 Derating Guidelines Drive ratings can be affected by a number of factors If more than one factor exists derating percentages must be multiplied For example if a 42 Amp drive B025 running at 8 kHz is installed at a 2 000 m 6 600 ft altitude and has a 2 high input line voltage the actual amp rati
182. erface Module HIM speed command or remote 4 20mA from a PLC The drive is programmed as follows Freq Select 1 2 Adapter 1 Freq Select 2 Analog Input 0 With Speed Select inputs 2 amp 3 open and the selector switch set to Remote Speed Select 1 closed the drive will follow Freq Select 2 Analog Input 0 With the switch set to Local Speed Select 1 open all speed select inputs are open and the drive will follow the local HIM Adapter 1 as selected with Freq Select 1 eal Speed Select 3 Open Barna eal Speed Select 2 Open m eal Speed Select 1 Oo Local 27 Example 2 Application is to follow a local HIM unless a preset speed is selected The drive is programmed as follows Freq Select 1 2 Adapter 1 Freq Select 2 Preset Freq 1 10 Hz e Preset Freq 2 20 Hz Preset Freq 3 30 Hz Preset Freq 1 Contact operation for the speed select switch is described in the table below If the user does not select an input as Speed Select 3 Preset Freq 4 7 would not be available Local 1 2 5 26 eal TE n Iu Speed Select 1 Switch Speed Select Input Parameter Used for Programmed Position 1 28 2 27 Speed Ref Setting Local Open Open Freq Select 1 Adapter 1 1 Closed Open Freq Select 2 Preset Freq 1 2 Open Closed Preset Freq 2 20 Hz 3 Closed Closed Preset Freq 3 30 Hz 2 30 Installation Wiring Encoder Inputs
183. ero to release Unused Enc Cnt Max Load Loss the stored indications Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Input Status Parameter Number 55 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the on off status of inputs 1 8 at TB3 if an optional interface card is installed Bit7 Bit BitS Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit Bito A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 ex E Input 1 TB3 19 cept Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Input 2 TB3 20 Input 4 TB3 23 Input 3 TB3 22 Input 5 TB3 24 Input 6 TB3 26 Input 8 TB3 28 Input 7 TB3 27 V VV 6 38 Programming Freq Source This parameter displays the frequency source currently commanding the drive Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Units Firmware 5 001 amp later 62 Read Only Use Last Display Drive Use Last 0 Analog In 0 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 Pulse Ref 4 Refer to Pulse In Scale Value MOP 5 Adapter 1 6 6 11 Preset 1 7 12 18 Encoder 19 Refer to Encoder PPR Value Step Logic 20 Jog Sel 20 21 in Firmware 5 001 amp later AutoTune Ref 21 22 in Firmware 5 001 amp later Freq Command Parameter Number 65 f m Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq For
184. es the drive to turn off immediately DC Brake 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor Requires a value in both DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level Ramp 2 Drivedeceleratesto 0 Hz then if DC Hold Time amp DC Hold Level are greater than zero the holding brake is applied If the values equal zero then the drive turns off Requires a value in Decel Time 1 or Decel Time 2 S Curve 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in Decel Time 1 or Decel Time 2 x 2 Ramp to Hold 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per DC Hold Level limited to 7096 of drive rated amps until a a Start command is issued or b the Enable input is opened DC Hold Time Parameter Number 12 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the amount of time that the Display Units Drive Units 1 Second Seconds x 10 DC Hold Level voltage will be applied to the motor when Factory Default 0 0 Sec the stop mode is set to either DC Brake or Ramp DC Minimum Value 0 0 Sec Hold Time is ignored when the stop mode Stop Select Maximum Value 90 0 Sec 1 Stop Select 2 is set to Ramp to Hold DC Hold Level Parameter Number 13 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the DC voltage applied to the motor to Display Units Drive Units 1 of Rated Amps 4096 100 produce the selected current during braking whenthestop Factory Default 0 mode is set to either
185. et Freq 6 Closed Closed Closed Preset Freq 7 Important The final speed command may be affected by the type of modulation selected with Speed Control parameter 77 See Speed Control in Chapter 6 for further information Important If a bi polar input option LA6 or LA7 is installed the signal is designated Analog Input 0 Note the following 3 Wire Control If Input Mode is set to 3 Wire and the bi polar input is selected as the active frequency ref erence Freq Select 1 or 2 it is assumed that direction control is desired via analog polarity If another source has control of direction a Bipolar Direction fault F16 will occur If direction control via polarity is not required bit 7 of Direction Mask should be set to 0 This causes the input to be treated as a 0 10V frequency reference only Negative analog signals are treated as zero and di rection control must come from another source 2 Wire Control If Input Mode is set to 2 Wire it is assumed that direction control is provided via the 2 wire inputs Run Forward and Run Reverse Bit7 of Direction Mask must be set to 0 This causes the input to be treat ed as a 0 10V frequency reference only Negative analog signals are treated as zero Failure to set the Mask will generate a Bipolar Direction F16 fault Installation Wiring 2 29 Example 1 3 Wire Control Application calls for a local Human Int
186. eter Number 43 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the frequency that the drive will immedi Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 ately output no Accel Ramp upon a start command This Factory Default 0 0 Hz parameter requires a programmed Dwell Time Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 7 0 Hz Dwell Time Parameter Number 44 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the time the drive will continue to output Display Units Units 1 Second Seconds Dwell Frequency before ramping to Freq Command Factory Default 0 Sec Minimum Value 0 Sec Maximum Value 10 Sec Dwell Time Maximum Frequency of Applied Voltage Dwell Time 4 Dwell Frequency P 0T 0 Star Time Command Speed Control Parameter Number 77 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the type of speed modulationactive Factory Default Slip Comp in the drive Units Display Drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is No Control 0 Frequency regulation running Slip Comp 1 Slip compensation Important No Control and Phase Lock are the only available options for synchronous motors If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is re quired Encoder Fdbk must be selected Speed Droop 2 Phase Lock 3 Encoder Fdbk 4 Droop Reg 5 Negative slip compensation Enable phase lock to pulse input Encoder feedback closed loop Enc fdbk closed loop w active droop Tra
187. etering Encoder Feedback Feature Select Freq Set Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Faults Diagnostics Diagnostics Masks Diagnostics Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Analog I O Metering Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Faults Faults Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Digital O Setup Feature Select Masks Owners Advanced Setup Masks Owners Motor Control Motor Control Motor Control Motor Control Advanced Setup Adapter I O Diagnostics Motor Control Advanced Setup Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Motor Control Feature Select Feature Select Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Encoder Feedback Linear List Faults Faults Faults Motor Control Motor Control Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Step Logic Faults Parameter Cross Reference By Name Name Output Curr Output Power 4 20mA Loss Sel Accel Mask Accel Owner Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 Adaptive Lim Alarm Mask 1 2 Alt Type 2 Cmd Analog Trim En Anlg In 0 Freq Anlg In 0 Hi Anlg In 0 Lo Anlg In 1 Freq Anlg In 1 Hi Anlg In 1 Lo Anlg In 2 Freq Anlg In 2 Hi Anlg In 2 Lo Anlg Out 0 Abs Anlg Out 0 Hi Anlg Out 0 Lo Anlg Out 0 Offst Anlg Out 0 Sel Anlg Out 1 Abs Anlg Out 1 Hi Anlg Out 1 Lo Anlg Out 1 Offst Anlg Out 1 Sel Anlg Signal Loss Application Sts At Time Base Fre
188. f of line 2 Startup Auto Reset At Current Economize At Torque A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line PI Max Error Braking eerie s 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Reverse Run Mtr Overload Forward Run Line Loss Drive Ready Drive Power Application Sts Parameter Number 316 Parameter Type Read Only Displays status of Speed Sync and Traverse functions Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit Bito ES Speed Sync 0 Disabled 1 Enabled gt Traverse 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Not Used Drive Alarm 1 Parameter Number 60 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which alarm condition is present when bit 6 of Drive Bit 15 Bit14 Bit 13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti Bito Status 1 is high set to 1 Refer to Chap i ter 7 for further alarm information Aito Reset Bus Charging A Status description bit ENUM is dis Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit played on line 1 except Series A HIMs 4 20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit below version 3 0 Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Y Y Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Programming 6 37 Drive Alarm 2 Parameter Number 269 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which alarm condition is present when bit 6 of Drive Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bit8 B
189. ffers a degree of PLC functionality for simple applica tions It consists of 7 frequency steps which can be stepped through based on a number of factors The frequency steps are programmed into the Preset Freq x parameters x Current Step 1 Each step also has a time associated with it SLx Time The logic for each step is defined by four StepLogic parameters e SLx Logic Step if true will move the program to the next step e SLx Logic Jump if true will jump to the step defined in SL Step Jump SL Step Jump if both SLx Logic Step and SLx Logic Jump are true the program will jump to the step defined in this parame ter SLx Logic Jump takes precedence over SLx Logic Step SLx Step Setting sets 4 functions of the step Refer to the parameter description on page 6 63 A valid Start command will cause the program to run and continue to loop unless one of the steps causes the program to end a Stop com mand is given or the Enable is opened When the Enable is opened in 2 wire control the drive will stop When closed the drive will restart at the last step if the Start is still closed Note that in order to move to a different step based on digital inputs at least one input must change state since the last step See Example below and Figure 6 1
190. function is enabled if Sync Loss Sel is set to Alarm or Fault The motor sync loss detection attempts to sense when a synchronous motor has pulled out of sync When this happens the motor will typically draw a high current and the power flow between the motor and the drive oscillates Based on this the detection algorithm looks for a large oscillation of the current relative to voltage angle while the current is high When loss of sync is detected the Sync Loss bit in Drive Alarm 1 is set Additionally the drive will add an additional voltage set by Sync Loss Comp to the output voltage This will increase the pull in torque to allow the motor to re synchronize If Sync Loss Sel is set to Fault the time the Sync Loss bit is set is timed If it exceeds the time set by Sync Loss Time the drive faults with a F67 Motor Sync Loss fault indication Sync Loss Sel Parameter Number 310 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter allows selection of various sync loss Factory Default Disabled modes Units Display Drive Important The motor must be connected to the drive Disabled 0 sync loss detection and recovery when the sync loss function is enabled function is disabled Alarm 1 sync loss detection and recovery function is enabled Fault 2 sync loss detection and recovery function is enabled If the sync loss continues for longer than the time set by Sync Loss Time the drive faults with a
191. g Encoder Puls to 1 Parameter Number 340 346 352 358 364 370 376 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 1 Count Counts Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 432767 Current Step Firmware 5 001 amp later This parameter displays the current step the Step Logic function is using For example if Current Step is 2 the SL2 parameters are active This parameter can be used to force the drive to a giving step Parameter Number 377 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Linear This group lists all the parameters currently installed in your drive in numerical order Refer List to the Appendix at the back of this manual for an alpha numeric listing of all parameters The following parameter appears only in the Linear List and is not documented elsewhere Bidir In Offset Parameter Number 329 Parameter Type Read and Write Trims the offset of the bi directional inputs on LA6 amp LA7 Display Units Drive Units None option cards To provide an equal response to positive and Factory Default 270 negative signals this parameter may need to be adjusted Minimum Value 0 for each board With no voltage on input 0 monitor Anlg Maximum Value 1024 In 0 Freq and adjust Bidir In Offset until it is zero Fault Descriptions Chapter Troubleshooting Chapter 7 provides information to gu
192. g Frame A4 317 0 12 48 Cutout All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 14 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded i Back of Enclosure Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure B 14 Dimensions Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame B1 B2 A 435 41 17 14 410 2 16 15 A 308 6 12 15 Cutout as Viewed from INSIDE Enclosure 283 2 11 All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Y Y Y 8 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded CE TS EM LG CLE MELODIE LLLI SIME C RE RE ALS v j Back of Enclosure M we ra 129 3 5 09 d Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Dimensions B 15 Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frame C A A 10 75 635 0 C 25 00 utout A 508 0 20 00 660 41 381 0 26 00 15 B 12 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Y v vy Y Back of Enclosure Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure 129 3 5 09 B 16 Dimensions Heat Sink
193. g input signal speed Check for broken wires loose con reference has been lost See nections or transducer loss at Anlg Signal Loss and analog inputs 4 20mA Loss Sel e 7 4 Troubleshooting Name amp Fault 4 Hertz Sel Fault 30 Description A frequency select parameter has been programmed with an out of range value Action Reprogram Freq Select 1 and or Freq Select 2 with a correct value If problem persists replace Main Con trol Board or complete drive HIM gt Drive Refer to Table 7 B Ill Prog Input Fault Data 98 3 Wire is Reprogram the digital inputs or select 62 selected as the Input Mode and 2 Wire as the Input Mode one or more digital inputs are pro grammed to Run Reverse 2 wire action Input Phase Fit The DC bus ripple has exceeded 1 If the drive is operated on single 49 the value in Phase Loss Level phase the load derating level has been exceeded 2 Check incoming power for a miss ing phase blown fuse Load Loss Fit Load Loss Detect is set to 1 Verify connections between motor 20 Enabled and the drive output and load torque current was below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time m Verify level and time requirements or disable Load Loss Detect Loop Overrn Fit 23 An overrun of the 2 5ms control loop has occurred Check all connections to the Main Control Board Replace the board or
194. ge drops below Factory Default 59 117 146 Volts DC Bus Memory Line Loss Volts and if Line Loss Minimum Value 40 80 100 Volts Mode is set to 0 or 2 the Drive Alarm 1 Line Loss bit Maximum Value 200 400 500 Volts will be set and the drive will take the selected line loss action Loss Recover Parameter Number 321 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage above which the drive recognizes a Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts line loss recovery Specifically If DC Bus Voltage rises Factory Default 29 59 73 Volts above DC Bus Memory Loss Recover and if Line Minimum Value 20 40 50 Volts Loss Mode is set to 0 or 2 the Line Loss bit of Drive Maximum Value 200 400 500 Volts Alarm 1 is cleared and the drive recovers from line loss This parameter should be set lower than Line Loss Volts i e fora higher bus voltage otherwise the drive will cycle in and out of line loss Ride Thru Volts Parameter Number 322 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage that the inertia ride thru function will Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts attempt to regulate If Line Loss Mode LoBus gt Decel Factory Default 29 59 73 Volts aline loss condition activates the inertia ride thru function Minimum Value 40 80 100 Volts The load is decelerated such that the energy absorbed Maximum Value 200 400 500 Volts from the mechanical load balances the losses bus voltage is
195. ge Level Undervoltage Fault Point Ride Thru Volts sets the bus voltage that the inertia ride T6 500ms Time Out Line Loss Fault thru function will attempt to regulate If Line Loss Mode is set to LoBus Decel a line loss condition activates the inertia ride thru function The load is then decelerated such that the energy absorbed from the mechanical load balances the losses and bus voltage is maintained Min Bus Volts sets the bus voltage below which the drive will disable firing of the output devices Line Loss Restart selects the timing and method of reconnecting the motor after power returns Operation when Line Loss Mode is set to LoBus gt Off If a power interruption occurs T1 the drive will continue to operate from stored DC bus energy until the bus voltage drops to the level set by DC Bus Memory Line Loss Volts T2 At this point the drive output is turned off and a 500 ms timer is started One of the following conditions will then occur 1 The bus voltage will fall below the level set by Min Bus Volts T5 before the timer expires This will generate a bus Undervoltage Fault if Low Bus Fault is set to enabled 2 The bus voltage will remain below DC Bus Memory Loss Recover but above Min Bus Voltage and the timer expires T6 If Line Loss Fault is set to enabled a Line Loss Fault will be issued 3 The input power is restored T3 and the bus voltage rises above DC Bus Memory Loss
196. gital I O parameter group in Chapter 6 for programming information 2 26 Installation Wiring Figure 2 3 Digital I O Default Settings TB3 Input 1 Input 2 Common Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Common Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Common Input 9 Encoder B Encoder NOT A Encoder NOT B Encoder A 12V 200mA max Encoder Common Input Mode Start Stop Functions Only Status 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Factory Default Single Source Control Single Source Reversing Status Run Forward Start Stop Fault Reset Stop Fault Reset Factory Default Inputs Stop Fault Reset Common Status Only Rev For Programmable Default Mode shown at right Jog Programmable is not active when Auxiliary Programmable Input Mode is set to Status Common SpeedSelect3 Programmable Speed Select2 Programmable Speed Select 1 Programmable Common Enable Enable Not Programmable See Speed Select Table Ds If this mode is selected the status of all inputs can be read at the Input Status parameter However only Stop Fault Reset and Enable will have control function Included on L4E through L9E These inputs must be present reprogram if Only necessary before drive will start Bit 0 of Direction Mask must 1 to allow TB3 ES direction change bipolar operation Requires 2 Wire control selection for Input Mode T
197. h Ramis iro pu pu e Medi nu LEE UR Appendix A Specifications aeaaea arn EErEE A TERRE ORE ACER QC oad User Supplied Enclosures ccc cece eee eee nee e neces Derating Guidelines 1 ces accede IRR RE d ERO aet s Parameter Cross Reference By Number nnana anaa Parameter Cross Reference By Name issues HIM Character Map ecc DR Rn E OR ERR Communications Data Information Format suus Typical Programmable Controller Communications Configurations Typical Serial Communications Configurations Encoder Interface Wirlng 00 0 e eee eee eee eee eee Read Write Parameter Record cc cece cece eee e eens Appendix B Appendix C Electrical Configuration cuu eres ener due hath che GHOUNGING 5s mier ee Re Gen tah SOU hoe tte ted el Mechanical Configuration 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee eens Manual Objectives Software Compatibility Chapter 1 Information and Precautions Chapter 1 provides information on the general intent of this man ual gives an overall description of the 1336 PLUS r1 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and provides a listing of key drive features This publication provides planning installation wiring and diag nostic information for the 1336 PLUS 1 Drive To assure success ful installation and operation the material presented must be thoroughly read and understood before proceeding Particular attention must be directed to the At
198. he load before proceeding A Reapply power to the drive B Verify that the frequency command is at zero Hz For further information refer to step 7 C Using the Direction LEDs verify that forward direction is selected D Startthe drive and slowly increase the speed until the motor begins to turn Note the direction of motor rotation If the direction of rotation is as desired proceed to Step E If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect stop the drive and remove all power When the HIM Display is no longer illuminated remove the drive cover Verify that the bus voltage measured at DC amp DC of TB1 is zero see Attention on page 5 9 Interchange any two of the three motor leads at TB1 U V or W Repeat Steps A through D NES E If encoder feedback is being used verify that the polarity or of Encoder Freq equals the polarity of the actual drive output as shown on the Status Display If the polarities are the same go to step F If polarities are different stop the drive remove all power Reverse the A amp A NOT OR B amp B NOT wiring Repeat Steps A through D F Stop the drive and replace drive cover The HIM Display will show 7 M 7 M At Speed 5 00 Hz 15 Low Speed Operation Speed range greater than 20 1 If Volts Hertz operation was selected in step 6 proceed to step 20 Slip F L A Adjustment To increase
199. hosen as the desired protection method refer to the recommended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen e IEC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type gG or equivalent should be used e UL UL Class CC T RK1 or J must be used Circuit Breakers The non fuse listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers inverse time or instantaneous trip and 140M Self Protect ing Motor Starters If one of these is chosen as the desired protec tion method the following requirements apply EC and UL Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH 2 6 Installation Wiring Table 2 A 240 Volt Input Protection Devices Drive Dual Element Motor Catalog Input Output Time Delay Non Time Circuit Circuit 2 Number Rating Rating Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker Protector4 9 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range 6 amp 1336F HP Amps Amps Min 1 Max 2 Min Max 2 Max8 Max8 Available Catalog Numbers A1 F05 05 28 2 8 4 5 4 6 15 3 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 F07
200. ic Jump Firmware 5 001 amp later Parameter Number 336 342 348 354 360 366 372 Parameter Type Read and Write SL1 Logic Jump Factory Default Do Not Step SL2 Logic Jump Units Display Drive SL3 Logic Jump T m a Step On Time SL4 Logic Jump SL1 In True 2 SL5 Logic Jump SL2 In True 3 SL6 Logic Jump SL1 In False 4 SL2 In False 5 When the logic in this parameter is true the program will Any SL True 6 jump to the step specified by SLx Step Jump The SL1 All SL True 7 and SL2 inputs are designated in TB3 Term xx Sel No SL True 8 The logic which refers to time is also for encoder or pulse SL1 not SL2 9 counts Time can be replaced with counts when using the SL2 not SL1 10 encoder and pulse inputs Time and SL1 11 When using Time and SLx or Time not SLX the time or Time and SL2 12 counts need to elapse before the logic input will be Time not SL1 13 checked Time not SL2 14 Do Not Step 15 SLO Step Jump Firmware 5 001 amp later Parameter Number 337 343 349 355 361 367 373 Parameter Type Read and Write SL1 Step Jump Factory Default Jump to 0 SL2 Step Jump Units Display Drive SL3 Step Jump Jump to 0 0 Jump to 1 1 SL4 Step Jump lump to2 2 SL5 Step Jump Jump to 3 3 SL6 Step Jump Jump to 4 4 Jump to 5 5 This parameter sets which step to jump to if SLx Logic Jump to 6 6 Step is true End Stop 1 use
201. ide the user in troubleshooting the 1336 PLUS Included is a listing and description of the various drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms Fault Display The LCD display is used to indicate a fault by showing a brief text statement relating to the fault see figure below The fault will be dis played until Clear Faults is initiated or drive power is cycled A Series A version 3 0 or Series B amp up HIM will display a fault when it occurs no matter what state the display is in In addition a listing of past faults can be displayed by selecting Fault queue from the Con trol Status menu see Chapter 3 for more information Refer to Table 7 A for a listing and description of the various faults Table 7 C pro vides a listing of faults by number Clearing a Fault When a fault occurs the cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared After corrective action has been taken simply cycling drive power will clear the fault Issuing a valid Stop command from the HIM or Control Interface option TB3 will also clear a fault if the Flt Clear Mode parameter is set to Enabled In addition a Clear Faults command can be issued anytime from a serial device if con nected Contact Description Refer to Figure 2 5 for a schematic representation of contacts CR1 CR4 Contacts in Figure 2 5 are shown in an unpowered state When powered the contacts will change state For Example D
202. ime Reset Run Tries Ride Thru Volts Run Accel Volts Run Boost Run On Power Up S Curve Enable S Curve Time Save MOP Ref Set Defaults Shear Pin Fault Skip Freq 1 3 Skip Freq Band SLx Encoder Cnts SLx Logic Jump SLx Logic Step SLx Step Jump SLx Step Setting SLx Time Slip Adder Slip F L A Slip Comp Gain Slot A B Option Speed Adder Speed Brake En Speed Control Speed Error Speed Integral Speed KI Speed KP Stability Gain Start Boost Start Mask Start Owner Stop Mode Used Stop Owner Stop Select 1 Stop Select 2 Sync Loss Comp Sync Loss Gain Sync Loss Sel Sync Loss Time Sync Mask Sync Owner Sync Time TB3 Term Sel Torque Current Traverse Dec Traverse Inc Traverse Mask Traverse Owner VT Scaling Specifications and Supplemental Information No 218 293 223 220 224 225 215 217 214 142 84 332 27 29 73 76 127 128 129 136 180 181 182 189 254 264 281 280 333 45 170 148 149 171 147 198 199 97 106 326 15 85 322 317 83 14 57 56 230 64 226 32 34 35 340 376 336 372 335 371 337 373 338 374 339 375 255 42 195 252 253 168 319 77 166 167 165 164 324 48 95 104 26 102 10 52 313 311 310 312 308 309 307 242 247 162 304 78 305 306 203 A 9 Group Process PI Digital 1 0 Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Process PI Diagnostics Metering Faults Frequency Set
203. imum Value 200 of Rated Amps Dig At Temp This parameter sets the heatsink temperature trip point for any digital output relay CR1 4 see above that is programmed to At Temp The relay will be energized when this value is exceeded See also Drive Status 2 bit 13 and Drive Alarm 1 bit 10 Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 267 Read and Write 1 C Deg C 120 C 0 255 C Programming 6 29 Digital I O PI Max Error Parameter Number 293 Parameter Type Read and Write Used with the process PI loop and sets the Pl error value Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Forward which activates CR1 4 if selected The relay s will be ac Factory Default Maximum Freq Forward tivated when PI Error exceeds this value Minimum Value 400 00 Hz Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Pulse Out Select Parameter Number 280 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the source value that drives pulse Factory Default Output Freq output Units Display Drive Range Output Freq 0 See Output Freq Encoder Freq 1 See Encoder Freq Acc Dec Freq 2 NOTE Output frequency command of the drive directly at the output of the accel decel ramp generator It does not include any modification due to selected speed regulation mode via Speed Control Pulse Out Scale Provides a scaling factor for
204. in can be increased However increasing the gain value too high may cause system instability The factory default value is set to minimum Fine adjustment will require operation with a load Slip Comp Gain 1 Set Power Up Display 20 With HIM software versions 2 02 amp up the power up display Status Process or Password can be programmed to appear when drive power is applied Simply access the desired display and simultaneously press the Increment and Decrement keys Start Up 5 13 Advanced Start Up Procedure Press these keys while following these steps The HIM Display will show Set Electronic 21 Electronic overload protection is factory set to drive maximum Overload A To properly set the electronic overload protection program Overload Amps Setup group to the actual nameplate F L A B If the motor speed range is greater than 2 1 program Overload Mode to the proper derate For the typical steps involved when programming refer to step 15 22 This completes the basic start up procedure Depending on your application further parameter programming may be required Refer to Chapter 6 for information 23 If password protection is enabled log out as described in Chapter 3 5 14 Start Up End of Chapter Chapter 6 Programming Chapter 6 describes parameter information for the 1336 PLUS II Parameters are divided into groups for ease of programming and operator
205. isplayed is 99 999 99 If this value is exceeded a character string of asterisks will appear on the display Process 2 Scale Parameter Number 181 5s Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the scaling multiplier for Display Units Drive Units Numeric Scale x 100 Process 2 Par The displayed value will be Factory Default 1 00 Process 2 Par actual value Minimum Value 327 68 x Process 2 Scale value Maximum Value 327 67 Displayed Value Process 2 Txt 1 8 Parameter Number s 182 189 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the User Units description for the value determined Display Units Drive Units ASCII Code ASCII Code by Process 2 Par and Process 2 Scale This 8 character Factory Default Amps description will be shown on line 2 of the display Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A 6 50 Programming Encoder This group of parameters contains all the parameters necessary to activate encoder feed back for closed loop operation Feedback Speed Control This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active in the drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Important No Control and Phase Lock are the only available options for synchronous motors If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is re quired Encoder Fdbk must be selected Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Units TI Read and Write Slip
206. it One or more of the output transis Check for damaged output transis 47 tors were operating in the active tors Replace output transistors Frame C amp Above region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed base drive voltage transistor current or insufficient Table 7 B HIM Upload Download Errors Fault Name Error Displayed Probable Cause Action HIM gt Drive ERROR 1 The HIM calculated a checksum for the file to be Upload a valid uncorrupted file from the downloaded then checked the EEPROM source drive and then repeat the download checksum of the download The checksums did not match indicating the file stored in the HIM is invalid and the download was not successful ERROR 2 The number of parameters in the HIM file is Verify that the correct file is being different than the number of parameters in the downloaded to the correct drive then press drive file The smaller of the two numbers is the the Enter key number of parameters downloaded The last Manually reprogram parameters with num downloaded parameter number is displayed bers higher than the last number down loaded or whose values were incorrect ERROR 3 The file in the HIM is for a different type of drive None Download not allowed than the drive to which it is connected i e 1336 PLUS file to 1336 IMPACT drive Downloads can only occur between
207. it7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti BitO Status 1 is high Refer to Chapter 7 for D Y Y further alarm information reed Voltage Check Motor Therm A Status description bit ENUM is Enc Cnt Max displayed on line 1 except Series A Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss HIMs below version 3 0 Load Loss Latched Alarms 1 Parameter Number 205 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter stores the Drive Alarm 1 indications see above Bits will re Bit 15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit BitS Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO main set high 1 even if the alarm i i condition no longer exists The bit s Auto Reset Bus Charging must be programmed lo zero to release Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit the stored indications 4 20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit A Status description bit ENUM is dis Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit played on line 1 except Series A HIMs Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit below version 3 0 Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Y Y Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Latched Alarms 2 Parameter Number 270 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter stores the Drive Alarm 2 indications see above Bits will re Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO main set high 1 even if the alarm i condition no longer exists The bit s Voltage Check Motor Therm must be programmed to z
208. ive power is applied except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Simul taneously press the Increment and Decrement keys while the Password display is shown The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Password Password Modify Enter Password 0 Enter Password 123 Choose Mode Password Password Login Password Logout Choose Mode Password Sets Password Display as Power Up Display Press these keys Login to Drive Human Interface Module 3 13 Password Mode continued while following these steps 2 The Program EEProm modes and the Control Logic Clear Queue menus are now password protected and will not appear in the menu To access these modes perform the following steps A Press the Increment or Decrement key until Password is displayed B Press Enter Login will be displayed C Press Enter Enter Password will be displayed D Press the Increment or Decrement key until your correct password is displayed The SELect key will move the cursor except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 m Press Enter m The Program and EEProm modes will now be accessible To pre vent future access to program changes logout as described below The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Password Password Login Enter Password 0 Enter Password 123 Choose Mode Password Logout from Drive 3 To prevent unau
209. l larger frames Check the pre charge circuit Replace the input SCRs SCR Firing Board Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed Prm Access Fit 34 A communication error occurred between the microprocessor and the serial EEPROM or the DSP Record the value in Fault Data then reset the fault If this fault occurs repeatedly contact factory Reprogram Fault 48 The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM 1 2 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive Program the drive parameters as needed Important If Input Mode has been changed from its original value power must be cycled before the new value will take affect ROM or RAM Fit Internal power up ROM or RAM Replace Control Board or complete 68 tests have not executed properly drive as required Serial Fault A SCANport adapter has been 1 If no adapter was intentionally dis 10 disconnected and the Logic connected check wiring to the Mask bit for that adapter is set to uy 3 SCANport adapters Replace wir ing SCANport expander SCANport adapters Main Control Board or complete drive as required If an adapter was intentionally dis connected and the Logic Mask bit for that adapter is set to 1 this fault will occur To guard against this fault occurring set the Logic Mask bit for the adapter to 0 Check HIM connection for proper seating Shear Pin Fault 63 Programmed
210. line 2 on HIM Y display while bits 8 15 are displayed on the upper At Temp At Freq half of line 2 Startup Auto Reset At Current Economize At Torque infi n le dli i PI Max Error A Status description bit ENUM is displayed online Braking Curen in 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 isses Mtr Overload Forward Run Line Loss Drive Ready Drive Power Fault Alarms 1 Parameter Number 173 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last alarm conditions present prior to a Bit 15 Bit14 Bit 13 Bit12 Bit 11 Bit10 Bito Bits Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit Bit Bito fault Referto Chapter 7 forfurther alarm Y information Auto Reset Bus Charging A Status description bit ENUM is Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit displayed on line 1 except Series A 4 20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit HIMs below version 3 0 Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Y Mtr Overload Motor Stalled Auxiliary Input Y Ground Warning Programming 6 35 Fault Alarms 2 This parameter stores and displays the last alarm conditions present prior to a fault Refer to Chapter 7 for further alarm information Parameter Number Parameter Type Unused 287 Read Only Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO Se ee a oltage Check Motor Therm A Status
211. low software version 3 0 to aid interpretation of bit parameters G Select a bit parameter with the Increment or Decrement keys Masks ra wi Logic Mask H Press the SELect key to view the ENUM of the first bit Pressing this key again will move the cursor to the left one bit A blinking underline cursor will indicate that you are in the Display mode or that a Read Only parameter as been accessed A flashing character will indicate that the value can be changed Individual bits of a Read Write parameter can be changed in the same man ner Pressing the SELect key will move the cursor flashing character one bit to the left That bit can then be changed by pressing the Increment Decrement keys When the cursor is in the far right position pressing the Increment Decrement keys will increment or decrement the entire value TB3 X1111111 Process Mode Press these keys Process Mode g E g Ea while following these steps 1 When selected the Process mode will show a custom display consisting of information programmed with the Process Display group of parameters A Follow steps A C on the preceding page to access the Program mode Press the Increment Decrement key until Process Display is shown Press Enter Using the Increment Decrement keys select Process 1 Par and enter the number of the parameter you wish to monitor Press Enter The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Program Cho
212. lt 7 2 DSP Timeout Fault 7 2 EE Init Read 7 2 EE Init Value 7 3 EEprom Checksum 7 3 EEprom Fault 7 3 Encoder Loss 7 3 Fgnd 10ms Over 7 3 Ground Fault 7 3 Ground Warning 7 3 Hardware Trap 7 3 Hertz Err Fault 7 3 Hertz Sel Fault 7 4 HIM gt Drive 7 4 Ill Prog Input 7 4 Input Phase Fit 7 4 Load Loss Fit 7 4 Loop Overrn Fit 7 4 Max Retries Fault 7 4 Motor Mode Fit 7 4 Motor Stall Fault 7 4 Motor Thermistor 7 4 Mult Prog Input 7 4 Neg Slope Fault 7 4 Op Error Fault 7 5 Open Pot Fault 7 5 Option Error 7 5 Overcurrent Fit 7 5 Overload Fault 7 5 Overspeed Fault 7 5 Overtemp Fault 7 5 Overvolt Fault 7 5 Phase U Fault 7 5 Phase V Fault 7 5 Phase W Fault 7 5 Poles Calc Fit 7 5 Power Loss Fault 7 5 Power Mode Fault 7 5 Power Overload 7 6 Precharge Fault 7 6 Index Precharge Open 7 6 Prm Access Fit 7 6 Reprogram Fault 7 6 ROM or RAM Fault 7 6 Serial Fault 7 6 Shear Pin Fault 7 6 Step Logic Fit 7 6 Sync Loss Fault 7 7 Temp Sense Open 7 7 Undervolt Fault 7 7 UV Short Fault 7 7 UW Short Fault 7 7 VW Short Fault 7 7 Xsistr Desat Flt 7 7 Filtering RFI 2 10 2 12 C 4 Flux Vector vs V Hz 5 7 5 11 Frame References 1 1 Frequency Select 6 16 Function Index 6 1 Fusing Input 2 5 G Grounding 2 11 H Human Interface Module HIM Character Map A 10 Description 3 1 Key Descriptions 3 2 Operation 3 4 Removal 3 13 Input Devices 2 9 Input Powe
213. lts Faults Ratings Ratings Ratings Analog I O Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Analog I O Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Digital O Digital O Digital O Digital 1 0 Metering Metering Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Encoder Feedback Motor Control Ratings Ratings Diagnostics Faults Digital O Setup Enc Fdbk Setup Enc Fdbk Owners Process Display Process Display Process Display Setup Setup Motor Control Advanced Setup Motor Control Feature Select Ratings Ratings Motor Control Faults Metering Setup Faults Diagnostics Masks Faults Diagnostics Process PI Process P Process PI Process P Process PI Process PI Process PI Process P Process PI Process PI Process P Process P Name 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 264 267 268 269 270 271 272 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 286 287 288 290 291 292 293 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 371 336 372 337 373 338 374 339 375 340 376 377 379 Group PI Preload Shear Pin Fault Adaptive Lim LLoss Restart Freq Ref SqRoot Save MOP Ref Hold Level Sel Current Lmt Sel Anlg Out 0 Abs Anlg Out 0 Lo
214. lue 0 0 Sec able is Enabled It applies to any increase in command Maximum Value 3600 0 Sec frequency unless Accel Time 2 is selected Decel Time 1 Parameter Number 8 Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the driveto ramp Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Second Seconds x 10 from Maximum Freq to 0 Hz The rate determined by this Factory Default 10 0 Sec value and Maximum Freq is linear unless S Curve En Minimum Value 0 0 Sec able is Enabled It applies to any decrease in command Maximum Value 3600 0 Sec frequency unless Decel Time 2 is selected Accel Decel Time Constant Speed 4 Accel Time gt Time 4Decel Timep Programming 6 9 Minimum Freq Parameter Number 16 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 output Factory Default 0Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 120 Hz Maximum Freq Parameter Number 19 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the highest frequency the drive will output Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 F We i Factory Default 60 Hz Mec cannot be changed while the drive is Minimum Value 10 Hz Maximum Value 400 Hz Stop Select 1 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default Coast receives a valid stop command unless Units Display Drive Stop Select
215. mmended 2 12 Installation Wiring Shield Termination TE True Earth The TE terminal block not available on A Frame drives is used for all cable shields at the drive It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead TE connections may exist on power and or control terminal blocks to terminate shield cables for both power and control Refer to Figure 2 1 for locations Safety Ground PE Potential Earth This is the safety ground required by code This point must be con nected to adjacent building steel girder joist or a floor ground rod provided grounding points comply with national or local electric code regulations If a cabinet ground bus is used refer to Grounding on page 2 11 RFI Filter Important Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Surge suppression devices are also incorporated in the filter Therefore the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded to the supply neutral Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection The integrity of this connection should be periodically checked Conduit 4 Wire Cable Nearest Building Structure Steel Nearest Building Structure Steel General Grounding O al eo ALLEN BRADLEY Installation Wiring 2 13
216. n 6 48 Data Out 6 48 DC Bus Memory 6 40 DC Bus Voltage 6 5 DC Hold Level 6 13 DC Hold Time 6 13 Decel Mask 6 44 Decel Owner 6 47 Decel Time 6 8 6 12 Dig At Temp 6 28 Dig Out Current 6 28 Dig Out Freq 6 28 Dig Out Torque 6 28 Direction Mask 6 43 Direction Owner 6 46 Drive Alarm 6 36 6 37 Drive Direction 6 38 Drive Status 6 36 Drive Type 6 42 Dwell Frequency 6 19 Dwell Time 6 19 EEPROM Cksum 6 40 Elapsed Run Time 6 7 Enc Count Scale 6 52 Encoder Counts 6 52 Encoder Freq 6 6 6 52 Encoder Loss Sel 6 52 Encoder PPR 6 18 6 50 Encoder Type 6 50 Fault Alarms 6 34 6 35 Fault Buffer 6 32 Fault Data 6 33 Fault Frequency 6 34 Fault Mask 6 44 Fault Owner 6 47 Fault Status 6 34 Firmware Ver 6 41 t Clear Mode 6 35 t Motor Mode 6 33 t Power Mode 6 33 ux Amps Ref 6 57 ux Current 6 7 ux Up Time 6 58 ying Start En 6 21 Freq Command 6 5 6 38 Freq Ref SqRoot 6 17 Freq Select 6 8 6 16 Freq Source 6 38 FStart Forward 6 22 FStart Reverse 6 22 Ground Warning 6 35 Heatsink Temp 6 6 6 39 Hold Level Sel 6 14 Input Mode 6 8 6 27 Input Status 6 27 6 37 IR Drop Volts 6 58 Jog Frequency 6 16 Jog Mask 6 43 Jog Owner 6 46 KI Process 6 55 KP Amps 6 15 KP Process 6 56 Language 6 21 Last Fault 6 6 Latched Alarms 6 37 Line Loss Fault 6 32 Line Loss Mode 6 22 Line Loss Volts 6 24 LLoss Restart 6 22 Load Loss Detect 6 25 Load Loss Level 6 26
217. n active alarm will be indicated by its corresponding bit being set to high 1 Any high bit 1 can energize CR1 4 if programmed Parameter Name Drive Alarm 1 Parameter Number 60 Parameter Type Read Only Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO i Auto Reset Bus Charging Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit 4 20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Y Y Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Parameter Name Drive Alarm 2 Parameter Number 269 Parameter Type Read Only Bit 15 Bit14 Bit 19 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti BitO Voltage Check Motor Therm unueeo Enc Cnt Max Load Loss Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss Table 7 D Alarm Conditions Alarm Bit Alarm Name Description Drive 0 Bus Charging Precharge of DC bus capacitors is in progress Alarm 1 1 Hardware Current Limit An alarm will be issued when 220 of drive rated current is reached 2 Motoring Current Limit The value programmed for Current Limit has been exceeded while in the motoring mode 3 Regenerating Current Limit An alarm will be issued when the value set for Current Limit has been exceeded while the motor is regenerating Regenerating Voltage Limit Bus limiting is active
218. n eet Sa Se te br ete Ne R L Oe Oe of Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit 10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit Bito This provides the drive status informa l l tion that will be sent to the logic Y Enabled controllers input image table when the Reference Local Adapter 1 Enabled i 0 Not Enabled Communication Module is set to con ID ID BURN trol the drive Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 MEN Freq Select 0 0 0 0 mS o c 6 ee PresetFreq1 0 0 0 1 1 0 Command Direction Preset Freq2 O 0 1 0 2 0 i 1 Forward Preset Freq3 O 0 1 1 3 0 t a 0 Reverse PresetFreq4 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 Rotating Direction Preset Freq5 O 1 0 1 5 1 4 1 Forward PresetFreq6 0 1 1 0 6 i 43 Y ERRE PresetFreq7 0 1 1 1 Unused 1 V Y EA FreqSelect2 1 0 0 0 Accelerating Adapter 1 rU OO NT 1 Accelerating Adapter 2 i 0 3 Y 0 Not Accelerating Adapter 3 i 4 1 i Adapter4 1 1 0 0 Syeda ah Mos 2 l l 2 Y 0 Not Decelerating JogFrequency 1 1 1 1 Alarm 1 Alarm Y 0 No Alarm Fault 1 Faulted Y 0 Not Faulted At Speed 1 At Speed 0 Not at Speed Logic Control Structure This information provides the control logic information that is sent to the drive through the logic controllers out put image table when the Communication Module is set to con trol the drive Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits l Y l i Y Reference Select Decel Time Accel Time je e
219. n systems corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts 1329R L Motors These AC variable speed motors are Control Matched for use with Allen Bradley Drives Each motor is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992 All 1329R L motors are optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1 Part 31 40 4 2 2 20 Installation Wiring Table 2 G Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters feet 500V 600V Drives No External Devices w 1204 TFB2 Terminator w 1204 TFA1 Terminator Reactor at Drive2 Motor Motor Motor Motor 1600V or 1600V or 1600V or 1329R L 1329R L 1329R L 1329R L A B Motors A B 1850V 5 A B 1850V 5 A B 1850V 5 Drive Drive kW Motor kW Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Frame HP HP Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable A4 0 75 1 0 75 1 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 0 37 0 5 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 1 5 2 1 5 2 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 1 2 1 5 NR NR NA NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 1100 200 600 0 75 1 NR NR 182 9 NR 182 9 335 3 NR 61 0 182 9 600 600 1100 200
220. nalog In 1 2 running Bus Limit En Parameter Number 11 Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the function that attempts to limitthe drive DC bus Factory Default Disabled voltage to 110 of nominal voltage during rapid decel If Units Display Drive bus voltage rises above the 11096 level Bus Limit En Disabled 0 Allow bus voltage to rise above reduces or stops the drive decel rate until bus voltage falls 110 DE ONE LORNE Enabled 1 Limit bus voltage decel ramp Braking Chopper Parameter Number 314 Parameter Type Read and Write Not functional in the 1336 PLUS II Drive Factory Default Disabled Units Display Drive Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Programming 6 15 Advanced Setup Motor Type Parameter Number 41 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter should be set to match the type of motor Factory Default Induction connected to the drive Units Display Drive Induction 0 Requires no additional setting Sync Reluc 1 Slip F L A amp DC Hold Level must be set to zero Stop Select 1 amp 2 must be set to a selection other than DC Brake Sync PM 2 Slip F L A amp DC Hold Level must be set to zero Stop Select 1 amp 2 must be set to a selection other than DC Brake Stop Select 2 Parameter Number 52 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default Coast receives a valid stop comman
221. nd or equipment damage caused by improper fusing use only the recommended line fuses specified in Table 2 A Unbalanced Distribution Systems This drive is designed to operate on three phase supply systems whose line voltages are symmetrical Surge suppression devices are included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground Where the potential exists for abnormally high phase to ground voltages in excess of 12596 of nominal or where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could cause the ground potential to vary with operation suitable iso lation is required for the drive Where this potential exists an isola tion transformer is strongly recommended Ungrounded Distribution Systems All 1336 PLUS II drives are equipped with an MOV Metal Oxide Varistor that provides voltage surge protection and phase to phase plus phase to ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE 587 The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only transient line protection not continuous operation With ungrounded distribution systems the phase to ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground Energy ratings are listed below Exceeding the published phase to phase or phase to ground energy ratings may cause physical damage to the MOV Refer to page A 1 R Joules J 4 Phase to Phase MOV Rating Three Phase S Joules J Includes 2 Phase Phase MOVs AC
222. ng AQ BR CW A B BPR BX C CPR Q R RX W GM5 DeviceNet F05 0 37 0 5 GM6 Enhanced DeviceNet FO7 0 56 0 75 Communication Options All Frames Adapter 1 F10 0 75 1 e e GMS1 GM with Snap In Cradle FIS 12 15 e e GMS2 GM2 with Snap In Cradle F20 15 2 e GMS5 GM5 with Snap In Cradle F30 228 Senne GMS6 GM6 with Snap In Cradle EDD a XE d Control Interface Options F75 5 5 7 5 o F100 7 5 10 ele L4 TTL Contact F150 11 15 e o L4E TTL Contact amp Encoder Feedback F200 15 20 elie L7E TTL Contact amp Encoder Fdbck for use with Encoder Loss Detection 007 55 75 e e L5 24V AC DC 010 7 5 10 e e L5E 24V AC DC amp Encoder Feedback 015 11 15 ee ee L8E 24V AC DC amp Encoder Feedback for use with Encoder Loss Detection 020 15 20 eoe eoe L6 115V AC Sex Boe il e L6E 115V AC amp Encoder Feedback 090 122 30 2e balled d L9E 115V AC amp Encoder Feedback for use with Encoder Loss Detection 040 30 40 eoe e o e o o 050 37 60 ele e ele e Analog Interface Options Slot A 060 45 60 ee ee eo o o Choose No More than One Configurable Inputs Outputs are 10V or 20mA 075 56 75 e o e eo e LA2 Two Isolated Configurable Inputs 100 75 100 eoe e eoe e LA6 One Isolated Bi polar Input 10V or 20mA and One Isolated 125 99 125 ele e ee e Thermistor Input 150 112 150 e e oe e ele LA7 One Isolated Bi polar Input 10V or 20mA and One Isolated 200 149 200 e e e e
223. ng or holding Economize 15 Auto economizer active Auto Reset 16 Attempt to reset fault amp restart drive At Temp 17 Requires value in Dig At Temp PI Max Error 18 Requires value in PI Max Error Remote 19 Set by Remote CR Output Firmware 5 001 amp later Step Logic 20 Set by SLx Step Setting SL Output Dig Out Freq Parameter Number 159 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Max Freq CR1 4 see above that is programmed to At Factory Default 0 00 Hz Frequency The relay will be energized when the valueis Minimum Value 0 00 Hz exceeded Maximum Value Programmed Maximum Freq Dig Out Current Parameter Number 160 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units Drive Units 0 4096 100 of Drive Rated Amps CR1 4 see above that is programmed to At Current Factory Default 0 The relay will be energized when the value is exceeded Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 200 Dig Out Torque Parameter Number 161 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amps 4096 Rated Torque Amps CR1 4 see above that is programmed to At Torque Factory Default 0 0 Amps The relay will be energized when the value is exceeded Minimum Value 0 0 Amps Max
224. ng will be 42 x 94 Altitude Derate x 96 High Line Derate 37 9 Amps Ambient Temperature Carrier Frequency Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in 40 C Ambient amp Open Drive in 50 C Ambient Ambient between 41 C amp 50 C Figure Rating Derate Figure Rating Derate Figure A 100 Figure B 100 AQFO05 75 a 98 A010 o 2 8 22 Ze BRF05 200 g 96 B020 a 96 ax o SB 94 ws 2 g E 92 92 9 i 1 1 90 1 1 1 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure C 100 Figure D 100 B025 a 96 A015 95 oo 9 Q 90 ZE ooo B030 Ze 5a 2 as 85 Oo O 9 gg 80 eg T S 75 84 70 80 i 65 1 i 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure E Figure F B040 o B050 o2 BX040 E BX060 2E ax at 5g 5g es ar 86 F 65 t 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure G 100 Figure H A040 o 2 98 A050 5 B075 ZE B100 g Bt 96 EE C075 53 a RE Mk 5g 9 cr sg amp 92 90 i i i 65 1 1 1 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure 100 Figure J 100 C100 98 A060 Po of B125 gg 0 2 g 96 E 85 ac BX150 eu SB 94 eg 0 2s eB 75 a o c 92 ae 90 F i 65 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Freq
225. nglish 0 8 Cycle drive power FRANCAIS 1 b Press the Increment key 5 times ESPANOL 2 C Press Enter Italiano 3 d Press the Increment key 2 times Deutsch 4 e Press Enter Japanese 5 Not available with v5 001 amp later Portuguese 6 Nederlands 7 Flying Start En Parameter Number 155 Parameter Type Read and Write This value enables the flying start function and chooses Factory Default Disabled the method to be used The drive will first search from the Units Display Drive direction it was last running Disabled 0 Firmware 5 001 amp later When restarting high inertia Speed Search 1 Freq sweep see FStart For Rev loads use the longer speed searches to match load speed Use Encoder 2 Requires feedback encoder This may minimize Overvolatge and Overcurrent faults B Frame amp Up drives Only Track Volts 3 Read back EMF from sync pm motor Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 10s 4 Frequency sweep takes 10 seconds Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 20s 5 Frequency sweep takes 20 seconds Firmware 5 001 amp later Speed Srch 40s 6 Frequency sweep takes 40 seconds synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized ATTENTION The Speed Search selection should not be used with AN during braking 6 22 Programming Feature Select FStart Forward Parameter Number 156 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the fr
226. nig Signal Loss be set to 1 Min Alarm 0 Freq Drive outputs Minimum Freq and issues an alarm This function is active only when the input is configured in Freq Select 1 2 PI Ref Select PI Fdbk Select Important Depending on the type of input configuration i e Frequency or Pl the resultant action will vary see Action column at right When configured in PI Ref Select or PI Fdbk Select only the alarm and fault conditions will occur The drive will not perform a speed change Stop Fault 1 Hold Alarm 2 Max Alarm 3 Pre1 Alarm 4 PI Alarm issued Freq Drive stops and issues Hertz Err Fault PI Drive stops and issues Hertz Err Fault Freq Drive maintains last output freq amp issues an alarm PI Alarm issued Freq Drive outputs Maximum Freq and issues an alarm PI Alarm issued Freq Drive outputs Preset Freq 1 and issues an alarm PI Alarm issued Programming 6 31 Analog I O Anlg Out 0 Sel Parameter Number 25 274 Anla Out 1 Sel Parameter Type Read and Write nig ut e Factory Default Frequency Out 0 This parameter selects the source value that will drive the Mor Out analog output This output is intended for metering only Units Display Drive Range and should not be used as process control feedback Frequency 0 Zeroto programmed Maximum Freq Current 1 Zero to 200 of Drive Rated Torque 2
227. nput fault F62 eus cui n Ifthe drive has direction control from a bipolar analog input pue 15 no direction control functions B can be selected An III PI Enable 16 Prog Input fault F62 will be generated See Chapter 7 P Reset 17 for fault information Dig Pot Up 18 Firmware 5 001 amp later DC Bus Drop is used to allow ig Pot de 19 enabling and disabling the line loss level set in Line Loss A Stop Type 20 Volts If this input is set the line loss level will be set at B Forward 21 default 82 DC Bus Level When the input is off the B Reverse 22 value set in Line Loss Volts is used The Line Loss Mode A B Rev For 23 Rev Closed For Open must be set at default LoBus gt Off to turn the drive off Run Reverse 24 when low bus levels occur CB Precharge 25 Firmware 5 001 amp later DC Bus Drop 26 Firmware 5 001 amp later SL Input 1 27 Firmware 5 001 amp later SL Input 2 28 Input Status Parameter Number 55 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the on off status of inputs 1 8at Bea Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti Bito TB3 if an optional interface card is installed Input 1 TB3 19 Input 2 TB3 20 Input 4 TB3 23 Input 3 TB3 22 Input 5 TB3 24 Input 6 TB3 26 Input 8 TB3 28 Input 7 TB3 27 A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 ex cept Series A HIMs below version 3 0 E Y
228. ns 380 480V 0 37 3 7 kW 0 5 5 HP Terminal Designations 380 480V 5 5 15 kW 7 5 20 HP Terminal Designations 500 600V 0 75 15 kW 1 20 HP Terminal Designations ejetereteletelerelo GRD GRD S T DC j DC U V w GRD GRD R S DC i DC BRK U i V w M 2 L3 m T2 T3 2 3 dn m 029 T3 Dynamic Brake A A A t Option i To Motor To Motor To Motor P To Motor DC Input Line Required Required Branch Required 1 Required Branch Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect AC Input Line AC Input Line Dynamic Brake Important A brake malfunction will occur if the Dynamic Brake is connected to DC COM 200 240V 5 5 kW 7 5 HP Terminal Designations 200 240V 7 5 11 kW 10 15 HP Terminal Designations 880 480V 11 k
229. o OP Frames A1 A2 A3 A4 Frames B G Nameplate Located on Nameplate Located on Bottom Portion of Chassis Behind Cover Mounting Plate of Main Control Board Mounting Chapter 2 Installation Wiring Chapter 2 provides the information you need to properly mount and wire the 1336 PLUS II Drive Since most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins ATTENTION The following informationis merely a A guide for proper installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation Minimum Mounting Requirements for Proper Heat Dissipation Dimensions shown are between drives or other devices 2588 Important A4 Frame drives should not be mounted on a combustible surface However if the drive must be mounted on a combustible surface 6 35 mm 0 25 in spacers must be provided under the mounting feet of the drive F Frame drives req
230. o the Important statement on page 2 28 concerning bi polar input option 2 36 Installation Wiring Specifications for the various inputs and outputs are provided below 1 0 Type Configuration Specification Ref Standard 0 10V Input 100k ohm input impedance TB2 41 0 10V Output Can drive a 10k ohm load 60 mA short circuit TB2 91 current limit 0 20 mA Input 200 ohm input impedance TB2 41 10k Ohm Pot Input 760k ohm input impedance TB2 41 Pot source 5V through 2 67k ohms to TB2 1 Option 0 10V Input 100k ohm input impedance TB2 5 Board 0 10V Output Can drive 3 3k ohms 3 parallel 10k ohm loads TB2 5 0 20 mA Input 100 ohm input impedance TB2 5 0 20 mA Output Can drive 400 ohms 3 series 0 20 mA inputs TB2 5 Pulse Input 250 ohms in series with an opto LED TB2 9 Pulse high is greater than 8 mA or 3 6V while pulse low is less than 0 8V or 0 2 mA Absolute maximum continuous input level is 12V or 50 mA Pulse Output Provides a current limited 4 5V square wave TB2 5 This output can drive one PLUS or three PLUS II pulse inputs Thermistor Input 5V across 3 3k ohms in series with the TB2 4 thermistor This arrangement limits the measuring voltage to less than 2 5V no self heating 1 Use TB2 5 for shield connection 2 Refer to Typical Isolation diagram below Typical Isolation True Galvanic Isolation to 200V AC greater than 10 M ohm less than 50 pf
231. ocedure Press these keys Program Input Mode P 2E m E g p E J Cycle Input Power while following these steps 4 If a Control Interface option is installed it is important that the Input Mode selected in Chapter 2 be programmed into the drive Since the control inputs to this option are programmable incorrect operation can occur if an improper mode is selected The factory default mode Status disables all inputs except Stop and Enable Verify your control scheme against the information provided in Chapter 2 and program the Input Mode parameter as follows A From the Status Display press the Enter key or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until Program is displayed If Program is not available programming is password protected Refer to Chapter 3 for Password mode information C Press Enter D Press the Increment key until Setup is displayed E Press Enter F Press SELect The first character of line 2 will now flash G Press the Increment or Decrement keys until the desired mode is displayed then press Enter In addition to the mode Inputs 3 8 can also be programmed if defaults are not desired See Chapter 6 for parameter information Use the steps above as a guide if input programming is desired H Press the ESCape key 3 times to return to the Status Display Remove power to the drive When the HIM Display is no longe
232. of drive logic commands except stop Units Display Drive Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive p 0 Deny Gonttol is stopped 1 Permit Control Programming 6 45 Alarm Mask 1 Parameter Number 206 Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which alarm conditions will ac Factory Default 1111111111111111 tivatethe alarm contact referto Chapter 2 TB2 and set the alarm bit bit 6 in Bit15 Bit 14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit Biti BitO Drive Status 1 Y Y A Status description bit ENUM is dis Auto Reset Bus Charging played on line 1 except Series A HIMs Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit below version 3 0 4 20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Y Y Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Alarm Mask 2 Parameter Number 271 Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which alarm conditions will ac Factory Default 1111111111111111 tivate the alarm contact refer to Chapter 2 TB2 and set the alarm bit bit 6 in Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bits Bit7 Bit Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit Biti BitO Drive Status 1 m B Y Y Setting the bit to 1 allows the alarm to ezi Voltage Check Motor Therm occur Setting the bit to 0 causes the Enc Cnt Max Load Loss drive to ignore that alarm EncCntSet Encoder Lo
233. on and Precautions Installation Wiring Human Interface Module Flash Memory Table of Contents Chapter 1 Manual Objectives cat uo exeat cea sao uel abbr k cor ak eet oh 1 1 Software Compal C iode poten troc OC ETE IE D RE PE 1 1 General PrOCAUONS c cunc assess ark kos rho i Bet A RR eB BEns 1 2 Conventions Used in this Manual 0 ccc e ee eens 1 2 Catalog Number Explanation 0 0 cece eee eee eee ee 1 2 Nameplate Location orco trate orbem pete rie qe agian 1 4 Chapter 2 MOUNINO airea e Ae ti etos xat ash SM Mode 2 1 Installation Guidelines 5 Seed te io et tee en cae IRE 2 2 AC Supply Source e pup cR EE 2 3 Input Power Conditioning seio o o buo Shoe Gene obs 2 4 Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 0 c cece eee eee 2 5 Input Devices top sd pr eer een Gy dees oy AY EE daa oy 2 9 Electrical Interference EMI RFI 0c eee eee eee eee 2 9 REL FINCNNG 02 cei ne e E bee b corks 2 10 CE CONTO ioc ue io eite ce es Protect Pet oim eis 2 10 Grounding ecd ei peed ey p GUT D tia ee wee tected tas 2 11 Power Cabling soe oett ad atur creer e eben as bent 2 14 Control and Signal Wirlng 5n REX DERI P ER 2 24 Digital Inputs aieo asta hate nier bee po LEE RS ESTEE 2 25 Encoder Inputs 3 eerta pte RE RR ERA 2 30 Pulse Input Output Option x 2254 0 ex dade lr bp Tenes 2 31 Digital Outputs s oues o LC wees eh d ade uk 2 31 Arialogl Q cue cio ina etri e bacon vede irt ER os 2 32 Standard
234. on numbers of the profile and drive D Press Enter to start the download The parameter number currently being downloaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM Line 2 will indicate total progress Press ESC to stop the download E Asuccessful download will be indicated by COMPLETE displayed on line 2 of the HIM Press Enter If ERROR is displayed see Chapter 7 EEprom HIM Drive HIM Drive 1A Master Type 2 01 gt 2 03 HIM gt Drive 60 HTIH Drive HIM 210 COMPLETE 3 10 Human Interface Module Search Mode while following these steps Press these keys 1 The Search Mode is not available with a Series A HIM below version 3 0 This mode allows you to search through the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default values A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown Press the Increment or Decrement key until Search is displayed Press Enter The HIM will search through all parameters and display any parameters that are not at their factory default values Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll through the list The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Search Control Status Mode Press these keys Control Logic Bu o B o DM while following these steps 1 The Control Status mode is not available with a Series A HIM below
235. onstant Torque Variable Torque Variable Torque Cat No Input kVA Input Amps OutputkVA Output Amps Input kVA Input Amps Output kVA Output Amps InputkVA Input Amps Output kVA Output Amps AQF05 14 2 8 0 9 2 3 14 28 0 9 23 AQF07 14 3 5 1 2 3 0 14 35 1 2 3 0 AQF10 22 54 1 8 4 5 2 2 5 4 1 8 45 AQF15 2 9 7 3 2 4 6 0 2 9 73 24 6 0 AQF20 3 9 ovi 32 8 0 39 97 32 8 0 AQF30 5 7 14 3 48 12 5 7 14 3 48 12 AQF50 8 5 21 3 72 18 8 5 21 3 7 2 18 AQF75 9 0 22 6 8 8 22 9 0 22 6 8 8 22 A007 8 10 23 8 8 22 10 23 8 8 22 A010 12 14 35 14 34 14 35 14 34 A015 17 20 49 19 48 20 49 19 48 A020 22 26 63 26 65 26 63 26 65 A025 26 31 75 31 TT 31 75 31 7 A030 27 33 79 32 80 33 79 32 80 A040 41 49 119 48 120 49 119 48 120 A050 52 62 149 60 150 62 149 60 150 A060 62 74 178 72 180 74 178 72 180 A075 82 99 238 96 240 99 238 96 240 A100 100 120 289 116 291 120 289 116 291 A125 112 134 322 129 325 134 322 129 325 BRF05 0 9 1 0 1 3 0 9 14 14 14 1 0 12 0 9 14 1 0 1 33 BRF07 1 8 1 6 2 0 13 1 6 17 24 14 17 14 21 1 4 1 89 BRF10 1 7 2 1 2 6 17 2 1 2 2 2 8 1 8 23 1 8 28 1 8 2 55 BRF15 2 2 2 6 3 3 2 2 2 8 2 8 3 5 24 3 0 2 3 3 5 24 3 33 BRF20 3 0 3 7 4 6 3 0 3 8 3 8 4 8 3 2 4 0 3 2 4 8 3 2 4 44 BRF30 4 2 5 1 6 4 4 2 5 3 5 7 7 2 4 8 6 0 4 7 7 2 4 8 6 66 BRF50 6 6 8 0 10 0 6 7 8 4 8 5 10 7 72 9 0 7 0 10 7 72 9 99 BRF75 8 9 11 3 13 6 10 6 13 3 13 0 15 7 12 3 15 4 10 3 15 7 12 3 19 43 BRF100 10 8 13 6 16 4 12 8 16 1 18 6 22 4 17 5 22 14 7 22 4 17 5 22 00 BRF150 16 1 20 4 24 5 19
236. or Decrement key to scroll through the list F To clear the fault queue press ESCape Then use the Increment Decrement keys to select Clear Queue Press Enter Please note that Clear Queue will not clear active faults The HIM Display will show Control Status Fault Queue Fault Queue View Faults Serial Fault F 10 Trip 1 Reprogram Fault F 48 2 Fault Queue Clear Queue 3 12 Human Interface Module Password Mode Press these keys Modify Password Bu MT while following these steps 1 The factory default password is 0 which disables password protec tion To change the password and enable password protection per form the following steps A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown B Press the Increment or Decrement key until Password is displayed C Press Enter D Press the Increment or Decrement key until Modify is displayed E Press Enter Enter Password will be displayed F Press the Increment or Decrement key to scroll to your desired new password The SELect key will move the cursor except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 G Press Enter to save your new password H Press Enter again to return to the Password Mode Press the Increment or Decrement key until Logout is displayed J Press Enter to log out of the Password mode K The Password mode can be programmed to appear when dr
237. or fixed connection to filter B Frame 28 6 1 13 C Frame 34 9 1 38 n i j D 50 8 2 00 lt S R Q gt p 28 6 34 9 1 13 1 38 Conduit Knockout 2 or 3 Plcs o o L 22 2 0 88 Conduit Knockout 1 Plc M L Y All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Frame Reference L M N o p e R S B1 B2 181 6 167 1 NA NA 106 4 155 2 206 0 249 9 7 15 658 419 6 11 8 11 9 84 B1 B2 CE 181 6 167 1 114 1 20 6 NA 155 2 206 0 249 9 7 15 658 449 0 81 6 11 8 11 9 84 C 181 6 167 1 NA NA 112 8 174 5 227 8 275 3 7 15 6 58 444 687 897 1084 C CE 181 6 167 1 120 7 254 NA 174 5 227 8 275 3 715 658 475 1 00 6 87 897 10 84 1 Only present on CE version Junction Boxes 2 Not present on CE Junction Boxes B 12 Dimensions Heat Sink Through the Back Mounting Frames A1 through A3 in 210 0 x 8 25 ie 98 0 8 86 Cutout All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches 10 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 12 7 0 5 Threaded e Back of Enclosure A1 50 8 2 00 A2 71 4 2 81 A3 98 8 3 85 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure Dimensions B 13 Heat Sink Through the Back Mountin
238. ose Group Process Display Process 1 Par 1 3 8 Human Interface Module Process Mode continued Press these keys P2 ER Bii Baw cg SEL while following these steps D Select Process 1 Scale using the Increment Decrement keys Enter the desired scaling factor Press Enter E Select Process 1 Txt 1 using the Increment Decrement keys Enter the desired text character Press Enter and repeat for the remaining characters F If desired a second display line can also be programmed by repeating steps A E for Process 2 xxx parameters G When process programming is complete press ESCape until Choose Mode is displayed Press Increment Decrement until Process is displayed H Press Enter This selects which custom display will be on line 1 and line 2 Use the Increment Decrement keys to select process 1 or 2 parameters for line 1 Press SELect to move to line 2 Select the desired process parameters A zero can be entered except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 to disable line 2 In addition the Process Display can be set to appear when drive power is applied by simultaneously pressing the Increment and Decrement keys while the Process Display active The HIM Display will show Process 1 Scale 1 00 Process 1 Txt 1 V Choose Mode Process Process Var 1 1 Process Var 2 2 Sets Process Display as Power Up Display EEProm Mode Press these keys Reset Defaults a
239. oss of 1 or more channels 2 Loss of quadrature 3 Loss of differential signal A amp A NOT or B amp B NOT were high atthe same time Fgnd 10ms Over Microprocessor loop fault Occurs Replace Main Control Board or com 52 if a 10ms interrupt is pending plete drive as required before the current interrupt is complete Ground Fault A current path to earth ground in Check the motor and external wiring 13 excess of 100A has been to the drive output terminals for a detected at one or more ofthe grounded condition drive output terminals NOTE If ground current exceeds 22096 of drive rated current Overcurrent Fit may occur instead of Ground Fault Ground Warning A current path to earth ground in Check the motor and external wiring 57 excess of 2A has been detected to the drive output terminals for a at one or more of the drive output grounded condition terminals See Ground Warning Hardware Trap Refer to the Description and Action statements for C167 Watchdog 18 F17 on 7 2 Hertz Err Fault This fault indicates that there is 29 not a valid operating frequency It can be caused by any of the fol lowing 1 Maximum Freq is less than 1 Check Minimum Freq and Maxi Minimum Freq mum Freq parameters 2 Skip frequencies and skip 2 Check Skip Freq 1 Skip Freq 2 bandwidth eliminate all operat Skip Freq 3 and Skip Freq Band ing frequencies parameters 3 Analo
240. ound a skip frequency The Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz actual bandwidth is 2 x Skip Freq Band one band Factory Default 0 Hz above and one band below the skip frequency Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 15 Hz Example Skip Freq 20 Hz and Skip Freq Band 4 Hz Bandwidth 8 Hz 16 24 Hz The output frequency will remain outside the total band When the actual command crosses the actual skip fre quency the output will ramp through the entire band Skip Frequency Band Frequency Command Frequency A mE Skip Band gt F 37 MA LR Skip Frequency gt Skip Band gt E 22 e Saf VActual Drive Frequency MOP Increment Parameter Number 22 f Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the rate ofincrease or decrease tothe Freq Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Hertz Second 255 78 of Maximum Freq Sec Command for each input at TB3 if programmed Factory Default 1 1 Hz Sec Minimum Value 0 Hz Sec Maximum Value 78 of Maximum Freg Sec Save MOP Ref Parameter Number 230 Parameter Type Read and Write If this parameter is enabled the frequency command is Factory Default Disabled sued by the MOP inputs will be saved to EEPROM in the Units Display Drive event of power loss and reused on power up When dis Disabled 0 abled no value is saved and the MOP reference is reset Enabled
241. out the most used basic parameters The second method if required provides a more complex start up utilizing the Program mode and complete parameter access Advanced features and adjustments are grouped separately from basic parameters for ease of use The following procedures are written for users who have a Human Interface Module HIM installed and who are not using a 2 wire drive control scheme For users without a HIM respective external commands and signals must be substituted to simulate their operation ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to per form the following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified ser vice personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before be ginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power by opening the branch circuit disconnect device and correct the mal function before continuing Important Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing 1336 PLUS II parameters Previous programming may affect the drive status when power is applied Ifthe Control Interface option is installed remote start circuits may be connected to TB3 on the interface board Confirm that all cir cuits are in a de energized state before applying power User sup plied voltages may exi
242. ow 25 of Base Speed 10 1 Speed Range No Derating Overload Patterns No Derate 100 80 60 40 of Load 20 Min Derate 100 80 60 40 of Load Time to Trip Seconds 20 Max Derate 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of Base Speed of Load Time to Trip vs Current 1000 eo e o Multiple of Overload Amps Programming 6 11 Overload Amps This value should be set to the motor nameplate Full Load Amps FLA for 1 15 SF motors For 1 0 SF motors the value should be set to 0 9 x nameplate FLA Parameter Number 38 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amps 4096 Rated Amps Factory Default 115 of Drive Rating 115 0 of Drive Rating Firmware 5 001 amp later Minimum Value 20 of Drive Rated Amps 0 0 of Drive Rated Amps Firmware 5 001 amp later 115 of Drive Rated Amps 115 0 of Drive Rated Amps Firmware 5 001 amp later Maximum Value VT Scaling Parameter Number 203 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter scales the drive for VT ampere ratings Factory Default Disabled Important This parameter must be setto Disabled when Units Display Drive drive is used in a fibers application Disabled 0 Disables Variable Torque Scaling This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Enabled 1 Enables Variable Torque Scaling running Motor NP RPM Parameter Number 177 Paramete
243. p 0 240V AC Input Voltage 380 480V AC Input Voltage 500 600V AC Input Voltage 200 Volt Tap use for 200 220V 380 Volt Tap use for 380 400V 500 Volt Tap use for 500V 415 Volt Tap use for 415V 460 Volt Tap use for 460 480V 575 Volt Tap use for 575 600V 240 Volt Tap use for 230 240V Auxiliary Inputs TB4 TB6 Installation Wiring 2 39 Terminal blocks TB4 and TB6 B Frame drives amp up allow the drive power supplies to be operated from an external voltage source Both terminal blocks are located on the Base Driver Board and are accessi ble from the front of the drive See Figure 2 1 for locations TB4 can be used to externally power the low voltage power supply allowing operation of drive control functions in the absence of bus voltage Applying proper voltage to TB4 see Table 2 J provides 5V 15V and isolated 12V outputs for Main Control Board Control Interface Boards RIO Board etc SCANport HIM etc Encoder s LEMS Precharge Any DC fans in the drive TB6 can be used to externally power the high voltage power supply which provides inverter IGBT drive voltage and the low voltage nec essary to power the low voltage power supply This allows operation of the drive in the absence of bus voltage The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB4 is 2 1 and 0 06 mm 14 and 30 AWG Wire sizes for TB6 are 5 3 and 0 06 mm 10 and 30 AWG Use Copper wire Only with a
244. p 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Threaded 132 33 5 21 B 18 Dimensions TB1 Dimensions for D amp E Frame Drives a 27 0 V 1 10 42 0 1 65 M10 Stud Approximate 0 375 in 2 Places Recommended Torque 10 N m 87 Ib in Op Recommended Wrench 17 mm 75 x 31 2 95 x 1 22 Removable Bar SAQO Of OJO O TIT Erie 18 0 28 0 23 0 Also applies to TB1 on D Frame Drives gt 0 71 1 10 F 81 m JP ue i Hs up JEN 5 1 24 gt 32 0 35 0 67 0 2 64 ran 2 72 p 1 38 M8 Stud Approximate 0 313 in 2 Places Recommended Torque 6 N m 52 Ib in XH Recommended Wrench 13 mm H 50 8x24 2 00 x 0 95 lt Removable Bar TB1 Dimensions for G Frame Drives 206 2 8 12 Dimensions 6 3 0 25 hat 117 3 4 62 508 254 000
245. protection handbook ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the 1336 PLUS I Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid a hazard of electric shock verify thatthe voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the amp terminals of TB1 The voltage must be 0 0V DC To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text the following conventions will be used e Parameter Names will appear in brackets e Display Text will appear in quotes The diagram on the following page describes the 1336 PLUS II catalog numbering scheme 1336F BR F30 AA Information and Precautions EN MODS
246. ption will not be displayed Table 3 A HIMs with Upload Download Capability HIM Catalog Number Upload Download Capability HAP Series B HM Series B HA2 Series B HCSP HCS1 HCS2 Search except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 This mode will search for parameters that are not at their default values 3 6 Human Interface Module Control Status except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Permits the drive logic mask to be disabled enabled allowing handheld HIM removal while drive power is applied Disabling the logic mask with a Series A HIM below version 3 0 can be accom plished with Logic Mask as explained on page 3 13 This menu also provides access to a fault queue which will list the last four faults that have occurred Trip displayed with a fault indicates the actual fault that tripped the drive A clear function clears the queue it will not clear an active fault Password The Password mode protects the drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel When a password has been assigned access to the Program EEProm modes and the Control Logic Clear Fault Queue menus can only be gained when the correct password has been entered The password can be any five digit number between 00000 and 65535 Refer to the example on page 3 12 Figure 3 4 HIM Programming Steps Storred Power Up Mode amp OPERATOR LEVEL 8 88 Hz Status Display uda MODE LEVEL du Gu G
247. pulse output Pulse Output Rate Hz x Pulse Out Scale The pulse output will not provide a rate lower than 21 Hz A command less than 21 Hz will generate 0 Hz output To provide smooth operation across a wide speed range se lect the maximum scale factor possible Parameter Number 281 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units Factor Factor Factory Default 1 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 64 Example Pulse Out Select is set to Output Freq and drive is programmed for Maximum Freq 60 Hz When the drive output is 60 Hz the Pulse Output Rate is adjustable from 60 Hz 60 x 1 to 3840 Hz 60 x 64 Pulse In Scale Provides a scaling factor for the pulse input Scale Incoming Pulse Rate Hz Factor Desired Command Freq Parameter Number 264 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units Factor Pulses per Rev Factory Default 64 PPR Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 4096 Example 4 Pole Motor 60 Hz Max Speed The 1336 MOD N1 option outputs 64 Hz Hz At full analog reference the pulse input to the drive will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz Hz 3840 pulses sec 3840 Hz Scale Factor ae 64 At Time Parameter Number 327 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the delay time for the activation of the CR1 4 relays Display Units Units 0 01 Second Seconds x 100 The relay is activated at Start At Time seconds This Factory Default 0 00 Sec delay affects all relays
248. quency Base Voltage Bidir In Offset Blwn Fuse Fl Boost Slope Braking Chopper Break Freq Break Frequency Break Voltage Bus Limit En Bus Reg Level Bus Regulation Clear Fault Cntrl Board Rev Common Bus Control Select CR1 Out Select CR2 4 Out Select Cur Lim Trip En Current Angle Current Limit Current Limit En Current Lmt Sel Current Step Data In A1 D2 Data Out A1 D2 DC Bus Memory DC Bus Voltage DC Hold Level DC Hold Time Decel Mask Decel Owner Decel Time 1 Decel Time 2 Dig At Temp Dig Out Current Dig Out Freq Dig Out Torque Direction Mask Direction Owner Drive Alarm 1 2 Drive Direction Drive Status 1 2 Drive Type Dwell Frequency Dwell Time EEPROM Cksum Elapsed Run Time Enc Count Scale Encoder Counts Encoder Freq Encoder Loss Sel Encoder PPR Encoder Type Fault Alarms 1 aacaaagaagcaa ovj 150 98 107 7 30 227 206 271 315 90 138 140 238 249 237 248 138 140 238 249 237 248 138 140 238 249 237 248 233 235 234 154 25 277 276 275 278 274 250 316 327 17 18 329 81 169 314 334 49 50 11 325 288 51 251 58 9 158 174 176 82 72 36 303 232 377 111 118 119126 212 53 13 12 99 108 8 31 267 160 159 161 94 103 60 269 69 59 236 61 43 44 172 279 282 283 284 46 152 173 Group Metering Metering Analog I O Masks Owners Setup Advanced Setup Setup Masks
249. r Maximum Value 100 Load Loss Time Parameter Number 292 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the amount of time the drive Torque Current is Display Units Units 1 Second Seconds below Load Loss Level before the action set in Load Factory Default 0 Sec Loss Detect is taken Minimum Value 0 Sec Maximum Value 30 Sec Bus Reg Level Firmware 4 001 amp later Parameter Number 325 Parameter Type Read and Write Max Bus Volts Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts When this parameter is set to the minimum value the Fae ae oe ae drive DC bus voltage is limited to 110 of nominal voltage Maximim value 403 807 1009 Volts Bus Limit En must be Enabled for the drive to limit the bus voltage This setting is used to move the trigger point for regulation above the turn on point for dynamic brake or regeneration packages Programming 6 27 This group of parameters contains the programming options for digital drive inputs outputs Digital I O Input Mode Parameter Number 241 Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the functions of inputs 1 amp 2 at TB3 when an op Display Units Drive Units Mode Number Selection tional interface card is installed Refer to Input Mode Factory Default Status Selection in Chapter 2 This parameter cannotbe changed Units Display Drive while the drive is running Power to the drive must be cycled Status 1 before any changes will affect drive operation
250. r Cnts SL1 Logic Step SL1 Logic Jump SL1 Step Jump SL1 Step Setting SL1 Time SL1 Encoder Cnts SL2 Logic Step SL2 Logic Jump SL2 Step Jump SL2 Step Setting SL2 Time SL2 Encoder Cnts SL3 Logic Step SL3 Logic Jump SL3 Step Jump SL3 Step Setting SL3 Time SL3 Encoder Cnts SL4 Logic Step SL4 Logic Jump SL4 Step Jump SL4 Step Setting SL4 Time SL4 Encoder Cnts SL5 Logic Step SL5 Logic Jump SL5 Step Jump SL5 Step Setting SL5 Time SL5 Encoder Cnts SL6 Logic Step SL6 Logic Jump SL6 Step Jump SL6 Step Setting SL6 Time SL6 Encoder Cnts Current Step Motor OL Ret Setting Specifications and Supplemental Information Read Write Parameter Record continued Appendix B Dimensions Appendix B provides detailed dimension information for the 1336 PLUS Included are IP 20 NEMA Type 1 Dimensions IP65 54 NEMA Type 4 12 Dimensions Heat Sink through the Back Cutout Dimensions TB1 Terminal Block Dimensions for D E amp G Frame Drives Typical Mounting of F and G Frame Open Chassis Drives in a User Supplied Enclosure Important The dimensions given on the following drawings are for estimating purposes only Contact your Allen Bradley Sales Office if certified drawings are required B 2 Dimensions IP 20 NEMA Type 1 amp Open Dimensions Frames A1 through A4
251. r Conditioning 2 4 Input Output Rating A 2 Interference EMI RFI 2 9 Isolation Transformer 2 4 L L4 L4E Option A 14 L5 L5E Option A 15 L6 L6E Option A 16 L7E Option A 14 Language 6 21 Logic Control Structure A 11 A 12 Low Speed Operation 5 10 Lug Kits 2 15 M Min Max Frequency 6 9 Motor Cable Length 2 18 Motor Starting Stopping 2 9 Mounting 2 1 N Nameplate Location 1 4 O Output Configuration 6 28 Overload 6 11 P Parameter Cross Ref By Name A 9 By Number A 8 Parameter Record A 17 Parameters Output Curr 6 7 Output Power 6 7 4 20 mA Loss Sel 6 30 Accel Mask 6 43 Accel Owner 6 46 Accel Time 6 8 6 12 Adaptive Lim 6 10 Alarm Mask 6 45 Alt Type 2 Cmd 6 48 Analog Trim En 6 30 Anlg In Hi 6 30 Anlg In Lo 6 30 Anlg In x Freq 6 5 Anlg Out Abs 6 31 Anlg Out Hi 6 31 Anlg Out Lo 6 31 Anlg Out Offset 6 31 Anlg Out Sel 6 31 Anlg Signal Loss 6 30 Application Sts 6 36 At Time 6 29 Base Frequency 6 59 Base Voltage 6 58 Bidir In Offset 6 64 Blwn Fuse Fit 6 33 Boost Slope 6 58 Braking Chopper 6 14 Break Freq 6 60 Break Frequency 6 58 Break Voltage 6 58 Bus Limit En 6 14 Bus Reg Level 6 26 Bus Regulation 6 25 Clear Fault 6 32 Cntrl Board Rev 6 41 Common Bus 6 15 Control Select 6 57 CR Out Select 6 28 Cur Lim Trip En 6 32 Current Angle 6 39 Current Limit 6 9 Current Limit En 6 10 Current Lmt Sel 6 9 Current Step 6 64 Data I
252. r Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 RPM 1 RPM RPM Factory Default 1750 RPM aT Minimum Value 60 RPM This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maxii m Value 24000 RPM running Motor NP Hertz Parameter Number 178 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 frequency Factory Default 60 Hz ai Minimum Value 1Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 400 Hz running Motor NP Volts Parameter Number 190 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rated Volts volts Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 0 Volts This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Maximum Value 2 x Drive Rated Volts Motor NP Amps This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated current This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Parameter Number 191 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 1 Amp 4096 Drive Rated Amps Factory Default Drive Rated Amps Minimum Value 0 Amps Maximum Value 2 x Drive Rated Amps 6 12 Programming Advanced This group contains parameters that are required to setup advanced functions of the drive for complex applications Setup
253. r illuminated reapply power Important Display must go blank for input mode programming changes to take effect The HIM Display will show Choose Mode EEProm Choose Mode Program Metering Setup Input Mode Status Input Mode 3 Wire Stopped 0 00 Hz Start Up 5 7 Advanced Start Up Procedure Press these keys H au A MT RT u d ESC while following these steps 5 Set Maximum Freq and Maximum Voltage parameters to correct values typically line voltage frequency Set Base Voltage and Base Frequency parameters to the motor nameplate values A From the Status Display press the Enter key or any key Choose Mode will be displayed B Press the Increment or Decrement key until Program is displayed C Press Enter D Press the Increment key until Setup is displayed E Press Enter F Press the Increment or Decrement keys until Maximum Freq is displayed Press SELect The first character of line 2 will now flash G Usethe Increment Decrement keys to display the first digit then press Enter Repeat for remaining digits H Repeat the above steps to program the remaining parameters located in the Motor Control group Press the ESCape key 3 times to return to the Status Display The HIM Display will show Choose Mode EEProm Choose Mode Program Metering Setup Input Mode 3 Wire Maximum Freq 60 Stopped 0 00 Hz Choose
254. rameter sets the DC boost level for constant speed level when Control Select is set to Fixed Boost or Full Custom Parameter Number 83 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts Factory Default 0 Volts Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 9 5 of Drive Rated Voltage Boost Slope Parameter Number 169 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the slope of the volts Hertz curve from Start Boost Display Units Drive Units None and Run Boost to the intersect point see Fixed boost Factory Default 1 5 diagram on previous page when Control Select equals Minimum Value 1 0 fixed boost The intersect is determined by multiplying Maximum Value 8 0 Run Boost x Boost Slope A Start Boost x Boost Slope B Break Voltage Parameter Number 50 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the voltage the drive will output at Break Frequency Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts Combined with Break Frequency this parameter deter Factory Default 25 of Drive Rated Voltage mines the volts per Hertz pattern between 0 and Break Minimum Value 0 Volts Frequency Maximum Value 50 of Drive Rated Voltage Break Frequency This parameter sets a midpoint frequency on a custom volts per Hertz curve Combined with Break Voltage this value determines the volts per Hertz ratio between 0 and Parameter Number 49 Parameter Type Read and Write Display Units
255. refer to Chapter 7 for fault information The Status Display can be replaced by the Process Display or Password Login menu on all HIMS except Series A below version 3 0 See appropriate sections on the following pages for more infor mation Human Interface Module 3 5 Figure 3 3 Status Display From this display pressing any one of the 5 Display Panel keys will cause Choose Mode to be displayed Pressing the Increment or Decrement keys will allow different modes to be selected as described below and shown in Figure 3 4 Refer to the pages that follow for operation examples Display When selected the Display mode allows any of the parameters to be viewed However parameter modifications are not allowed Process The Process mode displays two user selected parameters with text and scaling programmed by the user Refer to Chapter 6 for further information Program Program mode provides access to the complete listing of parameters available for programming Refer to Chapter 6 for further parameter programming information StartUp Performs an assisted start up prompting the user through major start up steps For further information refer to Chapter 5 EEProm This mode allows all parameters to be reset to the factory default settings In addition certain HIMs see table below will allow parameter upload download Drive gt HIM HIM gt Drive between the HIM and drive If your HIM does not have this capability the o
256. relays etc Opening this contact will fault F02 Aux Fault the drive and shut the output off ignoring the programmed stop mode Clear Fault If drive has faulted closing this input will clear the fault Digital Pot MOP Up Down These inputs increase up or decrease down the drive commanded frequency when MOP Motor Oper ated Potentiometer is chosen as the frequency command source The rate of increase decrease is pro grammable Forward Closing these inputs Forward or Reverse commands the corresponding direction If both inputs are open or both are closed the current direction is maintained Jog Closing this input starts the drive and causes it to run at programmed jog frequency Opening this input stops the drive using the programmed stop mode Local Control Closing this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the inputs at terminal block TB3 No other devices may issue logic commands excluding Stop to the drive Rev For Available only with three wire control Closing this input commands reverse direction and opening this input commands forward direction Reverse See Forward above PI Enable Enables the output of the process PI loop PI Reset Opening this input clamps the process PI integrator value at zero Closing this input allows the integrator to continue to operate Run Reverse Available Only with two wire control Closing this input issues both a start command and a
257. reverse com mand to the drive Opening the input issues a stop command to the drive Speed Select 1 2 3 These inputs choose the frequency command source for the drive See following pages for details Stop Type Closing this input selects the stop mode in Stop Select 2 as the method of stopping when a stop com mand is issued Opening this input selects the stop mode in Stop Select 1 as the method of stopping Sync Normally wired to multiple drives When the Sync input is low the drive operates normally When the input is high the speed of the drive will be held constant and the speed command will have no effect Dur ing this period the speed input of the drive will normally be changed to a different source and or value Allows synchronized change of frequency command to multiple drives Traverse Setting this input low disables the traverse function When the input is high the traverse function will be active Speed Control must also be set to P Jump for the function to be active Important If a Control Interface Option is not installed the Input Mode parameter must be set to Status default and jumpers must be installed as shown in Figure 2 7 If the drive was shipped from the factory without the option these jumpers will have been installed Important The Input Mode parameter can be changed at any time but the change will not affect drive operation until power tothe drive has been remove
258. rminal configure with J11 10V or 20mA Pulse Output Pulse In Pulse In 3 10k Ohm potentiometer required Analog I O Option Slot A Analog I O Option Slot B Analog 0 10V 4 20 mA and Pulse I O Examples Standard I O Optional I O Standard Analo Pulse with 9 Standard Analog Input 2 Standard Analog Output 0 LAS Option Isolated Pulse Train Input Pulse Train Output from LA5 Refer to page 2 36 Non Isolated 0 10V Non Isolated p to LA5 Option Board Option Board Non Isolated for Analog I O m ee 8 NUM SEN wee qm 3 G Jaek seb T B Loco Led z l V Fi 0 10V 3 Pul 3 Jumper J11 Set to 0 10V AN Sois 8 P dig ds Isolated Input t Isolated O f with LA2 LA3 sola ed nput to solated Output from i LA2 Option Board LA3 Option Board Options 1 2 8 9 OIE 3 G EE 1 Hol Remote Potentiometer Examples Installation Wiring 2 33 to Standard I O 10k Ohm Remote Input 0 Shown See Table below for other Inputs 10k Ohm Remote Potentiometer to Potentiometer Standard Analog when LA2 LA6 or Input LA7 Option Board is Installed Refer to page 2 36 for Analog I O Signal with Optional I O 1 1 PE User Supplied 5V specifications Common SS i TB2 Jumper Terminal Input Set to Pot 2 2 0 J8 3 1 J13 6 2 J11 See table below for further jumper info Jumper J11 must be set to Pot If an Option Board is installe
259. rrier frequency Ratings apply to all drives refer to the Derating Guidelines on page A 5 2 8 kHz Drive rating based on 4 kHz see pg 1 1 for frame info 2 6 kHz Drive rating based on 4 kHz see pg 1 1 for frame info 2 6 kHz Drive rating based on 2 kHz see pg 1 1 for frame info 0 to rated voltage 0 to 400 Hz Within 0 01 of set output frequency Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Sensorless Vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Constant Torque 150 of rated output for 1 minute Variable Torque 11596 of rated output for 1 minute Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160 of rated output current Independently programmable proportional and integral gain Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 4 6 1 0 1 second increments using a HIM or 0 01 with serial communications Input Output Ratings Each 1336 PLUS 1 Drive has constant and variable torque capabil ities The listings on the next page provide input amp output current and kVA ratings Note Drive ratings are at nominal values See Derating Guidelines on page A S Specifications and Supplemental Information A 3 C
260. s Drive Units 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq Command and feedback speed Factory Default None Minimum Value 8 33 of Base Frequency Maximum Value 8 33 of Base Frequency Speed Integral This parameter displays the integral value from the speed loop Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 167 Read Only 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq None 8 33 of Base Frequency 8 33 of Base Frequency Speed Adder This parameter displays the amount of correction applied to the Freq Command Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 168 Read Only 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq None 8 33 of Base Frequency 8 33 of Base Frequency Slip Adder This parameter displays the amount of correction added by slip comp or phase lock loop Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 255 Read Only 0 01 Hertz 32767 Maximum Freq None 8 33 of Base Frequency 8 33 of Base Frequency Motor NP RPM Parameter Number 177 Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units Drive Units 1 RPM RPM x 10 RPM Factory Default 1750 RPM ai Minimum Value 60 RPM This parameter cannot be changed while the
261. s and Inches See Bottom View Dimensions for Details B 8 Dimensions IP 65 54 NEMA Type 4 12 Dimensions See Detail A C 2i 12 4 0 49 F gt G Ix EN H See Detail B e Allen Bradley B Ru 7 9 0 31 lt 12 7 0 50 i 0 50 a T4 0 28 Dia 12 7 0 50 i 143 0 56 Dia A Typical Top and Bottom Detail A Drive E Em 12 7 0 50 Dia nisse 19 1 0 75 Lu 194 0 75 Dia All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Detail B Frame Approx Ship Reference A B Cc D E F G Weight Al 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 16 8 kg 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 87 0 Ibs A2 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 A A 17 9 kg 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 89 4 Ibs A3 430 0 525 0 350 0 404 9 500 1 250 0 A A 18 6 kg 16 93 20 67 13 78 15 94 19 69 9 84 41 0 lbs A4 655 0 650 0 425 0 629 9 625 1 293 0 63 5 76 2 39 5 kg 25 79 25 59 16 74 24 80 24 61 11 54 2 50 3 00 87 0 Ibs B1 e I 200 SOV AG 655 0 650 0 425 0 629 9 625 1 293 0 63 5 76 2 44 7 kg SOSH 25 79 25 59 16 74 24 80 24 61 11 54 2 50 300 98 5 Ibs ep VESTROS ULM REIN 655 0 900 0 425 0 629 9 875 0 293 0 63 5 76 2 56 5 kg Praise ME 25 79 85 43 16 74 24 80 34 45 11 54 2 50 300 124 5 lbs C 655 0 1200 0 425 0 629 9 1174 5 293 0 63 5 76 2 80 7 kg 25 79
262. s that input Connector J10 Analog Option Board Slot A Frames B G Jod for 0 10V operation The bottom provides O C 0 20 mA and the right side provides potentiometer operation Please note that all three are factory set at 0 10V Important Inputs 0 1 amp 2 are not located in logical order on the board 10d J8 J11 J13 J13 TB2 3 Input 1 Pot Configuration Shown J8 TB2 2 Input 0 0 10V Configuration Shown J11 TB2 6 Input 2 0 20 mA Configuration Shown 2 34 Installation Wiring Optional Analog I O Configurations If your drive was received with Analog Options LA1 LA2 etc factory installed the boards must be setup before use Proceed to Option Board Setup below Option Board Installation Removal If the drive is not factory configured with Analog Options the desired option boards can be user installed Prior to installation the jumpers at J9 and or J10 must be removed If a board is removed at a later time the jumpers must be reinstalled Refer to the detailed instruc tions supplied with the option boards Important Drive power must be removed prior to jumper installation removal Option Board Setup Before operation each installed option board must configured The board will have one or two DIP switches depending on the option selected The first function input or output is configured with the S1 DIP switch the s
263. s the settings of Stop Select End Stop 1 7 1 End Fault causes the drive to stop with a F69 Step End Stop 2 8 Logic fault End Fault 9 SLO Step Setting Firmware 5 001 amp later Parameter Number 338 344 350 356 362 368 374 SL1S Setti Parameter Type Read and Write tep etting Factory Default xxxx0000 SL2 Step Setting a Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti BitO SL3 Step Setting SL4 Step Setting E e SL5 Step Setting Acc Dec 2 Encoder Puls SL6 Step Setting uin Reverse when set the drive will run in reverse during gt Not Used the step Otherwise it runs forward gt Not Used Not Used SL Output when set the associated CRx Out Select will turn on if set to Step Logic Acc Dec 2 when set the drive will use Accel Time 2 and Decel Time 2 for speed changes during the step Encoder Puls when bit is off the Encoder input is used When set the Pulse input is used For more information referto SLx Encoder Cnts To use Encoder Pulse counts the logic is setto one ofthe time functions The SLx Time must be set to 0 then set the desired count difference in SLx Encoder Cnts The counts are signed when used for the encoder The absolute value of the counts is used for the pulse counts A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 6 64 Programming Step Logic
264. set Freq 1 27 Preset Freq 2 28 Preset Freq 3 29 Preset Freq 4 73 Preset Freq 5 74 Preset Freq 6 75 Preset Freq 7 76 Skip Freq 1 32 Braking Chopper 314 Skip Freq 2 33 Motor Type 41 Stop Select 2 52 KP Amps 193 Skip Freq 3 34 Skip Freq Band 35 MOP Increment 22 Speed Brake En 319 3 Save MOP Ref 230 Common Bus 58 3 Freq Ref SqRoot 229 Pulse In Scale 264 Encoder PPR 46 Page 6 19 Dwell Frequency 43 Dwell Time 44 Speed Control 77 Slip F L A 42 Slip Comp Gain 195 Run On Power Up 14 Reset Run Tries 85 Reset Run Time 15 S Curve Enable 57 S Curve Time 56 Language 47 Flying Start En 155 FStart Forward 156 FStart Reverse 157 LLoss Restart 228 Line Loss Mode 256 Line Loss Volts 320 Loss Recover 321 Ride Thru Volts 322 Min Bus Volts 323 Traverse Inc 78 Traverse Dec 304 Max Traverse 79 P Jump 80 Bus Regulation 288 Load Loss Detect 290 Load Loss Level 291 Load Loss Time 292 Page 6 27 Input Mode 241 TB3 Term 22 Sel 242 TB3 Term 23 Sel 243 TB3 Term 24 Sel 244 TB3 Term 26 Sel 245 D o o o TB3 Term 27 Sel 246 TB3 Term 28 Sel 247 Input Status 55 CR1 Out Select 158 mm CR2 Out Select 174 Anlg Out 0 Sel 25 CR3 Out Select 175 Anlg Out 0 Offst 154 CR4 Out Select 176 Anlg Out 0 Abs 233 Dig Out Freq 159 Anlg Out 0 Lo 234 Dig Out Current 160 Anlg O
265. ss A Status description bit ENUM is dis played on line 1 except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 6 46 Programming This group of parameters contains binary information to display which group of adapters are issuing control commands Each Owner Parameter contains a bit for each adapter The drive will set an adapter s bit to 1 when that adapter is issuing a logic command and to Zero when no com mand is being issued A Status description bit ENUM is displayed on line 1 ex cept Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Owners Display Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti BitO L gt TB3 Adapter 1 Adapter 2 Adapter 3 Adapter 4 Adapter 5 Adapter 6 Not Used VM AE VM Stop Owner Parameter Number 102 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is Units Display Drive suing a valid stop command O 0 Stop Input Not Present 1 1 Stop Input Present Direction Owner Parameter Number 103 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter currently has ex Units Display Drive clusive control of direction changes o 0 Non Owner If Freq Select 1 or Freq Select 2 is set to Analog In 0 1 1 Current Owner and an Analog Option Board with bipolar input LA6 LA7 is installed that input designated Analog In 0 will have exclusive ownership of direction Bit 7 of Direction Mask
266. ss Fault 03 DC bus voltage remained below 85 of nominal for longer than 500ms Line Loss Fault parame ter is set to enabled Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption Power Mode Fault 26 The internal power mode variable received an incorrect value Check all connections to the Control Board Replace the board or com plete drive as required 7 6 Troubleshooting Name amp Fault Power Overload 64 Description The drive rating of 150 for 1 minute has been exceeded Action Reduce load Precharge Fault 19 The precharge device was open 20ms after the end of a line loss condition or the bus charging alarm remains on for 20 seconds precharge did not complete See Chapter 1 for frame definitions 1 2 Frames A1 A2 A3 Check the pre charge circuit Replace the drive Frame B Check the precharge cir cuit Replace the Power Driver Bd or complete drive as required All larger frames Check the pre charge circuit Replace the input SCRs SCR Firing Board Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed Precharge Open 56 The precharge circuit was com manded to close but was detected to be open See page 1 1 for frame definitions 1 2 Frames A1 A2 A3 Check the pre charge circuit Replace the drive Frame B Check the precharge cir cuit Replace the Power Driver Bd or complete drive as required Al
267. st at TB3 even when power is not applied to the drive e Refer to Chapter 7 for fault code information 5 2 Start Up Initial Operation Assisted Start Up Assisted Start Up Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive If a Control Interface option L4 L5 L6 LAE through L9E is installed verify that the control power to this board matches the board rating Remove and lock out all incoming power to the drive including incoming AC power to terminals R S and T L1 L2 and L3 plus any separate control power for remote interface devices If a Control Interface option is installed verify that the Stop and Enable interlock inputs are present Important The Stop and Enable inputs must be present before the drive will start If this option is not installed verify that two jumpers are installed at pins 3 amp 4 and 17 amp 18 of J2 In addition the Input Mode must be set to Status Confirm that all other optional inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed If the HIM has a Control Panel use the local controls to complete the start up procedure If a Control Panel is not present remote devices must be used to operate the drive Proceed to Assisted Start Up If a more detailed start up is required go to Advanced Start Up on page 5 The following procedure provides a prompte
268. stallation recommendation precautions described in this manual are adhered to it is unlikely that interference problems will occur when the drive is used with conventional industrial elec tronic circuits and systems However a filter may be required if there is a likelihood of sensitive devices or circuits being installed on the same AC supply Where it is essential that very low emission levels must be achieved or if conformity with standards is required the optional RFI filter must be used Refer to Appendix C and instructions included with the filter for installation and grounding information Refer to Appendix C Grounding Installation Wiring 2 11 Refer to the grounding diagram on page 2 13 The drive must be con nected to system ground at the power ground PE terminal provided on the power terminal block TB1 Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations NEC VDE 0160 BSI etc and should be inspected and tested at appropriate and regular intervals In any cabinet a single low impedance ground point or ground bus bar should be used All circuits should be grounded independently and directly The AC supply ground conductor should also be con nected directly to this ground point or bus bar Sensitive Circuits It is essential to define the paths through which the high frequency ground currents flow This will assure that sensitive circuits do not share a path wi
269. stics Feature Select Feature Select Faults Metering Diagnostics Advanced Setup Setup Digital O Digital O Diagnostics Motor Control Frequency Set Masks Owners Process PI Advanced Setup Process PI Feature Select Metering Diagnostics Diagnostics Feature Select Faults Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Feature Select Masks Owners Masks Feature Select Faults Feature Select Encoder Feedback Feature Select Advanced Setup Setup Encoder Feedback Motor Control Diagnostics Feature Select Advanced Setup Setup Metering Frequency Set Masks Owners Diagnostics Setup Setup Enc Fdbk Setup Enc Fdbk Setup Metering Faults Faults Encoder Feedback Faults Advanced Setup Metering Metering Metering Diagnostics Metering Setup Setup Feature Select Faults Faults Process PI Process PI Process PI Name PI Feedback PI Max Error PI Neg Limit PI Output PI Pos Limit PI Preload PI Ref Select PI Reference PI Status Power Mode Power OL Count Precharge Fault Preset Freq 1 3 Preset Freq 4 7 Process 1 Par Process 1 Scale Process 1 Txt 1 8 Process 2 Par Process 2 Scale Process 2 Txt 1 8 Pulse Freq Pulse In Scale Pulse Out Scale Pulse Out Select PWM Comp Time PWM Frequency Rated Amps Rated CT Amps Rated CT kW Rated kW Rated Volts Rated VT Amps Rated VT kW Reference Mask Reference Owner Remote CR Output Reset Run T
270. supplies drive protection 3 Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker 4 Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip 6 Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems N 8 Maximum rating allowed by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installtion 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler Hammer Series HMCP is 100 000A at 240 volts 65 000A at 480 volts and 25 000A at 575 volts The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P Installation Wiring 2 7 Table 2 A continued 480 Volt Input Protection Devices CT Ratings VT Ratings Motor Drive Dual Element Circuit Circuit a Catalog Time Delay Non Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range Number Input Output Input Output Fuse Delay Fuse 6 E 1336F HP Amps Amps HP Amps Amps Min Max2 Min Max2 Max8 Max8 Available Catalog Numbers 140 A1 F05 05 1 3 14 05 14 1 2 3 2 5 3 3 15 3 M C2E B16
271. sure Failure to install the blank cover plate allows access to electrically live parts which may result in personal injury and or equipment damage When a drive mounted snap in HIM is supplied with enclosed NEMA Type 1 IP 20 drives but has been removed the blank cover plate must be installed in place of the HIM Important The operation of some HIM functions will depend upon drive parameter settings The default parameter values allow full HIM functionality 3 2 Human Interface Module Figure 3 1 HIM Display Panel LCD Display Saabs Display Panel Key Descriptions ESC SEL Escape When pressed the ESCape key will cause the programming system to go back one level in the menu tree Select Pressing the SELect key alternately causes the top or bottom line of the display to become active The flashing first character indicates which line is active Increment Decrement or These keys are used to increment and decrement a value or scroll through different groups or parameters Pressing both keys simultaneously while the Process or Password Display is shown will save that display as the startup display Enter When pressed a group or parameter will be selected or a parameter value will be entered into memory After a parameter has been entered into memory the top line of the display will automatically become active allowing another parameter or group to be chosen Figure 3 2 Human Interface
272. t 10 mA current levels without signal degradation Reed type input devices are recom mended The L4 L4E option is compatible with the following Allen Bradley PLC modules e 1771 OYL e 1771 OZL Option L7E Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with Option L7E must be capable of operating with low true logic In the low state external circuits must be capable of a sinking current of approximately 10 mA to pull the terminal voltage low to 3 0V DC or less In the high state external circuits must let the terminal voltage rise to a voltage of 4 0 5 0V DC Reed type input devices are recommended The L7E option is compatible with the following Allen Bradley PLC modules 1771 OYL 1771 OZL Specifications and Supplemental Information A 15 Option L5 L5E amp L8E Wiring 510 Typical Typical 681 173 Current 5VO Limit 681 e oe J1 J2 Feedback 0 5A BV o io 8 5 12V l fone 1Vo ML 255 B TW 280 dodi 90 9 e a 576 Typical SZ ENC ENC A A A A A A A A A hi ls ENC ENC A t A 12V RET B A IB a 12V RET 32 33 34 35 36 19 20 2 22 23 24 2 2 27 28 2 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ANNs f All a All
273. t to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to h alert people that dangerous voltage may be present StepLogic and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes New Updated Information The information below summarizes the changes to the 1336 PLUS II User Manual since the last release Description of Change Page s TB1 info updated D Frame 2 15 B 18 Updated Parameters Load Loss Level 6 26 Phase Loss Level 6 35 Heatsink Temp 6 39 Drive Type 6 42 New Parameters Motor OL Ret 6 35 Parameter Cross References A 8 updated Parameter Record updated A 17 Soc 2 Summary of Changes Notes Informati
274. tandard and optional I O configurations Figure 2 6 Analog I O TB2 Only Present Ms Pel Signal parves Common TE TE 1 I T Pot Single Ended Single Ended Signal Single Ended Single Ended Single Ended Signal Reference Input 0 nput 1 Common Input 2 Output 0 Output 1 Common 5V 1 3 Pot 10V or20mA Pot 10V or 20mA Pot 10V or20mA 0 10V Only 0 10V Only or select 1 or select 1 Isolated Isolated solated Isolated S Single Ended Single Ended Single Ended 0 20mA IVA InputO Input 0 nput 1 Input 1 i FYE Input 22 Output 0 Output 1 Output 10Vor20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA g Pot 10V or20mA 10Vor20mA 20mAOnly Return Isolated Isolated Thermistor Thermistor l Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated mA Input 0 Input 0 isolated Isolated IKE Output 0 Output 0 Output 1 Output 1 10V 20mA 10V 20mA nput Input 10V or 20mA 10Vor20mA 10Vor20mA 10V or 20mA C Isolated Isolated solated Isolated 0 Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated Mya Input 0 Input 0 nput 1 Input 1 m RETE Input 2 Input 2 Output 1 Output 1 X10V X20mA 10V 20mA 10V or 20mA 10Vor20mA m 10V or 20mA 10Vor20mA 10Vor20mA 10V or 20mA 0 1 If an Option Board is installed in Slot A the 5V pot reference will not be n Single Ended Non Isolated Isolated Isolated available If a 5V source is required it must be user supplied XS Output 0 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 2 Standard Analog Input 2 is maintained at this te
275. tant Depending on the circuitry connected additional fusing may be required ATTENTION The installation of auxiliary circuits must AN comply with the national codes and standards NEC VDE BSA etc and local codes regarding wire type conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Fail ure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage The auxiliary circuit can be utilized to a maximum current capacity of 8 amperes RMS The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB9 is 4 0 and 0 8 mm 12 and 18 AWG Use Copper wire Only with a minimum tem perature rating of 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Maximum torque is 0 90 1 81 N m 8 16 lb in Important If the Control Interface Board is being installed Main Control Board jumpers at pins 3 amp 4 and 17 amp 18 of J2 must be removed and the proper Input Mode selected Ifthis board is removed these jumpers must be reinstalled and the Input Mode parameter must be programmed to Status 1 Figure 2 7 Jumper Locations Frames B G 1 Refer to page 1 1 for frame reference classifications Installation Wiring 2 44 Adapter Definitions Serial communication devices such as the Human Interface Module that are connected to the drive are identified by SCANport serial com munications as Adapters Depending on the drive and options ordered a number of different adapters are availabl
276. tention and Important state ments contained within For J Frame information refer to publication 1336F INO14 Three Phase Drive Rating Compatible with Frame 200 240V 380 480V 500 600V Version Reference 0 37 0 75 KW 0 37 1 2 kW 1 0 amp Up A1 0 5 1 HP 0 5 1 5 HP 1 2 1 5 kW 1 5 2 2 kW 1 0 amp Up A2 1 5 2 HP 2 3 HP 2237KN 37kW 1 0 amp Up A3 3 5 HP 5HP 5 5 kW 5 5 15 kW 0 75 15 kW 1 0 amp Up A4 7 5 HP 7 5 20 HP 1 20 HP 5 5 11 kW 11 22 kW 1 0 amp Up B1 B2 7 5 15 HP 15 30 HP 15 22 kW 30 45 kW 18 5 45 kW 1 0 amp Up C 20 30 HP 40 60 HP 25 60 HP 30 45 kW 45 112 kW 56 93 kW 1 0 amp Up D 40 60 HP 60 150 HP 75 125 HP 56 93 kW 112 187 kW 112 224 kW 1 0 amp Up E 75 125 HP 150 250 HP 150 300 HP 187 336 kW 261 298 kW 1 0 amp Up F 250 450 HP 350 400 HP 187 448 kW 224 448 kW 1 0 amp Up G 250 600 HP 1300 600 HP kW and HP are constant torque 1 2 Information and Precautions General Precautions Conventions Used in this Manual Catalog Number Explanation Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD
277. ter Type Read and Write Setting this parameter to Defaults Init resets all parame Factory Default Ready ters to their factory values Units Display Drive Ready 0 Display after function complete Store to EE 1 Rell frm EE 2 Default Init 3 Resets all parameters to factory settings 6 40 Programming DC Bus Memory Parameter Number 212 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the nominal DC bus voltage level Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt Volts This value is used to determine line loss overvoltage de Display Volts cel frequency and other points Additionally the Bus Limit Enable function as well as the Line Loss Mode alarm and recovery points are determined from this value Meas Volts Parameter Number 272 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the measured output voltage Display Units Drive Units 1 Volt 4096 Drive Rtd Volts present at terminals U V amp W T1 T2 amp T3 Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20096 Rated Drive Output Voltage EEPROM Cksum The value of this parameter provides a checksum value that indicates a change in drive programming has occurred Parameter Number 172 Parameter Type Read Only Display Units Drive Units None Programming 6 41 This group contains a number of Read Only parameters that display drive operating char acteristics
278. ter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page C 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers CE Conformity C 5 Filter Mounting continued Important Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond Spacing is determined by Conduit Box Three Phase Three Phase Input Input Access Panel and Input Terminal Block Lower Access Panel To Motor Nipple Fitting Figure C 3 Figure C 4 1336 PLUS II 1336 PLUS II Through the Wall Mounting Conventional Mounting Frames D amp E Frames D amp E 1 Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page C 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers C 6 CE Conformity Filter Mounting continued Important A positive electrical bond must be maintained between the enclosure and filter including brackets fans and drive To assure a positive electrical bond an
279. th 465 8 18 34 P N TX N nm b N haJ 389 Je j E I 2 82 7 Cable Access Plate 2Places u par E L ND pi Enclosure s Front b ue V 108 0x 158 8 494 4 25 x 6 25 0 75 Y N 196 9 N A 7 75 gt PA Suggested Anchoring Point M10 Hardware Required Alternate Fan Locations SA y y e EVER 203 2 355 6 8 00 14 00 Typical Typical Bracket Dimensions B 21 May require additional anchoring for shipping Typical Fan Location 2 Places 1 Each Door Typical Air Inlet 2 Places 1 Each Door Suggested Anti Roll Anchoring Point Pre Wired DC Bus Inductor Must be Mounted Separately Typical Placement Shown Refer to Figure 2 2 for Wiring Details B 22 Dimensions Typical G Frame Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure a 7 gt 6209 gt J PUT 11 x 19 1 y Y 0 44 x 0 75 gt 744 4 414 __ 1 62 a826 8 25 134 1 528 4 N NS 54 D 2 17 DS P Bracket e sd Important This information represents the method used to factory mount an open type Frame G in an enclosure specifically designed by Allen Bradley Illustrations are only intended to identif
280. th such current Control and signal conductors should not be run near or parallel to power conductors Motor Cable The ground conductor of the motor cable drive end must be con nected directly to the drive ground PE terminal not to the enclosure bus bar Grounding directly to the drive and filter if installed can provide a direct route for high frequency current returning from the motor frame and ground conductor At the motor end the ground con ductor should also be connected to the motor case ground If shielded or armored cables are used the shield armor should also be grounded at both ends as described above Encoder amp Communications Cabling If encoder connections or communications cables are used the wiring must be separated from power cabling This can be accomplished with carefully routed shielded cable ground cable shield at the drive end only or a separate steel conduit grounded at both ends Discrete Control and Signal Wiring The control and signal wiring must be grounded at a single point in the system remote from the drive This means the OV or ground terminal should be grounded at the equipment end not the drive end If shielded control and signal wires are used the shield must also be grounded at this point If the control and signal wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded control and signal wiring may not be necessary but is always reco
281. the number of the param eter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 1 of the HIM Display Panel The maximum process value that can be displayed is 99 999 99 If this value is exceeded a character string of asterisks will appear on the display Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default 127 Read and Write Parameter Parameter 1 Process 1 Scale Parameter Number 128 Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the scaling multiplier for Process 1 Par Display Units Drive Units Numeric Scale x 100 The displayed value will be Factory Default 1 00 Process 1 Par actual value Minimum Value 327 68 x Process 1 Scale value Maximum Value 327 67 Displayed Value Process 1 Txt 1 8 Parameter Number s 129 136 Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the User Units description for the value determined Display Units Drive Units ASCII Code ASCII Code by Process 1 Par and Process 1 Scale This 8 character Factory Default Volts description will be shown on line 1 of the display Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A Process 2 Par Parameter Number 180 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter should be set to the number of the param Display Units Drive Units Parameter Parameter eter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 2 ofthe Factory Default 54 HIM Display Panel The maximum process value that can be d
282. the steady state torque performance of the motor at low speeds the default Speed Control method is Slip Compensation The factory default value for Slip F L A is 1 0 Hz Optimum motor performance depends on accurate setting of Slip F L A Estimate your motor slip value using the following Motor Sync RPM Motor Rated RPM Motor Sync RPM x Motor Rated Freq Hz Example 1800 1778 1800 Continued on next page x 60 0 7 Hz Slip F L A Start Up 5 11 Advanced Start Up Procedure while following these steps Press these keys th tee tf Bu e This will provide a starting point for slip compensation adjustment If neces sary further adjustment can be made while the motor is under load A From the Status Display press the Enter key or any key Choose Mode will be displayed w Press the Increment or Decrement key until Program is displayed o Press Enter iw Press the Increment key until Feature Select is displayed m Press Enter m Press the Increment or Decrement keys until Slip F L A is displayed Press SELect The first character of line 2 will now flash D Use the Increment Decrement keys to program the value calculated above then press Enter The HIM Display will show Choose Mode EEProm Choose Mode Program Metering Feature Select Dwell Frequency Slip F L A Slip F L A 0 7 Hz Program NP Data
283. this conduit should be disabled This will eliminate the pos sible shock hazard from cross coupled drive motor leads Motor Lead Lengths Installations with long cables to the motor may require the addition of output reactors or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at the motor Excessive cable charging current can also reduce the amount of current available to produce rated motor torque Refer to Tables 2 F and 2 G for the maximum cable length allowed for various installa tion techniques Shaded distances are restricted by cable capacitance charging current The figure below demonstrates how total cable length is calculated Failure to follow these guidelines can result in poor motor performance and nuisance drive overcurrent or overload tripping For installations that exceed the recommended maximum lengths listed contact the factory Please note that the cable lengths shown are guidelines Your applica tion may be restricted to a shorter cable length due to wire type wire placement line reactor and type of motor How to Measure Motor Cable Lengths Limited by Capacitance 152 4 500 167 6 550 182 9 600 Installation Wiring 2 19
284. thorized changes to parameters Logout must be per formed as described below A Pressthe Increment or Decrement key until Password is displayed B Press Enter C Press the Increment or Decrement key until Logout is displayed D Press Enter to log out of the Password mode Choose Mode Password Password Login Password Logout Choose Mode Password Handheld HIM Operation If remote programming is desired a handheld HIM can be connected to the drive Refer to Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2 for details Important Disconnecting a handheld HIM or other SCANport device from a drive while power is applied will cause a Serial Fault unless the Logic Mask parameter has been set to disable this fault or Control Logic Control Status menu has been disabled except Series A HIMs below version 3 0 Setting any bit of the Logic Mask parameter to 0 will disable Serial Fault from a HIM on the corresponding adapter Note that this also disables all HIM control functions except Stop 3 14 Human Interface Module End of Chapter What is Flash Memory Firmware Download Requirements Chapter 4 Flash Memory The 1336 PLUS II stores its operating firmware in state of the art Flash Memory Chapter 4 will briefly describe flash memory and the method available to upgrade the drive firmware in the event that soft ware enhancements become available The firmware including parameter layout
285. tia Ride Through If the drive is used to determine loss of AC input as op posed to an external device it will monitor the falling DC bus voltage When Vbus falls below 85 of nominal a line loss condition is issued and an alarm bit is set The line loss mode selected along with Line Loss Fault and Low Bus Fault will determine the drives response to a loss of input With this parameter set to LoBus gt Off and Line Loss Fault is Enabled a fault is issued 0 5 seconds after a line loss condition Disabled a fault will not be issued Low Bus Fault is Enabled a fault is issued at the bus undervoltage trip level Disabled a fault will not be issued With this parameter set to LoBus gt Decel and Line Loss Fault amp Low Bus Fault are disabled the drive will decelerate the output frequency following motor speed to create a regenerative condition that maintains Vbus at 85 nominal The amount of available me chanical energy determines the length of ride through If this parameter LoBus gt Off then LLoss Restart de termines the reconnect scheme for the motor If this parameter is set to LoBus gt Decel no reconnect scheme is required Parameter Number 256 Parameter Type Read Write Factory Default LoBus gt Off Units Display Drive LoBus Off 0 Input gt Oft 1 LoBus Decel 2 Input Decel 3 Turn off output on 15 Vbus Not
286. tor NP Volts Encoder Type Rotate Motor Compute Flux Configure Inputs Configure Inputs Decel Time 1 Maximum Freq Motor NP Amps Encoder PPR Check Direction Current amp Input Mode Anlg In 0 2 Lo Overload Amps Base Voltage Motor NP Hertz Check Encoder Direction IR Drop TB3 Term Sel Anlg In 0 2 Hi LE m i ee oe ae oaen See Important Configure Outputs Anlg Signal Loss req elect Statement how CR1 4 Out Select Configure Outputs Dig Out Freq Anlg Out 0 1 Sel Dig Out Current Anlg Out 0 1 Offset Dig Out Torque Anlg Out 0 1 Abs SM RU m Dig At Temp Anlg Out 0 1 Lo Important The Autotune routine is designed for use with standard induction motors only It should not be used with synchronous motors Anlg Out 0 1 Hi 6 Start up is complete Remove all power then reconnect load to motor Check for proper operation Advanced Start Up Start Up 5 5 This procedure is designed for complex applications requiring a more detailed start up Advanced Start Up Procedure while following these steps Press these keys Disconnect Motor 1 Remove the drive cover and disconnect the motor leads from TB1 terminals U V W T1 T2 and T3 The HIM Display will show Apply Power Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive The LCD Display should light and display a drive status of Stopped and an output frequency of 0 00 Hz If the drive detects a fault a brief st
287. tory Default Disabled F03 0 5 seconds after a Line Loss in Progress alarm Units Display Drive Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Power Loss Fault Generated Programming 6 33 Blwn Fuse Fit Parameter Number 81 Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter will allow monitoring of the bus Factory Default Enabled fuse in 30 kW 40 HP and up drives and cause a Blwn Units Display Drive Fuse Fit F58 Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Blwn Fuse Flt Generated Low Bus Fau It Parameter Number 91 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the drivefaultcondition Factory Default Enabled for bus voltage below the Bus Undervoltage Trip value set Units Display Drive by Min Bus volts Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Undervolt Fault Generated Fault Data Parameter Number 207 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays fault related parameter numbers Display Units Drive Units Parameter 4 Parameter or bit array information Certain faults generate additional Factory Default None information to aid fault diagnosis See Chapter 7 for further Minimum Value 1 information Maximum Value 255 Fit Motor Mode Parameter Number 143 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the motor mode active atthe time Factory Default None of the last fault Units Display Drive 1 1 Power up sequence in
288. tribution Systems on page 2 3 an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended If the line to ground voltages on any phase can exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched in and out an isolation transformer or 5 line reactor is recommended between the drive and capaci tors If the capacitors are permanently connected and not switched the general rules above apply Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers Installation Wiring 2 5 The 1336 PLUS II can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker Local national electrical codes may determine addi tional requirements for these installations The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings and recom mended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings ATTENTION The 1336 PLUS I does not provide input power short circuit protection Specifications for the recom mended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided Fusing If fuses are c
289. tructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switch ing frequencies up to 20 kHz They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv dt When using motor line reactors it is recommended that the drive PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors Important By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor this may also mean a reduction of motor torque 1336 PLUS r1 D G Frame drives have cooling fans that utilize a trans former to match the input line voltage to the proper fan voltage If an input voltage other than the standard 240 480 or 600V AC is used the transformer tap may have to be changed see below ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard assure that all power to the drive has been removed before proceeding 1 Ensure that all power has been removed to the drive 2 Locate the transformer in the lower left corner of the drive chassis Note lead placement tap being used 3 Determine the correct tap from the following figure and verify 4 If present tap is incorrect remove the insulating sleeve from the correct tap 5 Remove the wire lead presently connected and place on the selected tap Replace the insulating sleeve on the unused ta
290. ts Drive Units 0 1 Volts 4096 Drive Rtd Volts fault alarm will occur The sensitivity for detecting ablown Factory Default 9 0 18 0 22 5 Volts fuse on a three phase system can be increased by 12 4 24 7 30 9 Volts Firmware 6 001 amp later lowering the setting for this parameter Minimum Value 5 1 10 1 12 7 Volts Maximum Value 22 5 45 0 56 2 Volts 45 0 90 0 112 5 Volts Firmware 6 001 amp later Precharge Fault Parameter Number 332 Parameter Type Read and Write Enables or disables the Precharge Fault which indicates Factory Default Enabled insufficient DC bus charging 20 seconds after power up Units Display Drive Disabled 0 No Fault Generated Enabled 1 Precharge Fault Generated Motor OL Ret Firmware 6 001 amp later Parameter Number 379 Parameter Type Read and Write When enabled the accumulated motor overload count will Factory Default Disabled be stored on power down and restored on power up From Units Display Drive that point normal overload operation continues When the value is changed from enabled to disabled the motor overload count will be reset to 0 Disabled 0 Motor OL count not saved Enabled 1 Motor OL count saved on power down and restored on power up 6 36 Programming This group of parameters contains values that can be helpful in explaining the operation of Diagnostics the drive Drive status direction control and alarm conditions as well as drive ratings are included
291. ty C 3 EMC Enclosure Kit Selection Enclosure Kit Catalog Number Frame Reference 200 240V Rating 380 480V Rating 500 600V Rating A1 A2 A3 1336F AE3 1336F AE3 A4 1336F AE2 1336F AE2 1336F AE2 B 1336F AE4 1336F AE4 1336F AE4 C 1336F AE5 1336F AE5 1336F AE5 D 1336F AE6 1336F AE6 1336F AE6 E 1336F AE7 1336F AE7 1336F AE7 RFI Filter Installation Important Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter for details The RFI filter must be connected between the incoming AC supply line and the drive input terminals RFI Filter Leakage Current The RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents Therefore a solid ground connection must be provided as shown below damage RFI filters can only be used with AC supplies that ATTENTION To guard against possible equipment are nominally balanced and grounded with respect to ground In some installations three phase supplies are occasionally connected in a 3 wire configuration with one phase grounded Grounded Delta The filter must not be used in Grounded Delta supplies Electrical Configuration Conduit 4 Wire Cable RFI Filter Line Load uo R Lt l S 12 T Shield Terminated in Cable Clamp on A Frame Drives Nearest Building Structure Steel 0 fa ALLEN BRADLEY C S008 Aloo o E oo OE Y
292. ual ramp will Factory Default 0 0 Sec be the sum of the two If S Curve Time is gt the programmed Minimum Value 0 0 Sec accel decel times a fixed S curve will be created whose time Maximum Value 1800 0 Sec is double the programmed accel decel time Programming 6 21 Feature Select Fixed S Cu rve e S Curve Time Accel Time 1 or 2 e S Curve Time Decel Time 1 or 2 m Accel Time 2 x Accel Time 1 or 2 Case 1 Decel Time 2 x Decel Time 1 or 2 Adjustable S Curve Speed Case 1 see adjacent diagram S Curve Time Accel Time 1 or 2 and 4 S Curve Time lt Decel Time 1 or 2 then l l Accel Time Accel Time 1 or 2 S Curve Time and l l Decel Time Decel Time 1 or 2 S Curve Time lem Accel Time 1or2 em Decel Time map Time 1or2 Case2 S Curve Time 2 Accel Time 1 or 2 and S Curve Time gt Decel Time 1 or 2 then Case 2 Accel Time 2 x Accel Time 1 or 2 and Decel Time 2 x Decel Time 1 or 2 Note If S Curve Time gt programmed accel decel times Speed any further increase in S Curve Time will have no effect on the total accel decel times 8 Decel Time 1or2 Time Language Parameter Number 47 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the language for the HIM display Factory Default English To return to the default language English after an alter Units Display Drive nate language has been inadvertently selected E
293. uctor with the ground lead being con nected directly to the drive ground terminal PE and the motor frame ground terminal See table below Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable is recommended if sensitive circuits or devices are connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor see table Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating Type Description Standard 600V 90 C 194 F Four tinned copper conductors with XLP insulation Option 1 XHHW2 RHW 2 Copper braid aluminum foil combination shield and Anixter B209500 tinned copper drain wire B209507 Belden 29501 PVC jacket 29507 or equivalent Standard Tray rated 600V 90 C Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Option 2 194 F RHH RHW 2 e 5 mil single helical copper tape 25 overlap min Anixter OLF 7xxxxx or with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield equivalent PVC jacket Class amp Il Tray rated 600V 90 C Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation Division amp I 194 F RHH RHW 2 and impervious corrugated continuously w
294. uency in kHz A 6 Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40 C Ambient amp Open Drive in 50 C Ambient Specifications and Supplemental Information Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41 C amp 50 C Figure Rating Derate Figure Rating Derate Figure K 100 Figure L 100 C125 95 A075 B150 o 999 o amp 90 od ZE ZE 92 a aq 85 ac 5 g 80 6 88 un 5 84 70 v 65 t 1 i 80 2 4 40 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure M 100 Figure N 100 A100 B200 95 A125 o T g 9 B250 g amp 90 E a Ot 85 Sg 30 6 80 SS 75 al E 75 70 70 65 i 65 2 4 6 2 4 60 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure O 100 Figure P BP250 96 BP300 o a o BPR250 928 BPR300 92 E 92 E ax ac SB su 58 s9 C s Gc f 84 E 80 1 1 65 7 1 1 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure Q 10096 Figure R 100 BP350 o 90 BP400 a 90 oo oa BPR350 F3 Jm BPR400 BE ac amp x SB 70 58 70 s c s9 E e0 60 50 i 50 7 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure S 3008 Figure T Assumes two 2 725 CFM cooling fans for BP450 E B500 IP 20 NEMA Type 1 enclosure BPR450 gare B600 Lug E Ew wn 90 oa SB 70 E 00 60 Hz xs os o 70 n 28 Be 50 E i i
295. uire a minimum of 152 4 mm 6 0 in between the drive back and mounting wall if drives are mounted with sides touching another device or wall A minimum of 76 2 mm 3 0 in is required on the sides if the back of the drive is mounted against a wall or other device 2 2 Installation Wiring Installation Guidelines o PER S T GND L1 L2 L3 ALLEN BRADLEY EY C Boone Olea El 2 oo 8 8 g PE T1 T2 T3 GDU V W AC Supply Source Input Power Conditioning Input Fusing amp Circuit Breakers Input Devices Input Filters Electrical Interference Grounding Power Cabling Control amp Signal Cabling Output Devices Cable Termination Motor Page 2 3 Page 2 4 Page 2 5 Page 2 9 Page 2 1 Page 2 9 Page 2 11 Page 2 1 Page 2 24 Page 2 37 Page 2 37 AC Supply Source Installation Wiring 2 3 1336 PLUS II drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of deliv ering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes 600 volts Refer to Table 2 A for actual interrupt ratings based on fuse or circuit breaker choice ATTENTION To guard against personal injury a
296. uously to indicate the commanded direction of rotation If the second LED is flashing the drive has been commanded to change direction but is still decelerating Up Down Arrows only available with digital speed control Pressing these keys will increase or decrease the HIM frequency command An indication of this command will be shown on the visual Speed Indicator The drive will run at this command if the HIM is the selected frequency reference See Freq Select 1 and Freq Select 2 Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current HIM frequency command in HIM memory Cycling power or removing the HIM from the drive will set the frequency command to the value stored in HIM memory If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered the Up Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot Speed Indicator only available with digital speed control Illuminates in steps to give an approximate visual indication of the commanded speed If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered the Up Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot When power is first applied to the drive the HIM will cycle through a series of displays These displays will show drive name HIM ID number and communication status Upon completion the Status Display see Figure 3 3 will be shown This display shows the current status of the drive i e Stopped Running etc or any faults that may be present
297. uring normal operating conditions no faults present drive running the CR3 con tacts default firmware setting at TB2 13 amp 14 are open and the con tacts at TB2 14 amp 15 are closed When a fault occurs the state of these contacts will change 7 2 Troubleshooting Table 7 A 1336 PLUS Fault Descriptions Name amp Fault Adptr Freq Err 65 Description The SCANport adapter that was the selected frequency reference sent a frequency greater than 32767 to the drive Action Correct the problem that is causing the SCANport adapter to send the illegal frequency reference to the drive Auxiliary Fault 02 The auxiliary input interlock is open If Control Interface option is installed check TB3 connections If not installed set Input Mode to Status Bgnd 10ms Over Microprocessor loop fault Occurs Replace Main Control Board or com 51 if the 10ms background task plete drive as required hasn t been run in 15 ms Bipolar Dir Fit 3 Wire Bi polar input is the a Mask out direction control at bit 7 16 active frequency reference and _ of Direction Mask b Remove or direction control is not possible mask other direction control sources 2 Wire Run Forward or Reverse Set bit 7 of Direction Mask to zero commands attempt direction con trol but bi polar input is not masked from direction control Blwn Fuse Fit If the difference between
298. ut 0 Hi 235 Dig Out Torque 161 Anlg Out 1 Sel 274 Dig At Temp 267 Anlg Out 1 Abs 277 PI Max Error 293 Anlg Out 1 Offst 278 Pulse Out Select 280 Anlg Out 1 Lo 275 Pulse Out Scale 281 Anlg Out 1 Hi 276 Pulse In Scale 264 Slot A Option 252 At Time 327 3 Slot B Option 253 Remote CR Output 326 Bus Reg Level 4 Max Bus Volts 325 3 An n ni ni ni Page 6 30 g In 0 Lo 237 g In 0 Hi 238 nalog Trim En 90 g In 1 Lo 239 g In 1 Hi 240 g In 2 Lo 248 g In 2 Hi 249 g Signal Loss 250 4 20mA Loss Sel 150 Page 6 32 Fault Buffer 0 Fault Buffer 1 Fault Buffer 2 88 Fault Butfer 3 89 Clear Fault 51 Cur Lim Trip En Shear Pin Fault 226 Motor OL Fault 201 Motor Therm Fit 268 Line Loss Fault 40 Blwn Fuse Fit 81 Low Bus Fault 91 Fault Data 207 Fit Motor Mode 143 Fit Power Mode 144 Fault Frequency 145 Fault Status 1 146 Fault Status 2 286 Fault Alarms 1 173 Fault Alarms 2 287 Fit Clear Mode 39 86 87 82 Precharge Fault 332 Motor OL Ret Page 6 36 Drive Status 1 59 Drive Status 2 236 Application Sts 316 Drive Alarm 1 60 Drive Alarm 2 269 Latched Alarms 1 205 Latched Alarms 2 270 Input Status 55 Freq Source 62 Freq Command 65 Drive Direction 69 Stop Mode Used 26 Motor Mode 141 Power Mode 142 Output Pulses 67 Current Angle 72 Heatsink Temp 70 Set Defaults 64
299. ut 0 Lo Anlg Out 0 Hi Anlg In 0 Lo Anlg In 0 Hi Anlg In 1 Lo Anlg In 1 Hi Input Mode TB3 Term 22 Sel Setting No Name 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 256 264 267 268 271 274 275 276 277 278 280 281 282 283 284 288 289 290 291 292 303 304 305 307 308 310 311 312 313 315 317 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 TB3 Term 23 Sel TB3 Term 24 Sel TB3 Term 26 Sel TB3 Term 27 Sel TB3 Term 28 Sel Anlg In 2 Lo Anlg In 2 Hi Anlg Signal Loss Line Loss Mode Pulse In Scale Dig At Temp Motor Therm FIt Alarm Mask 2 Anlg Out 1 Sel Anlg Out 1 Lo Anlg Out 1 Hi Anlg Out 1 Abs Anlg Out 1 Offst Pulse Out Select Pulse Out Scale Enc Count Scale Encoder Counts Encoder Loss Sel Bus Regulation Phase Loss Det Load Loss Detect Load Loss Level Load Loss Time Current Lmt En Traverse Dec Traverse Mask Sync Time Sync Mask Sync Loss Sel Sync Loss Gain Sync Loss Time Sync Loss Comp Alt Type 2 Cmd Run Accel Volts Speed Brake En ine Loss Volts oss Recover Ride Thru Volts Min Bus Volts Stability Gain Bus Reg Max Bus Remote CR Output At Time Max Enc Counts Bidir In Offset Phase Loss Mode Phase Loss Level Precharge Fault PWM Comp Time Break Freq PWM Li L A 17 When using a compatible HIM see Table 3 A the parameters listed Setting A 18 Name SLO Logic Step SLO Logic Jump SLO Step Jump SLO Step Setting SLO Time SLO Encode
300. ux control plus the added feature of an auto econo mizer If a motor remains lightly loaded the drive will reduce output voltage and therefore output kW in or der to reduce the energy operating costs of the lightly loaded motor This can result in up to 20 kW savings Economize 0 Stator Flux control with Economize Sens Vector 1 Stator Flux control Fixed Boost 2 V Hz w programmed accel run boost Full Custom 3 V Hz with full configuration Default Fixed Motor Rated d Base Voltage and Base Maximum Voltage Base Frequency Maximum Base Maximum Frequency v Voltage Voltage Factory Default Start Boost A Run Boost gt 071 0 1 re 0 Frequency 0 Frequency Motor Rated and Maximum Full Custom Maximum Base Voltage 4 Maximum Voltage Base Frequency Maximum Frequency Motor Rated Voltage Break Voltage Start Boost Break Frequency Run Boost P 0 Ti 0 Frequency Motor Rated Maximum Flux Amps Ref Parameter Number 192 Parameter Type Read and Write Used in Economize amp Sens Vector modes Sets the Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp 4096 Drive Rated Amps value of amps required to maintain full motor flux If setto Factory Default 0 0 Amps zero the drive will use an internal value based on Motor Minimum Value 0 0 Amps NP Amps and drive kW HP Refer to Chapter 5 for setup information Maximum Value 75 096 of Drive VT Rat
301. ved there will be a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect amp the motor will coast to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required Repeated Application Removal of Input Power A ATTENTION The drive is intended to be controlled by control input signals that will start and stop the motor A device that routinely disconnects then reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor is not recommended Bypass Contactors A ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals mproper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Immunity The immunity of 1336 PLUS II drives to externally generated interfer ence is good Usually no special precautions are required beyond the installation practices provided in this publication It is recommended that the coils of DC energized contactors associ ated with drives be suppressed with a diode or similar device since they can generate severe electrical transients 2 10 Installation Wiring RFI Filtering CE Conformity Emission Careful attention must be given to the arrangement of power and ground connections to the drive
302. verse function Closed loop PI control P Jump 6 Process Pl 7 Slip F L A This value sets the amount of automatic increase or de crease to the drive output to compensate for motor slip When Speed Control is set to Slip Comp a percentage of this value proportional to output current is added to the drive output frequency When Speed Control is set to Droop a percentage of this value proportional to output current is subtracted from the drive output frequency Sync RPM Rated RPM Sync RPM x Rated Hz Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 42 Read and Write 0 1 Hertz Hertz x 10 1 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 10 0 Hz 6 20 Programming Feature Select Slip Comp Gain Parameter Number 195 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter is the gain for the slip compensation and Display Units Drive Units None adjusts the recovery rate after a load change Factory Default 1 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 40 Run On Power Up Parameter Number 14 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the function that allows the drive Factory Default Disabled to automatically restart on Power Up This parameter re Units Display Drive quires that a two wire control scheme be installed at TB3 Disabled 0 and that a valid start contact be present Refer to Input Enabled 1 Mode Selection in Chapter 2 Voltag
303. version 3 0 This mode allows the drive logic mask to be disabled thus preventing a Serial Fault when the HIM is removed while drive power is applied The logic mask can be disabled with Series A HIMs versions below 3 0 by using Logic Mask as explained on page 3 13 A From the Status Display press Enter or any key Choose Mode will be shown Press the Increment or Decrement key until Control Status is displayed Press Enter Select Control Logic using the Increment Decrement keys Press Enter Press the SELect key then use the Increment or Decrement key to select Disabled or Enable Press Enter The logic mask is now disabled or enabled The HIM Display will show Choose Mode Display Choose Mode Control Status Control Status Control Logic Control Logic Disabled Press these keys Fault Queue Clear Faults a a MI Human Interface Module 3 11 Control Status Mode continued while following these steps 2 This menu provides a means to view the fault queue and clear it when desired A Fromthe Control Status menu press the Increment or Decrement key until Fault Queue is displayed B Press Enter C Press the Increment or Decrement key until View Faults is displayed D Press Enter The fault queue will be displayed Trip displayed with a fault will indicate the fault that tripped the drive E Use the Increment
304. ward commanded to output This command may come fromany Factory Default None one of the frequency sources selected by Freq Select 1 Minimum Value 400 00 Hz or Freq Select 2 Maximum Value 400 00 Hz Drive Direction Parameter Number 69 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays the commanded running Factory Default None direction Units Display Drive Forward 0 Reverse 1 Stop Mode Used Parameter Number 26 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the active stop mode Factory Default Coast Units Display Drive Coast 0 See Stop Select 1 on page 6 9 DC Brake 1 See Stop Select 1 on page 6 9 Ramp 2 See Stop Select 1 on page 6 9 S Curve 3 See Stop Select 1 on page 6 9 Ramp to Hold 4 See Stop Select 1 on page 6 9 Motor Mode Parameter Number 141 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the motor mode Factory Default None Units Display Drive 1 1 Power up sequence in progress 2 2 Motor connected drive off 9 3 DC boost being applied 4 4 Motor running at Dwell Frequency b 5 Motor accelerating 6 6 Motor at command speed 7 7 Motor decelerating 8 8 Motor coasting 9 9 Motor under DC braking 10 10 Waiting for fault reset returns to 0 11 11 Start mode 12 12 Flying start search enable 18 18 Flying start w encoder in process Programming 6 39 Power Mode Parameter Number 142 Parameter Type Read Only This paramet
305. y above Factory Default None 115 of drive rated amps will accumulate a value of 100 and Minimum Value 0 generate a Power Overload Fault F64 Maximum Value 200 Motor OL Count Parameter Number 202 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the percentage of accumulated Display Units Drive Units 1 4096 100 t for the motor overload protection Running continuously at Factory Default None programmed Overload Amps will accumulate approximately Minimum Value 0 70 Reduction of load will reduce the OL count 100 value Maximum Value 200 will generate an Overload Fault F07 Last Fault Parameter Number 4 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the last drive fault It is updated Display Units Drive Units Fault Number Fault Number whenever a new fault occurs Factory Default None Minimum Value None Maximum Value None Programming 6 7 Torque Current Parameter Number 162 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of current that is in Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp 4096 100 Drive Rated Amps phase with the fundamental voltage component It isthe Factory Default None current that is actually producing torque Minimum Value 200 Drive Rating Maximum Value 200 Drive Rating Flux Current Parameter Number 163 Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of current that is out Display Units Drive Units 0 1 Amp 4096 100 Drive Rated Amps of ph
306. y paint near all mounting points must be removed All Dimensions in Millimeters and Inches Important Cooling fans are required for proper drive operation Fans and air intake openings must be EMI shielded Refer Appendix A for CFM recommendations 75 0 2 95 L to Drive Input Terminals Mounting Brackets A AC Input Terminals NA p d 831 0 82 72 Important This information represents the method used to mount 1336 RFB 475 590 amp 670 filters in an Allen Bradley supplied EMC enclosure User supplied EMC enclosures must follow all of the guidelines shown Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and fabricate steel components based on the Typical Drive Placement actual mounting configuration calculated loads Typical Bracket and enclosure specifications for Stability G Frame Only Mount between PE Terminals amp Enclosure Figure C 5 1336 PLUS i Typical Filter Mounting Frames F amp G Input power source to filter and output power filter to drive and drive to motor wiring must be in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation Shielding armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate See requirements 5 amp 6 on page C 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C 2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers
307. y structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration calculated loads and enclosure specifications Minimum thickness of all parts 4 6 0 18 p xc x EUN 1542 X 6 07 i 5 188 0 2Pls 7 40 EachEnd Length y 549 4 21 63 J X Y ri gt 572 e 4 Ral 2 25 Brace pe 25 4 1 00 j Uie f x a 5 50 8 2 00 Vs ho x 682 2 26 86 gt gt Be omen ee x 711 2 28 00 gt P CE Conformity Low Voltage Directive The following low voltage directives apply EN 60204 1 PREN 50178 EMC Directive Appendix C This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC using a technical construction file and the following standards EN 50081 1 2 Generic Emission Standard EN 50082 1 2 Generic Immunity Standard Declarations of Conformity to the European Union Directives are available Please contact your Allen Bradley Sales Representative Marked for all applicable directives Emissions EN 50081 1 EN 50081 2 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class B EN 61800 3 Immunity EN 50082 1 EN 50082 2 IEC 801 1 2 3 4 6 8 per EN 50082 1 2 EN 61800 3 Low Voltage EN 60204 1 PREN 50178 Ce Note Installation gui
308. ype Read and Write This parameter enables Analog In 0 as a trim input Setting Factory Default Disabled this parameter to Enable creates a trim signal to the ac Units Display Drive tive frequency Seg at Analog In 0 The trim value is Disabled 0 10 of Maximum Freq Enabled 1 Minimum Input 10 6 Trim Mid Point Input No Trim Maximum Input 10 Trim Anlg Signal Loss Parameter Number 250 Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the drive reaction to a loss of analog input signal This signal could represent commanded fre Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti Bito quency PI feedback or others Bits 0 2 define the input as a pot with wiper loss detect and will generate an Open Pot Fault F09 Bits 3 5 define the input as offset 4mA 2V with loss detect below that value see below bs Input 0 Signal Loss for Pot 12 Yes 0 No Input 1 Signal Loss for Pot 12 Yes 0 No Input 2 Signal Loss for Pot 12 Yes 0 No Input 0 Signal Loss for 4 20mA 2 10V 1 Yes 0 No gt Input 1 Signal Loss for 4 20mA 2 10V 1 Yes 0 No gt Input 2 Signal Loss for 4 20mA 2 10V 1 Yes 0 No Not Used Not Used 4 20mA Loss Sel Parameter Number 150 Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the drives response to aloss of Factory Default Min Alarm analog input signal input below 2V or 4mA Requires that Units Display Drive Action the loss selection bits for A

1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive - Mid

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents